You are on page 1of 1112

RAN14.

0

Feature Activation Guide

Issue 07
Date 2013-06-28

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2013. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.

The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China

Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential i
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide About This Document

About This Document

Purpose
This document provides guidelines for enabling or disabling a feature after initial configuration.
Based on the activation, verification, and deactivation of a feature in the feature list, the
guidelines aim to ensure that the feature is available on the network.
This document describes how to activate a license and configure a feature in RAN.
NOTE

The BSC6900 is used as an example to describe the network controller in this document.

Product Version
The solution version is RAN14.0 related to this document, for more details you can refer to the
following table.

Product Name Product Version

BSC6900 V900R014C00

NodeB V100R014

NodeB V200R014

Intended Audience
This document is intended for:
l Technical support engineers
l Maintenance engineers
l Field engineers
l Network optimization engineers

Organization
1 Changes in the RAN Feature Activation Guide

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ii
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide About This Document

This chapter describes the changes in the RAN Feature Activation Guide.
2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions
RANFeatures are classified into basic and optional features. Basic features are not license-
controlled and therefore do not require license activation before use. Some optional features are
license-controlled and therefore require license activation before use. If the Configuration
Method column for a basic feature in the RAN basic feature list is None, enabling this feature
does not involve any configurations. If the Configuration Method column for an optional feature
in the RAN optional feature list is None, this feature is enabled once it is activated.
3 Overview of Configurations on the CME
This section provides an overview of the configuration on the CME. The CME is a configuration
tool on GUIs assisting you to effectively configure the data about wireless NE features. You can
reconfigure configuration parameters by using the configuration expresses provided by the CME
to activate or deactivate specified features.
4 Activating the UMTS License
In the case of certain UMTS features, a license control item is defined for each feature. The
license control item of a feature must be activated before the configuration and use of the feature.
The license control items related to the RNC can be activated on the M2000 or RNC LMT,
whereas those related to the NodeB can be activated only on the M2000.
5 Configuring 3.4/6.8/13.6/27.2Kbps RRC Connection and Radio Access Bearer
Establishment and Release
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010510
3.4/6.8/13.6/27.2Kbps RRC Connection and Radio Access Bearer Establishment and Release.
6 Configuring Conversational QoS Class
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010501
Conversational QoS Class.
7 Configuring Streaming QoS Class
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010502
Streaming QoS Class.
8 Configuring Interactive QoS Class
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010503
Interactive QoS Class.
9 Configuring Background QoS Class
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010504
Background QoS Class.
10 Configuring Emergency Call
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-021104
Emergency Call.
11 Configuring RAB Quality of Service Renegotiation over Iu Interface
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010506
RAB Quality of Service Renegotiation over Iu Interface.

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iii
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide About This Document

12 Configuring 2-Way Antenna Receive Diversity
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210604
2-Way Antenna Receive Diversity.
13 Configuring Cell Digital Combination and Split
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010205
Cell Digital Combination and Split.
14 Configuring UE State in Connected Mode (CELL_DCH, CELL_PCH, URA_PCH,
CELL_FACH)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010202
UE State in Connected Mode (CELL_DCH, CELL_PCH, URA_PCH, CELL_FACH).
15 Configuring Paging UE in Idle, CELL_PCH, URA_PCH State (Type 1)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010301
Paging UE in Idle, CELL_PCH, URA_PCH State (Type 1).
16 Configuring Paging UE in CELL_FACH, CELL_DCH State (Type 2)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010302
Paging UE in CELL_FACH, CELL_DCH State (Type 2).
17 Configuring Dynamic Channel Configuration Control
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-021101
Dynamic Channel Configuration Control (DCCC). (This feature cannot be configured using the
CME. )
18 Configuring Integrity Protection
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-011401
Integrity Protection.
19 Configuring Encryption
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-011402
Encryption.
20 Configuring Open Loop Power Control
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020501
Open Loop Power Control.
21 Configuring Downlink Power Balance
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020502
Downlink Power Balance.
22 Configuring Outer Loop Power Control
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020503
Outer Loop Power Control.
23 Configuring Inner Loop Power Control
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020504
Inner Loop Power Control.

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iv
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide About This Document

24 Configuring Admission Control
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020101
Admission Control.
25 Configuring Load Measurement
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020102
Load Measurement.
26 Configuring Load Reshuffling
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020106
Load Reshuffling.
27 Configuring Overload Control
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020107
Overload Control.
28 Configuring Code Resource Management
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020108
Code Resource Management.
29 Configuring Potential User Control
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020105
Potential User Control.
30 Configuring Cell Barring
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-021102
Cell Barring.
31 Configuring Shared Network Support in Connected Mode
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-021301
Shared Network Support in Connected Mode. (This feature cannot be configured using the
CME. )
32 Configuring Intra NodeB Softer Handover
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020201
Intra NodeB Softer Handover.
33 Configuring Intra RNC Soft Handover
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020202
Intra RNC Soft Handover.
34 Configuring Inter RNC Soft Handover
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020203
Inter RNC Soft Handover.
35 Configuring Intra Frequency Hard Handover
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020301
Intra Frequency Hard Handover.
36 Configuring Intra RNC Cell Update

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential v
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide About This Document

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010801
Intra RNC Cell Update.
37 Configuring Inter RNC Cell Update
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010802
Inter RNC Cell Update.
38 Configuring Intra RNC URA Update
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010901
Intra RNC URA Update.
39 Configuring Inter RNC URA Update
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010902
Inter RNC URA Update.
40 Configuring Direct Signaling Connection Re-establishment (DSCR)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-021400
Direct Signaling Connection Re-establishment (DSCR).
41 Configuring CS Fallback Guarantee for LTE Emergency Calls
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-140102
CS Fallback Guarantee for LTE Emergency Calls. For details about how to configure this feature
on the LTE side, see the related documents provided by the LTE equipment vendor.
42 Configuring NodeB Clock
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210501
NodeB Clock.
43 Configuring Dynamic AAL2 Connections in Iub/IuCS/Iur Interface
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-05030104
Dynamic AAL2 Connections in Iub/IuCS/Iur Interface.
44 Configuring Permanent AAL5 Connections for Control Plane Traffic
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-05030105
Permanent AAL5 Connections for Control Plane Traffic.
45 Configuring Call Admission Based on Used AAL2 Path Bandwidth
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-05030106
Call Admission Based on Used AAL2 Path Bandwidth.
46 Configuring CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, UBR ATM QoS Classes
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature
"WRFD-05030107 CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, UBR ATM QoS Classes".
47 Configuring F5
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-05030110
F5. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )
48 Configuring UBR+ ATM QoS Class
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature "WRFD-050305
UBR+ ATM QoS Class".

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vi
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide About This Document

49 Configuring Link Aggregation

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210103
Link Aggregation.

50 Configuring Flow Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-040100
Flow Control.

51 Configuring BOOTP

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-031100
BOOTP. In ATM transport mode, the NodeB can automatically set up the OM channel with the
BSC6900 by using the BOOTSTRAP Protocol (BOOTP) function.

52 Configuring NodeB Self-Discovery Based on IP Mode

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-031101
NodeB Self-Discovery Based on IP Mode.

53 Configuring License Control for Urgency

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-040300
License Control for Urgency. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

54 Configuring Intelligently Out of Service

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-031000
Intelligently Out of Service.

55 Configuring OCNS

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-031200
OCNS (Orthogonal Channel Noise Simulator). (This feature cannot be configured using the
CME. )

56 Configuring Power Off the Equipment Level by Level

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-031400
Power Off the Equipment Level by Level.

57 Configuring Solar Power Device Management

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-031500
Solar Power Device Management.

58 Configuring Connection with TMA (Tower Mounted Amplifier)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210601
Connection with TMA (Tower Mounted Amplifier). (This feature cannot be configured using
the CME. )

59 Configuring Remote Electrical Tilt

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210602
Remote Electrical Tilt. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

60 Configuring Same Band Antenna Sharing Unit (900 MHz)

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vii
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide About This Document

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-060003
Configuring Same Band Antenna Sharing Unit (900 MHz). (This feature cannot be configured
using the CME. )
61 Configuring VoIP over HSPA/HSPA+
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010617
VoIP over HSPA/HSPA+.
62 Configuring Optimized Scheduling for VoIP over HSPA
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature
WRFD-01061703 Optimized Scheduling for VoIP over HSPA.
63 Configuring IMS Signaling over HSPA
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010618
IMS Signaling over HSPA.
64 Configuring PDCP Header Compression (RoHC)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-011501
PDCP Header Compression (RoHC).
65 Configuring CS Voice over HSPA/HSPA+
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010619
CS Voice over HSPA/HSPA+.
66 Configuring AMR-WB (Adaptive Multi Rate Wide Band)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010613
AMR-WB (Adaptive Multi Rate Wide Band). (This feature cannot be configured using the
CME. )
67 Configuring AMR/WB-AMR Speech Rates Control
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020701
AMR/WB-AMR Speech Rates Control.
68 Configuring TFO/TrFO
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-011600
TFO/TrFO.
69 Configuring AMR Voice Quality Improvement Based on PLVA
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140201
AMR Voice Quality Improvement Based on PLVA.
70 Configuring Cell Broadcast Service
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-011000
Cell Broadcast Service.
71 Configuring Simplified Cell Broadcast
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-011001
Simplified Cell Broadcast.
72 Configuring Warning of Disaster

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential viii
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide About This Document

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020127
Warning of Disaster.
73 Configuring MBMS Introduction Package
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010616
MBMS Introduction Package.
74 Configuring MBMS Admission Control
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature
WRFD-01061602 MBMS Admission Control.
75 Configuring MBMS Load Control
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature
WRFD-01061603 MBMS Load Control.
76 Configuring MBMS Transport Resource Management
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature
WRFD-01061605 MBMS Transport Resource Management.
77 Configuring Streaming Service on MBMS
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature
WRFD-01061606 Streaming Service on MBMS.
78 Configuring 16/32/64/128Kbps Channel Rate on MBMS
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature
WRFD-01061608 16/32/64/128Kbps Channel Rate on MBMS.
79 Configuring MBMS Phase 2
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010660
MBMS Phase 2.
80 Configuring MBMS Enhanced Broadcast Mode
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature
WRFD-01066001 MBMS Enhanced Broadcast Mode.
81 Configuring MBMS P2P over HSDPA
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature
WRFD-01066002 MBMS P2P over HSDPA.
82 Configuring MBMS Admission Enhancement
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature
WRFD-01066003 MBMS Admission Enhancement.
83 Configuring Inter-Frequency Neighboring Cell Selection for MBMS PTP Users
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature
WRFD-01066004 Inter-Frequency Neighboring Cell Selection for MBMS PTP Users.
84 Configuring FACH Transmission Sharing for MBMS
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010627
FACH Transmission Sharing for MBMS.

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ix
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide About This Document

85 Configuring MBMS FLC(Frequency Layer Convergence)/FLD(Frequency Layer
Dispersion)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010626
MBMS FLC(Frequency Layer Convergence)/FLD(Frequency Layer Dispersion).
86 Configuring MBMS over Iur
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010661
MBMS over Iur.
87 Configuring Dynamic Power Estimation for MTCH
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010662
Dynamic Power Estimation for MTCH.
88 Configuring MSCH Scheduling
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010663
MSCH Scheduling.
89 Configuring MBMS Channel Audience Rating Statistics
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010665
MBMS Channel Audience Rating Statistics.
90 Configuring Cell ID + RTT Function Based LCS
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020801
Cell ID + RTT Function Based LCS.
91 Configuring OTDOA Based LCS
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020802
OTDOA Based LCS.
92 Configuring A-GPS Based LCS
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020803
A-GPS Based LCS. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )
93 Configuring LCS Classified Zones
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020804
LCS Classified Zones.
94 Configuring LCS over Iur
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020805
LCS over Iur.
95 Configuring Iupc Interface for LCS Service
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020807
Iupc Interface for LCS service.
96 Configuring Push to Talk
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020134
Push to Talk. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )
97 Configuring HSUPA Introduction Package

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential x
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide About This Document

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010612
HSUPA Introduction Package.
98 Configuring HSUPA Admission Control
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature
WRFD-01061202 HSUPA Admission Control.
99 Configuring HSUPA Power Control
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature
WRFD-01061203 HSUPA Power Control.
100 Configuring HSUPA Mobility Management
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature
WRFD-01061204 HSUPA Mobility Management.
101 Configuring HSUPA DCCC
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature
WRFD-01061208 HSUPA DCCC.
102 Configuring 20 HSUPA Users per Cell
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature
WRFD-01061211 20 HSUPA Users per Cell.
103 Configuring HSUPA Iub Flow Control in Case of Iub Congestion
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature
WRFD-01061212 HSUPA Iub Flow Control in Case of Iub Congestion.
104 Configuring HSUPA E-AGCH Power Control (Based on CQI or HS-SCCH)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature
WRFD-01061401 HSUPA E-AGCH Power Control (Based on CQI or HS-SCCH).
105 Configuring HSUPA 2ms TTI
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature
WRFD-01061403 HSUPA 2ms TTI.
106 Configuring HSUPA 2 ms/10 ms TTI Handover
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature
WRFD-01061404 HSUPA 2 ms/10 ms TTI Handover.
107 Configuring HSUPA 5.74Mbps per User
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature
WRFD-01061405 HSUPA 5.74Mbps per User.
108 Configuring Streaming Traffic Class on HSUPA
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010632
Streaming Traffic Class on HSUPA.
109 Configuring HSUPA over Iur
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010635
HSUPA over Iur.

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xi
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide About This Document

110 Configuring TTI Switch for BE Services Based on Coverage
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010690
TTI Switch for BE Services Based on Coverage.
111 Configuring HSUPA Adaptive Transmission
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010641
HSUPA Adaptive Transmission.
112 Configuring Dynamic CE Resource Management
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010638
Dynamic CE Resource Management.
113 Configuring HSUPA FDE
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010692
HSUPA FDE.
114 Configuring Adaptive Configuration of Traffic Channel Power offset for HSUPA
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010712
Adaptive Configuration of Traffic Channel Power offset for HSUPA.
115 Configuring Anti-Interference Scheduling for HSUPA
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020136
Anti-Interference Scheduling for HSUPA.
116 Configuring Dual-Threshold Scheduling with HSUPA Interference Cancellation
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020137
Dual-Threshold Scheduling with HSUPA Interference Cancellation.
117 Configuring 60 HSUPA Users per Cell
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010634
60 HSUPA Users per Cell.
118 Configuring HSUPA UL Interference Cancellation
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010691
HSUPA UL Interference Cancellation.
119 Configuring SRB over HSUPA
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010636
SRB over HSUPA.
120 Configuring Control Channel Parallel Interference Cancellation (Phase 2)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140202
Control Channel Parallel Interference Cancellation (Phase 2). Control Channel Parallel
Interference Cancellation is short for CCPIC.
121 Configuring HSDPA Introduction Package
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010610
HSDPA Introduction Package. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )
122 Configuring 15 Codes per Cell

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xii
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide About This Document

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature
WRFD-01061001 15 Codes per Cell.
123 Configuring Time and HS-PDSCH Codes Multiplex
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature
WRFD-01061018 Time and HS-PDSCH Codes Multiplex.
124 Configuring HSDPA H-ARQ & Scheduling (MAX C/I, RR, and PF)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature
WRFD-01061009 HSDPA H-ARQ & Scheduling (MAX C/I, RR, and PF).
125 Configuring HSDPA Static Code Allocation and RNC-Controlled Dynamic Code
Allocation
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature
WRFD-01061005 HSDPA Static Code Allocation and RNC-Controlled Dynamic Code
Allocation.
126 Configuring HSDPA Power Control
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature
WRFD-01061004 HSDPA Power Control.
127 Configuring HSDPA Admission Control
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature
WRFD-01061003 HSDPA Admission Control.
128 Configuring Improvement of User Experience in Low Traffic Service
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature
WRFD-01061020 Improvement of User Experience in Low Traffic Service.
129 Configuring HSDPA Flow Control
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature
WRFD-01061010 HSDPA Flow Control.
130 Configuring HSDPA Mobility Management
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature
WRFD-01061006 HSDPA Mobility Management.
131 Configuring HSDPA UE Category 1 to 28
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature
WRFD-01061002 HSDPA UE Category 1 to 28.
132 Configuring DL 16QAM Modulation
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010629
DL 16QAM Modulation.
133 Configuring Dynamic Code Allocation Based on NodeB
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010631
Dynamic Code Allocation Based on NodeB.
134 Configuring HSDPA Enhanced Package

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xiii
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide About This Document

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010611
HSDPA Enhanced Package.
135 Configuring Scheduling based on EPF and GBR
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature
WRFD-01061103 Scheduling based on EPF and GBR.
136 Configuring HSDPA State Transition
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature
WRFD-01061111 HSDPA State Transition.
137 Configuring HSDPA DRD
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature
WRFD-01061112 HSDPA DRD.
138 Configuring HS-DPCCH Preamble Support
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature
WRFD-01061113 HS-DPCCH Preamble Support.
139 Configuring Streaming Traffic Class on HSDPA
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010630
Streaming Traffic Class on HSDPA.
140 Configuring HSDPA over Iur
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010651
HSDPA over Iur.
141 Configuring SRB over HSDPA
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010652
SRB over HSDPA.
142 Configuring CQI Adjustment Based on Dynamic BLER Target
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-030010
CQI Adjustment Based on Dynamic BLER Target.
143 Configuring MIMO Prime
This chapter describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-030011
MIMO Prime.
144 Configuring Adaptive Configuration of Typical HSPA Rate
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-030004
Adaptive Configuration of Typical HSPA Rate.
145 Configuring HSDPA Scheduling Based on UE Location
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140221
HSDPA Scheduling Based on UE Location.
146 Configuring Adaptive Adjustment of HSUPA Small Target Retransmissions
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the try feature WRFD-140222
Adaptive Adjustment of HSUPA Small Target Retransmissions.

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xiv
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide About This Document

147 Configuring HSPA+ Downlink 28Mbps per User
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010680
HSPA+ Downlink 28Mbps per User.
148 Configuring HSPA+ Downlink 21Mbps per User
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010681
HSPA+ Downlink 21Mbps per User.
149 Configuring Downlink Enhanced L2
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010685
Downlink Enhanced L2.
150 Configuring HSPA+ Downlink 42Mbps per User
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010689
HSPA+ Downlink 42Mbps per User.
151 Configuring Downlink 64QAM
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010683
Downlink 64QAM.
152 Configuring 2x2 MIMO
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010684
2x2 MIMO. Multiple Input Multiple Output (MIMO) is a multi-antenna technology, which
enables multiple antennas to receive and transmit data. This increases the data transmission rate.
153 Configuring Downlink 64QAM+MIMO
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010693
DL 64QAM+MIMO.
154 Configuring HSPA+ Uplink 11.5Mbit/s per User
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010698
HSPA+ Uplink 11.5Mbit/s per User.
155 Configuring HSPA+ Downlink 84 Mbit/s per User
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010703
HSPA+ Downlink 84 Mbit/s per User.
156 Configuring DC-HSDPA+MIMO
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010699
DC-HSDPA+MIMO.
157 Configuring UL 16QAM
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010694
UL 16QAM.
158 Configuring UL Layer 2 Improvement
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010695
UL Layer 2 Improvement.
159 Configuring DC-HSDPA

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xv
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide About This Document

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010696
DC-HSDPA.
160 Configuring HSPA+ Uplink 23 Mbit/s per User
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140203
HSPA+ Uplink 23 Mbit/s per User.
161 Configuring DC-HSUPA
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140204
DC-HSUPA.
162 Configuring Downlink Enhanced CELL_FACH
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010688
Downlink Enhanced CELL_FACH.
163 Configuring Performance Improvement of MIMO and HSDPA Co-carrier
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010700
Performance Improvement of MIMO and HSDPA Co-carrier.
164 Configuring CPC - DTX /DRX
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010686
CPC - DTX /DRX.
165 Configuring CPC - HS-SCCH less operation
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010687
CPC - HS-SCCH less operation.
166 Configuring E-DPCCH Boosting
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010697
E-DPCCH Boosting.
167 Configuring Uplink Enhanced CELL_FACH
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010701
Uplink Enhanced CELL_FACH.
168 Configuring 96 HSDPA Users per Cell
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010653
96 HSDPA Users per Cell.
169 Configuring 96 HSUPA Users per Cell
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010639
96 HSUPA Users per Cell.
170 Configuring 128 HSDPA Users per Cell
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010654
128 HSDPA Users per Cell.
171 Configuring 128 HSUPA Users per Cell
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010670
128 HSUPA Users per Cell.

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xvi
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide About This Document

172 Configuring Flexible HSPA+ Technology Selection
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010704
Flexible HSPA+ Technology Selection.
173 Configuring Traffic-Based Activation and Deactivation of the Supplementary Carrier
In Multi-carrier
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010713
Traffic-Based Activation and Deactivation of the Supplementary Carrier In Multi-carrier.
174 Configuring Enhanced DRX
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010702
Enhanced DRX. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )
175 Configuring Enhanced Fast Dormancy
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020500
Enhanced Fast Dormancy. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )
176 Configuring Voice Service Experience Improvement for Weak Reception UEs
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140205
Voice Service Experience Improvement for Weak Reception UEs.
177 Configuring Layered Paging in URA_PCH
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140206
Layered Paging in URA_PCH.
178 Configuring Web browsing acceleration
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020132
Web browsing acceleration. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )
179 Configuring P2P Downloading Rate Control during Busy Hour
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020133
P2P Downloading Rate Control during Busy Hour. (This feature cannot be configured using the
CME. )
180 Configuring Dynamic Power Sharing of Multi-Carriers
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020116
Dynamic Power Sharing of Multi-Carriers.
181 Configuring Multi-Carrier Switch off Based on Traffic Load
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020117
Multi-Carrier Switch off Based on Traffic Load.
182 Configuring Energy Efficiency Improved
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020118
Energy Efficiency Improved.
183 Configuring Multi-Carrier Switch off Based on Power Backup
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020119
Multi-Carrier Switch off Based on Power Backup.

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xvii
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide About This Document

184 Configuring Multi-Carrier Switch off Based on QoS
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020122
Multi-Carrier Switch off Based on QoS.
185 Configuring Intelligent Power Management
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020121
Intelligent Power Management.
186 Configuring RAN Sharing Introduction Package
This section describes how to activate, verify and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-021304
RAN Sharing Introduction Package.
187 Configuring Dedicated Carrier for Each Operator
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature
WRFD-02130401 Dedicated Carrier for Each Operator.
188 Configuring Flexible Network Architecture
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature
WRFD-02130402 Flexible Network Architecture.
189 Configuring Mobility Control and Service Differentiation
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature
WRFD02130403 Mobility Control and Service Differentiation.
190 Configuring Independent License Control
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature
WRFD-02130404 Independent License Control. (This feature cannot be configured using the
CME. )
191 Configuring RAN Sharing Phase 2
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-021305
RAN Sharing Phase 2.
192 Configuring Dedicated Iub Transmission Control
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature
WRFD-02130501 Dedicated Iub Transmission Control.
193 Configuring IMSI Based Handover
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-021303
IMSI Based Handover.
194 Configuring MOCN Introduction Package
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-021311
MOCN Introduction Package. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )
195 Configuring Carrier Sharing by Operators
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature
WRFD-02131101 Carrier Sharing by Operators.
196 Configuring Dedicated NodeB/Cell for Operators

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xviii
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide About This Document

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature
WRFD-02131102 Dedicated NodeB/Cell for Operators.
197 Configuring MOCN Mobility Management
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature
WRFD-02131103 MOCN Mobility Management.
198 Configuring MOCN Load Balance
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature
WRFD-02131104 MOCN Load Balance.
199 Configuring Routing Roaming UEs in Proportion
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature
WRFD-02131106 Routing Roaming UEs in Proportion.
200 Configuring MOCN Cell Resource Demarcation
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140223
MOCN Cell Resource Demarcation.
201 Configuring HCS (Hierarchical Cell Structure)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-021200
HCS (Hierarchical Cell Structure).
202 Configuring One Tunnel
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020111
One Tunnel.
203 Configuring Overbooking on ATM Transmission
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050405
Overbooking on ATM Transmission.
204 Configuring ATM Switching-Based Hub NodeB
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050105
ATM Switching-Based Hub NodeB.
205 Configuring AAL2 Switching-Based Hub NodeB
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050106
AAL2 Switching-Based Hub NodeB.
206 Configuring IP Transmission Introduction on Iub Interface
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050402
IP Transmission Introduction on Iub Interface. (This feature cannot be configured using the
CME. )
207 Configuring Hybrid Iub IP Transmission
This section describes how to activate, verify and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050403
Hybrid Iub IP Transmission.
208 Configuring ATM/IP Dual Stack NodeB
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050404
ATM/IP Dual Stack NodeB.

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xix
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide About This Document

209 Configuring IP Transmission Introduction on Iu Interface
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050409
IP Transmission Introduction on Iu Interface.
210 Configuring IP Transmission Introduction on Iur Interface
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050410
IP Transmission Introduction on Iur Interface.
211 Configuring FP MUX for IP Transmission
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050420
Configuring FP MUX for IP Transmission.
212 Configuring Dynamic Bandwidth Control of Iub IP
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050422
Dynamic Bandwidth Control of Iub IP.
213 Configuring Overbooking on IP Transmission
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050408
Overbooking on IP Transmission.
214 Configuring IP Routing-Based Hub NodeB
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050107
IP Routing-Based Hub NodeB.
215 Configuring PDCP Header Compression (RFC2507)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-011500
PDCP Header Compression (RFC2507).
216 Configuring RNC Offload
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the try feature WRFD-012001
RNC Offload. With this feature, the RNC can send some PS service data directly to Internet
over the offload Gi interface.
217 Configuring UDP MUX for Iu-CS Transmission
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the feature WRFD-050412 UDP
MUX for Iu-CS Transmission.
218 Configuring Iu/Iur Transmission Resource Pool in RNC
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140207
Iu/Iur Transmission Resource Pool in RNC.
219 Configuring Iub Transmission Resource Pool in RNC
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140208
Iub Transmission Resource Pool in RNC.
220 Configuring Satellite Transmission on Iub Interface
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050104
Satellite Transmission on Iub Interface.
221 Configuring Satellite Transmission on Iu Interface

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xx
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide About This Document

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050108
Satellite Transmission on Iu Interface.
222 Configuring Clock Synchronization on Ethernet in NodeB
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050501
Clock Synchronization on Ethernet in NodeB.
223 Configuring Synchronous Ethernet
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050502
Synchronous Ethernet.
224 Configuring Ethernet OAM
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050425
Ethernet OAM. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )
225 Configuring RNC Node Redundancy
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-040202
RNC Node Redundancy.
226 Configuring RRU Redundancy
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-040203
RRU Redundancy.
227 Configuring Iu Flex
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-021302
Iu Flex.
228 Configuring Iu Flex Load Distribution Management
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-021306
Iu Flex Load Distribution Management.
229 Configuring Transmit Diversity
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010203
Transmit Diversity. Transmit diversity enables the NodeB to provide twice the number of RF
DL channels compared with no transmit diversity.
230 Configuring 4-Antenna Receive Diversity
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010209
4-Antenna Receive Diversity.
231 Configuring Extended Cell Coverage up to 200km
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-021308
Extended Cell Coverage up to 200km.
232 Configuring HSUPA Coverage Enhancement at UE Power Limitation
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020138
HSUPA Coverage Enhancement at UE Power Limitation.
233 Configuring Flexible frequency bandwidth of UMTS carrier
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-021001
Flexible frequency bandwidth of UMTS carrier.

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxi
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide About This Document

234 Configuring High Speed Access
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010206
High Speed Access.
235 Configuring Independent Demodulation of Signals from Multiple RRUs in One Cell
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-021350
Independent Demodulation of Signals from Multiple RRUs in One Cell.
236 Configuring Inter Frequency Hard Handover Based on Coverage
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020302
Inter Frequency Hard Handover Based on Coverage.
237 Configuring Inter Frequency Hard Handover Based on DL QoS
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020304
Inter Frequency Hard Handover Based on DL QoS.
238 Configuring SRNS Relocation (UE Not Involved)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature
WRFD-02060501 SRNS Relocation (UE Not Involved). (This feature cannot be configured
using the CME. )
239 Configuring SRNS Relocation with Hard Handover
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature
WRFD-02060502 SRNS Relocation with Hard Handover.
240 Configuring SRNS Relocation with Cell/URA Update
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature
WRFD-02060503 SRNS Relocation with Cell/URA Update.
241 Configuring Multiple RAB Package (PS RAB ≥2)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010615
Multiple RAB Package (PS RAB ≥2).
242 Configuring Combination of Two PS Services
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature
WRFD-01061501 Combination of Two PS Services.
243 Configuring Combination of One CS Service and Two PS Services
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature
WRFD-01061502 Combination of One CS Service and Two PS Services.
244 Configuring Combination of Three PS Services
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature
WRFD-01061503 Combination of Three PS Services.
245 Configuring Combination of One CS Service and Three PS Services
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature
WRFD-01061504 Combination of One CS Service and Three PS Services.
246 Configuring Combination of Four PS Services

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxii
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide About This Document

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature
WRFD-01061505 Combination of Four PS Services.
247 Configuring Inter Frequency Load Balance
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020103
Inter Frequency Load Balance.
248 Configuring Domain Specific Access Control (DSAC)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020114
Domain Specific Access Control (DSAC).
249 Configuring Multi Frequency Band Networking Management
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020110
Multi Frequency Band Networking Management.
250 Configuring Enhanced Multiband Management
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020160
Enhanced Multiband Management.
251 Configuring DRD Introduction Package
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020400
DRD Introduction Package.
252 Configuring Intra System Direct Retry
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature
WRFD-02040001 Intra System Direct Retry.
253 Configuring Inter System Direct Retry
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature
WRFD-02040002 Inter System Direct Retry.
254 Configuring Inter-System Redirect
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature
WRFD-02040003 Inter System Redirect.
255 Configuring Traffic Steering and Load Sharing During RAB Setup
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature
WRFD-02040004 Traffic Steering and Load Sharing During RAB Setup.
256 Configuring Measurement Based Direct Retry
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020402
Measurement Based Direct Retry.
257 Configuring Service Steering and Load Sharing in RRC Connection Setup
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020120
Service Steering and Load Sharing in RRC Connection Setup.
258 Configuring Uplink Flow Control of User Plane
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020124
Uplink Flow Control of User Plane.

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxiii
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide About This Document

259 Configuring Intra Frequency Load Balance
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020104
Intra Frequency Load Balance.
260 Configuring Dynamic Target ROT Adjustment
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140211
Dynamic Target RoT Adjustment.
261 Configuring CE Overbooking
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140212
CE Overbooking.
262 Configuring Intelligent Access Class Control
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140213
Intelligent Access Class Control.
263 Configuring Dynamic Configuration of HSDPA CQI Feedback Period
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140215
Dynamic Configuration of HSDPA CQI Feedback Period.
264 Configuring Load-based Uplink Target BLER Configuration
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140216
Load-based Uplink Target BLER Configuration.
265 Configuring Inter-Frequency Load Balancing Based on Configurable Load Threshold
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140217
Inter-Frequency Load Balancing Based on Configurable Load Threshold.
266 Configuring Load Based GSM and UMTS Handover Enhancement Based on Iur-g
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-070004
Load Based GSM and UMTS Handover Enhancement Based on Iur-g.
267 Configuring NACC(Network Assisted Cell Change) Procedure Optimization Based
on Iur-g
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-070005
NACC Procedure Optimization Based on Iur-g.
268 Configuring GSM and UMTS Load Balancing Based on Iur-g
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-070006
GSM and UMTS Load Balancing Based on Iur-g.
269 Configuring GSM and UMTS Traffic Steering Based on Iur-g
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-070007
GSM and UMTS Traffic Steering Based on Iur-g.
270 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on Coverage
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020303
Inter-RAT Handover Based on Coverage.
271 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on DL QoS

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxiv
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide About This Document

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020309
Inter-RAT Handover Based on DL QoS.
272 Configuring Video Telephony Fallback to Speech (AMR) for Inter-RAT HO
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020307
Video Telephony Fallback to Speech (AMR) for Inter-RAT HO.
273 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Phase 2
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020308
Inter-RAT Handover Phase 2.
274 Configuring NACC(Network Assisted Cell Change)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature
WRFD-02030801 NACC(Network Assisted Cell Change).
275 Configuring PS Handover between UMTS and GPRS
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature
WRFD-02030802 PS Handover between UMTS and GPRS.
276 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on Service
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020305
Inter-RAT Handover Based on Service.
277 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on Load
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020306
Inter-RAT Handover Based on Load.
278 Configuring Inter-RAT Redirection Based on Distance
This section describes how to activate and verify the optional feature WRFD-020401 Inter-RAT
Redirection Based on Distance.
279 Configuring 3G/2G Common Load Management
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020310
3G/2G Common Load Management.
280 Configuring Mobility Between UMTS and LTE Phase 1
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020126
Mobility Between UMTS and LTE Phase 1. For details about how to configure this feature on
the LTE side, see the related documents provided by the LTE equipment vendor. (This feature
cannot be configured using the CME. )
281 Configuring Service-Based PS Service Redirection from UMTS to LTE
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020129
Service-Based PS Service Redirection from UMTS to LTE.
282 Configuring Service-Based PS Handover from UMTS to LTE
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140218
Service-Based PS Handover from UMTS to LTE.
283 Configuring Fast CS Fallback Based on RIM

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxv
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide About This Document

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-140224
fast CS fallback based on RIM. For details about how to configure this feature on the LTE side,
see the related documents provided by the LTE equipment vendor.
284 Configuring Queuing and Preemption
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010505
Queuing and Preemption.
285 Configuring Access Class Restriction
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-021103
Access Class Restriction.
286 Configuring Traffic Priority Mapping onto Transmission Resources
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050424
Traffic Priority Mapping onto Transmission Resources.
287 Configuring Differentiated Service Based on SPI Weight
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020806
Differentiated Service Based on SPI Weight.
288 Configuring Optimization of R99 and HSUPA Users Fairness
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020131
Optimization of R99 and HSUPA Users Fairness.
289 Configuring Active Queue Management (AQM)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-011502
Active Queue Management (AQM).
290 Configuring Quality Improvement for Subscribed Service
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020128
Quality Improvement for Subscribed Service.
291 Configuring TCP Accelerator
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020123
TCP Accelerator.
292 Configuring Rate Negotiation at Admission Control
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010507
Rate Negotiation at Admission Control.
293 Configuring Videophone Service Restriction
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020130
Videophone Service Restriction.
294 Configuring Intelligent Inter-Carrier UE Layered Management
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020135
Intelligent Inter-Carrier UE Layered Management.
295 Configuring Micro NodeB Self-Planning
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140219
Micro NodeB Self-Planning.

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxvi
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide About This Document

296 Configuring NodeB Integrated IPSec
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140209
NodeB Integrated IPSec.
297 Configuring NodeB PKI Support
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140210
NodeB PKI Support. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )
298 Configuring Intelligent Battery Management
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140220
Intelligent Battery Management. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )
299 Configuring Multi-mode Dynamic Power Sharing (UMTS)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature MRFD-221801
Multi-mode Dynamic Power Sharing (UMTS).
300 Configuring GSM and UMTS Dynamic Spectrum Sharing (UMTS)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature MRFD-221802
GSM and UMTS Dynamic Spectrum Sharing (UMTS). This feature enables the spectrum
resources to be dynamically shared between the GSM and UMTS networks based on their traffic
load, improving frequency utilization.
301 Configuring IP-Based Multi-Mode Co-Transmission on Base Station Side (NodeB)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature MRFD-221501
IP-Based Multi-Mode Co-Transmission on Base Station Side. For details about data
configurations, see section Configuration Reference > MBTS Configuration Reference
(V100R007C00) > Common Transmission in the 3900 Series Base Station Initial
Configuration Guide, or see section Common Transmission in the WCDMA RAN Feature
Documentation. The latest 3900 Series Base Station Initial Configuration Guide can be obtained
from the following path: HUAWEI Technical Support (support.huawei.com), Support >
Documentation > SingleRAN > MBTS > SingleRAN7.0.
302 Configuring TDM-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmission via Backplane on BS side
(NodeB)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature MRFD-221504
TDM-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmission via Backplane on BS side (NodeB). (This feature
cannot be configured using the CME. )
303 Configuring Multi-Mode BS Common Reference Clock (NodeB)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature MRFD-221601
Multi-Mode BS Common Reference Clock (NodeB). For details about data configurations, see
section Configuration Reference > MBTS Configuration Reference (V100R007C00) >
Common Clock in the 3900 Series Base Station Initial Configuration Guide, or see section
Common Clock in the WCDMA RAN Feature Documentation. The latest 3900 Series Base
Station Initial Configuration Guide can be obtained from the following path: HUAWEI
Technical Support (support.huawei.com), Support > Documentation > SingleRAN > MBTS
> SingleRAN7.0.
304 Multi-mode BS Common IPSec(UMTS)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the multi-mode feature
MRFD-221602 Multi-mode BS Common IPSec(UMTS).

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxvii
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide About This Document

305 Configuring 2.0MHz Central Frequency point separation between GSM and UMTS
mode(UMTS)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature MRFD-221703
2.0MHz Central Frequency point separation between GSM and UMTS mode(UMTS).
306 Configuring Dynamic MA for GU Dynamic Spectrum Sharing (UMTS)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the multi-mode feature
MRFD-221803 Dynamic MA for GU Dynamic Spectrum Sharing(UMTS).
307 Configuring GSM Power Control on Interface Frequency for GU Small Frequency
Gap (UMTS)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the multi-mode feature
MRFD-221804 GSM Power Control on Interference Frequency for GU Small Frequency gap
(UMTS).

Conventions
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Symbol Description

Indicates a hazard with a high level or medium level of risk
which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

Indicates a hazard with a low level of risk which, if not
avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not
avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,
performance deterioration, or unanticipated results.

Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save
time.

Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement
important points of the main text.

General Conventions
The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Times New Roman Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.

Boldface Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in
boldface. For example, log in as user root.

Italic Book titles are in italics.

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxviii
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide About This Document

Convention Description
Courier New Examples of information displayed on the screen are in
Courier New.

Command Conventions

The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Italic Command arguments are in italics.

[] Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.

{ x | y | ... } Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by
vertical bars. One item is selected.

[ x | y | ... ] Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by
vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.

{ x | y | ... }* Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by
vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all
items can be selected.

[ x | y | ... ]* Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by
vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.

GUI Conventions

The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles
are in boldface. For example, click OK.

> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"
signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Keyboard Operations

The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Format Description

Key Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxix
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide About This Document

Format Description

Key 1+Key 2 Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt
+A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently.

Key 1, Key 2 Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means
the two keys should be pressed in turn.

Mouse Operations
The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Action Description

Click Select and release the primary mouse button without moving
the pointer.

Double-click Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and
quickly without moving the pointer.

Drag Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the
pointer to a certain position.

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxx
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide Contents

Contents

About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii
1 Changes in the RAN Feature Activation Guide......................................................................1
2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions...............................................................11
3 Overview of Configurations on the CME...............................................................................55
3.1 Introduction to Configuration Methods........................................................................................................................57
3.2 Configuring Device Data..............................................................................................................................................58
3.3 Introduction to the Configuration Express for UMTS Global Parameters...................................................................59
3.4 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Iub Interfaces.......................................................................................60
3.5 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Iu-CS Interfaces..................................................................................61
3.6 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Iu-PS Interfaces...................................................................................62
3.7 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Iur Interfaces.......................................................................................63
3.8 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Iu-BC Interfaces..................................................................................64
3.9 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Iu-PC Interfaces..................................................................................65
3.10 Introduction to the Configuration Express for the (U)Iur-g Interface........................................................................66
3.11 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Gi Interfaces......................................................................................67
3.12 Introduction to the Configuration Express for UMTS Global Radio Parameters......................................................68
3.13 Introduction to the Configuration Express for UMTS Cells......................................................................................69
3.14 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Neighboring UMTS Cells.................................................................70
3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches.....................................................................................................................71
3.16 Modifying Logical NodeB Parameters in Batches.....................................................................................................71
3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches....................................................................................................72
3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches...........................................................................................................72
3.19 Modifying RNC External Cell Parameters in Batches...............................................................................................73
3.20 Modifying UMTS Channel Parameters in Batches....................................................................................................74
3.21 Introduction to the Object Group Configuration........................................................................................................75

4 Activating the UMTS License...................................................................................................77
4.1 Activating the BSC6900 License.................................................................................................................................78
4.2 Allocating a license to Telecom Operators...................................................................................................................79
4.3 Allocating a License to NodeBs...................................................................................................................................79

5 Configuring 3.4/6.8/13.6/27.2Kbps RRC Connection and Radio Access Bearer
Establishment and Release...........................................................................................................81

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxxi
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide Contents

6 Configuring Conversational QoS Class .................................................................................84
7 Configuring Streaming QoS Class...........................................................................................87
8 Configuring Interactive QoS Class..........................................................................................90
9 Configuring Background QoS Class.......................................................................................92
10 Configuring Emergency Call...................................................................................................94
11 Configuring RAB Quality of Service Renegotiation over Iu Interface...........................95
12 Configuring 2-Way Antenna Receive Diversity..................................................................98
13 Configuring Cell Digital Combination and Split.............................................................100
14 Configuring UE State in Connected Mode (CELL_DCH, CELL_PCH, URA_PCH,
CELL_FACH).................................................................................................................................103
15 Configuring Paging UE in Idle, CELL_PCH, URA_PCH State (Type 1)......................106
16 Configuring Paging UE in CELL_FACH, CELL_DCH State (Type 2)...........................110
17 Configuring Dynamic Channel Configuration Control..................................................112
18 Configuring Integrity Protection..........................................................................................121
19 Configuring Encryption.........................................................................................................123
20 Configuring Open Loop Power Control.............................................................................125
21 Configuring Downlink Power Balance...............................................................................128
22 Configuring Outer Loop Power Control.............................................................................130
23 Configuring Inner Loop Power Control .............................................................................133
24 Configuring Admission Control..........................................................................................135
25 Configuring Load Measurement..........................................................................................139
26 Configuring Load Reshuffling.............................................................................................141
27 Configuring Overload Control.............................................................................................145
28 Configuring Code Resource Management.........................................................................148
29 Configuring Potential User Control.....................................................................................150
30 Configuring Cell Barring.......................................................................................................152
31 Configuring Shared Network Support in Connected Mode..........................................157
32 Configuring Intra NodeB Softer Handover........................................................................160
33 Configuring Intra RNC Soft Handover...............................................................................162
34 Configuring Inter RNC Soft Handover...............................................................................164
35 Configuring Intra Frequency Hard Handover...................................................................166

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxxii
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide Contents

36 Configuring Intra RNC Cell Update....................................................................................169
37 Configuring Inter RNC Cell Update....................................................................................172
38 Configuring Intra RNC URA Update..................................................................................174
39 Configuring Inter RNC URA Update..................................................................................177
40 Configuring Direct Signaling Connection Re-establishment (DSCR) ........................180
41 Configuring CS Fallback Guarantee for LTE Emergency Calls.....................................183
42 Configuring NodeB Clock.....................................................................................................185
43 Configuring Dynamic AAL2 Connections in Iub/IuCS/Iur Interface...........................189
44 Configuring Permanent AAL5 Connections for Control Plane Traffic........................191
45 Configuring Call Admission Based on Used AAL2 Path Bandwidth...........................193
46 Configuring CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, UBR ATM QoS Classes........................................195
47 Configuring F5.........................................................................................................................197
48 Configuring UBR+ ATM QoS Class....................................................................................199
49 Configuring Link Aggregation.............................................................................................201
50 Configuring Flow Control.....................................................................................................205
51 Configuring BOOTP...............................................................................................................210
52 Configuring NodeB Self-Discovery Based on IP Mode..................................................212
53 Configuring License Control for Urgency..........................................................................216
54 Configuring Intelligently Out of Service...........................................................................218
55 Configuring OCNS.................................................................................................................220
56 Configuring Power Off the Equipment Level by Level...................................................222
57 Configuring Solar Power Device Management.................................................................225
58 Configuring Connection with TMA (Tower Mounted Amplifier)................................227
59 Configuring Remote Electrical Tilt......................................................................................230
60 Configuring Same Band Antenna Sharing Unit (900 MHz)...........................................233
61 Configuring VoIP over HSPA/HSPA+................................................................................236
62 Configuring Optimized Scheduling for VoIP over HSPA..............................................242
63 Configuring IMS Signaling over HSPA.............................................................................244
64 Configuring PDCP Header Compression (RoHC)............................................................247
65 Configuring CS Voice over HSPA/HSPA+........................................................................250

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxxiii
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide Contents

66 Configuring AMR-WB (Adaptive Multi Rate Wide Band).............................................255
67 Configuring AMR/WB-AMR Speech Rates Control........................................................258
68 Configuring TFO/TrFO..........................................................................................................263
69 Configuring AMR Voice Quality Improvement Based on PLVA.................................265
70 Configuring Cell Broadcast Service.....................................................................................267
71 Configuring Simplified Cell Broadcast..............................................................................277
72 Configuring Warning of Disaster.........................................................................................280
73 Configuring MBMS Introduction Package........................................................................282
74 Configuring MBMS Admission Control............................................................................286
75 Configuring MBMS Load Control.......................................................................................288
76 Configuring MBMS Transport Resource Management...................................................290
77 Configuring Streaming Service on MBMS........................................................................292
78 Configuring 16/32/64/128Kbps Channel Rate on MBMS.................................................294
79 Configuring MBMS Phase 2..................................................................................................296
80 Configuring MBMS Enhanced Broadcast Mode...............................................................298
81 Configuring MBMS P2P over HSDPA................................................................................300
82 Configuring MBMS Admission Enhancement.................................................................302
83 Configuring Inter-Frequency Neighboring Cell Selection for MBMS PTP Users
..........................................................................................................................................................304
84 Configuring FACH Transmission Sharing for MBMS....................................................305
85 Configuring MBMS FLC(Frequency Layer Convergence)/FLD(Frequency Layer
Dispersion) ....................................................................................................................................307
86 Configuring MBMS over Iur.................................................................................................310
87 Configuring Dynamic Power Estimation for MTCH.......................................................312
88 Configuring MSCH Scheduling...........................................................................................314
89 Configuring MBMS Channel Audience Rating Statistics...............................................316
90 Configuring Cell ID + RTT Function Based LCS.............................................................318
91 Configuring OTDOA Based LCS.........................................................................................326
92 Configuring A-GPS Based LCS............................................................................................329
93 Configuring LCS Classified Zones......................................................................................337
94 Configuring LCS over Iur......................................................................................................340

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxxiv
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide Contents

95 Configuring Iupc Interface for LCS Service.......................................................................347
96 Configuring Push to Talk......................................................................................................350
97 Configuring HSUPA Introduction Package.......................................................................352
98 Configuring HSUPA Admission Control...........................................................................355
99 Configuring HSUPA Power Control ..................................................................................359
100 Configuring HSUPA Mobility Management...................................................................362
101 Configuring HSUPA DCCC................................................................................................364
102 Configuring 20 HSUPA Users per Cell.............................................................................367
103 Configuring HSUPA Iub Flow Control in Case of Iub Congestion............................369
104 Configuring HSUPA E-AGCH Power Control (Based on CQI or HS-SCCH)...........371
105 Configuring HSUPA 2ms TTI.............................................................................................373
106 Configuring HSUPA 2 ms/10 ms TTI Handover.............................................................376
107 Configuring HSUPA 5.74Mbps per User..........................................................................378
108 Configuring Streaming Traffic Class on HSUPA...........................................................381
109 Configuring HSUPA over Iur.............................................................................................383
110 Configuring TTI Switch for BE Services Based on Coverage.......................................385
111 Configuring HSUPA Adaptive Transmission.................................................................389
112 Configuring Dynamic CE Resource Management..........................................................392
113 Configuring HSUPA FDE....................................................................................................394
114 Configuring Adaptive Configuration of Traffic Channel Power offset for HSUPA
..........................................................................................................................................................396
115 Configuring Anti-Interference Scheduling for HSUPA................................................404
116 Configuring Dual-Threshold Scheduling with HSUPA Interference Cancellation
..........................................................................................................................................................408
117 Configuring 60 HSUPA Users per Cell.............................................................................412
118 Configuring HSUPA UL Interference Cancellation.......................................................414
119 Configuring SRB over HSUPA...........................................................................................417
120 Configuring Control Channel Parallel Interference Cancellation (Phase 2).............419
121 Configuring HSDPA Introduction Package.....................................................................424
122 Configuring 15 Codes per Cell............................................................................................427
123 Configuring Time and HS-PDSCH Codes Multiplex....................................................430

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxxv
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide Contents

124 Configuring HSDPA H-ARQ & Scheduling (MAX C/I, RR, and PF).........................431
125 Configuring HSDPA Static Code Allocation and RNC-Controlled Dynamic Code
Allocation.......................................................................................................................................433
126 Configuring HSDPA Power Control ................................................................................435
127 Configuring HSDPA Admission Control.........................................................................438
128 Configuring Improvement of User Experience in Low Traffic Service......................441
129 Configuring HSDPA Flow Control....................................................................................443
130 Configuring HSDPA Mobility Management...................................................................446
131 Configuring HSDPA UE Category 1 to 28........................................................................448
132 Configuring DL 16QAM Modulation...............................................................................449
133 Configuring Dynamic Code Allocation Based on NodeB.............................................451
134 Configuring HSDPA Enhanced Package..........................................................................455
135 Configuring Scheduling based on EPF and GBR...........................................................457
136 Configuring HSDPA State Transition...............................................................................459
137 Configuring HSDPA DRD..................................................................................................461
138 Configuring HS-DPCCH Preamble Support...................................................................463
139 Configuring Streaming Traffic Class on HSDPA...........................................................466
140 Configuring HSDPA over Iur.............................................................................................468
141 Configuring SRB over HSDPA...........................................................................................470
142 Configuring CQI Adjustment Based on Dynamic BLER Target.................................474
143 Configuring MIMO Prime...................................................................................................476
144 Configuring Adaptive Configuration of Typical HSPA Rate......................................479
145 Configuring HSDPA Scheduling Based on UE Location..............................................481
146 Configuring Adaptive Adjustment of HSUPA Small Target Retransmissions
..........................................................................................................................................................483
147 Configuring HSPA+ Downlink 28Mbps per User..........................................................486
148 Configuring HSPA+ Downlink 21Mbps per User..........................................................488
149 Configuring Downlink Enhanced L2................................................................................490
150 Configuring HSPA+ Downlink 42Mbps per User..........................................................493
151 Configuring Downlink 64QAM.........................................................................................496
152 Configuring 2x2 MIMO........................................................................................................500

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxxvi
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide Contents

153 Configuring Downlink 64QAM+MIMO..........................................................................510
154 Configuring HSPA+ Uplink 11.5Mbit/s per User...........................................................514
155 Configuring HSPA+ Downlink 84 Mbit/s per User.......................................................518
156 Configuring DC-HSDPA+MIMO......................................................................................520
157 Configuring UL 16QAM......................................................................................................525
158 Configuring UL Layer 2 Improvement..............................................................................528
159 Configuring DC-HSDPA.....................................................................................................532
160 Configuring HSPA+ Uplink 23 Mbit/s per User.............................................................538
161 Configuring DC-HSUPA.....................................................................................................541
162 Configuring Downlink Enhanced CELL_FACH.............................................................546
163 Configuring Performance Improvement of MIMO and HSDPA Co-carrier.............548
164 Configuring CPC - DTX /DRX............................................................................................553
165 Configuring CPC - HS-SCCH less operation...................................................................556
166 Configuring E-DPCCH Boosting........................................................................................559
167 Configuring Uplink Enhanced CELL_FACH...................................................................566
168 Configuring 96 HSDPA Users per Cell.............................................................................568
169 Configuring 96 HSUPA Users per Cell.............................................................................570
170 Configuring 128 HSDPA Users per Cell...........................................................................572
171 Configuring 128 HSUPA Users per Cell...........................................................................574
172 Configuring Flexible HSPA+ Technology Selection......................................................576
173 Configuring Traffic-Based Activation and Deactivation of the Supplementary Carrier
In Multi-carrier..............................................................................................................................580
174 Configuring Enhanced DRX................................................................................................582
175 Configuring Enhanced Fast Dormancy.............................................................................585
176 Configuring Voice Service Experience Improvement for Weak Reception UEs
..........................................................................................................................................................594
177 Configuring Layered Paging in URA_PCH......................................................................602
178 Configuring Web browsing acceleration..........................................................................605
179 Configuring P2P Downloading Rate Control during Busy Hour................................608
180 Configuring Dynamic Power Sharing of Multi-Carriers...............................................611
181 Configuring Multi-Carrier Switch off Based on Traffic Load......................................613

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxxvii
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide Contents

182 Configuring Energy Efficiency Improved........................................................................617
183 Configuring Multi-Carrier Switch off Based on Power Backup..................................619
184 Configuring Multi-Carrier Switch off Based on QoS....................................................623
185 Configuring Intelligent Power Management...................................................................627
186 Configuring RAN Sharing Introduction Package...........................................................629
187 Configuring Dedicated Carrier for Each Operator.........................................................633
188 Configuring Flexible Network Architecture....................................................................636
189 Configuring Mobility Control and Service Differentiation.........................................638
190 Configuring Independent License Control......................................................................640
191 Configuring RAN Sharing Phase 2....................................................................................642
192 Configuring Dedicated Iub Transmission Control........................................................643
193 Configuring IMSI Based Handover...................................................................................648
194 Configuring MOCN Introduction Package......................................................................650
195 Configuring Carrier Sharing by Operators......................................................................655
196 Configuring Dedicated NodeB/Cell for Operators.........................................................658
197 Configuring MOCN Mobility Management....................................................................661
198 Configuring MOCN Load Balance.....................................................................................663
199 Configuring Routing Roaming UEs in Proportion.........................................................665
200 Configuring MOCN Cell Resource Demarcation...........................................................668
201 Configuring HCS (Hierarchical Cell Structure)..............................................................674
202 Configuring One Tunnel.....................................................................................................677
203 Configuring Overbooking on ATM Transmission.........................................................682
204 Configuring ATM Switching-Based Hub NodeB...........................................................686
205 Configuring AAL2 Switching-Based Hub NodeB..........................................................688
206 Configuring IP Transmission Introduction on Iub Interface.......................................690
207 Configuring Hybrid Iub IP Transmission........................................................................697
208 Configuring ATM/IP Dual Stack NodeB..........................................................................700
209 Configuring IP Transmission Introduction on Iu Interface..........................................704
210 Configuring IP Transmission Introduction on Iur Interface........................................706
211 Configuring FP MUX for IP Transmission.......................................................................708

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxxviii
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide Contents

212 Configuring Dynamic Bandwidth Control of Iub IP.....................................................710
213 Configuring Overbooking on IP Transmission..............................................................712
214 Configuring IP Routing-Based Hub NodeB....................................................................716
215 Configuring PDCP Header Compression (RFC2507).....................................................718
216 Configuring RNC Offload...................................................................................................720
217 Configuring UDP MUX for Iu-CS Transmission............................................................724
218 Configuring Iu/Iur Transmission Resource Pool in RNC.............................................726
219 Configuring Iub Transmission Resource Pool in RNC.................................................729
220 Configuring Satellite Transmission on Iub Interface....................................................733
221 Configuring Satellite Transmission on Iu Interface.......................................................735
222 Configuring Clock Synchronization on Ethernet in NodeB.........................................737
223 Configuring Synchronous Ethernet...................................................................................740
224 Configuring Ethernet OAM................................................................................................742
225 Configuring RNC Node Redundancy...............................................................................745
226 Configuring RRU Redundancy..........................................................................................753
227 Configuring Iu Flex...............................................................................................................755
228 Configuring Iu Flex Load Distribution Management....................................................758
229 Configuring Transmit Diversity.........................................................................................763
230 Configuring 4-Antenna Receive Diversity.......................................................................765
231 Configuring Extended Cell Coverage up to 200km........................................................767
232 Configuring HSUPA Coverage Enhancement at UE Power Limitation.....................770
233 Configuring Flexible frequency bandwidth of UMTS carrier.....................................773
234 Configuring High Speed Access.........................................................................................775
235 Configuring Independent Demodulation of Signals from Multiple RRUs in One Cell
..........................................................................................................................................................778
236 Configuring Inter Frequency Hard Handover Based on Coverage.............................788
237 Configuring Inter Frequency Hard Handover Based on DL QoS................................792
238 Configuring SRNS Relocation (UE Not Involved).........................................................795
239 Configuring SRNS Relocation with Hard Handover.....................................................800
240 Configuring SRNS Relocation with Cell/URA Update.................................................804
241 Configuring Multiple RAB Package (PS RAB ≥2)........................................................807

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxxix
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide Contents

242 Configuring Combination of Two PS Services...............................................................809
243 Configuring Combination of One CS Service and Two PS Services..........................811
244 Configuring Combination of Three PS Services.............................................................813
245 Configuring Combination of One CS Service and Three PS Services....................... 815
246 Configuring Combination of Four PS Services...............................................................817
247 Configuring Inter Frequency Load Balance.....................................................................819
248 Configuring Domain Specific Access Control (DSAC).................................................826
249 Configuring Multi Frequency Band Networking Management..................................829
250 Configuring Enhanced Multiband Management............................................................831
251 Configuring DRD Introduction Package..........................................................................836
252 Configuring Intra System Direct Retry.............................................................................840
253 Configuring Inter System Direct Retry.............................................................................843
254 Configuring Inter-System Redirect....................................................................................846
255 Configuring Traffic Steering and Load Sharing During RAB Setup..........................848
256 Configuring Measurement Based Direct Retry...............................................................851
257 Configuring Service Steering and Load Sharing in RRC Connection Setup............854
258 Configuring Uplink Flow Control of User Plane............................................................857
259 Configuring Intra Frequency Load Balance.....................................................................860
260 Configuring Dynamic Target ROT Adjustment............................................................. 863
261 Configuring CE Overbooking.............................................................................................866
262 Configuring Intelligent Access Class Control.................................................................868
263 Configuring Dynamic Configuration of HSDPA CQI Feedback Period...................873
264 Configuring Load-based Uplink Target BLER Configuration.....................................878
265 Configuring Inter-Frequency Load Balancing Based on Configurable Load Threshold
..........................................................................................................................................................881
266 Configuring Load Based GSM and UMTS Handover Enhancement Based on Iur-g
..........................................................................................................................................................887
267 Configuring NACC(Network Assisted Cell Change) Procedure Optimization Based
on Iur-g........................................................................................................................................... 891
268 Configuring GSM and UMTS Load Balancing Based on Iur-g....................................894
269 Configuring GSM and UMTS Traffic Steering Based on Iur-g...................................899
270 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on Coverage..................................................902

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xl
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide Contents

271 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on DL QoS....................................................906
272 Configuring Video Telephony Fallback to Speech (AMR) for Inter-RAT HO.........909
273 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Phase 2.......................................................................911
274 Configuring NACC(Network Assisted Cell Change)....................................................913
275 Configuring PS Handover between UMTS and GPRS..................................................915
276 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on Service.....................................................918
277 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on Load..........................................................921
278 Configuring Inter-RAT Redirection Based on Distance................................................924
279 Configuring 3G/2G Common Load Management...........................................................927
280 Configuring Mobility Between UMTS and LTE Phase 1..............................................929
281 Configuring Service-Based PS Service Redirection from UMTS to LTE...................933
282 Configuring Service-Based PS Handover from UMTS to LTE.....................................937
283 Configuring Fast CS Fallback Based on RIM..................................................................941
284 Configuring Queuing and Preemption.............................................................................944
285 Configuring Access Class Restriction ..............................................................................946
286 Configuring Traffic Priority Mapping onto Transmission Resources........................950
287 Configuring Differentiated Service Based on SPI Weight............................................952
288 Configuring Optimization of R99 and HSUPA Users Fairness...................................958
289 Configuring Active Queue Management (AQM)...........................................................962
290 Configuring Quality Improvement for Subscribed Service.........................................964
291 Configuring TCP Accelerator..............................................................................................967
292 Configuring Rate Negotiation at Admission Control....................................................969
293 Configuring Videophone Service Restriction.................................................................973
294 Configuring Intelligent Inter-Carrier UE Layered Management.................................975
295 Configuring Micro NodeB Self-Planning.........................................................................980
296 Configuring NodeB Integrated IPSec................................................................................986
297 Configuring NodeB PKI Support.....................................................................................1007
298 Configuring Intelligent Battery Management...............................................................1018
299 Configuring Multi-mode Dynamic Power Sharing (UMTS)......................................1021
300 Configuring GSM and UMTS Dynamic Spectrum Sharing (UMTS).......................1024

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xli
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide Contents

301 Configuring IP-Based Multi-Mode Co-Transmission on Base Station Side (NodeB)
........................................................................................................................................................1029
302 Configuring TDM-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmission via Backplane on BS side
(NodeB).........................................................................................................................................1030
303 Configuring Multi-Mode BS Common Reference Clock (NodeB)............................1036
304 Multi-mode BS Common IPSec(UMTS).........................................................................1037
305 Configuring 2.0MHz Central Frequency point separation between GSM and UMTS
mode(UMTS)...............................................................................................................................1057
306 Configuring Dynamic MA for GU Dynamic Spectrum Sharing (UMTS)...............1061
307 Configuring GSM Power Control on Interface Frequency for GU Small Frequency
Gap (UMTS)................................................................................................................................1064

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xlii
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 1 Changes in the RAN Feature Activation Guide

1 Changes in the RAN Feature Activation
Guide

This chapter describes the changes in the RAN Feature Activation Guide.

07 (2013-06-28)
This is the seventh commercial release of RAN14.0.
Compared with issue 06 (2013-03-25), this issue does not include any topics.
Compared with issue 06 (2013-03-25), this issue incorporates the following changes:

Content Description

213 Configuring Overbooking on IP The description of IP shaping is deleted.
Transmission

169 Configuring 96 HSUPA Users per Cell The dependencies on other features are
changed.

168 Configuring 96 HSDPA Users per Cell The dependencies on other features are
changed.

170 Configuring 128 HSDPA Users per The dependencies on other features are
Cell changed.

69 Configuring AMR Voice Quality The feature deactivation procedure is
Improvement Based on PLVA changed.

261 Configuring CE Overbooking The activation procedure is changed.

143 Configuring MIMO Prime The prerequisite and activation procedure are
changed.

Compared with issue 06 (2013-03-25), this issue does not exclude any topics.

06 (2013-03-25)
This is the sixth commercial release of RAN14.0.

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 1 Changes in the RAN Feature Activation Guide

Compared with issue 05 (2012-12-31), this issue includes the following topics:

l 249 Configuring Multi Frequency Band Networking Management

Compared with issue 05 (2012-12-31), this issue incorporates the following changes:

Content Description

168 Configuring 96 HSDPA Users per Cell The activation procedure is changed.

35 Configuring Intra Frequency Hard The task example is changed.
Handover

26 Configuring Load Reshuffling The activation procedure is changed.

114 Configuring Adaptive Configuration The activation procedure is changed.
of Traffic Channel Power offset for
HSUPA

284 Configuring Queuing and Preemption The verification procedure is changed.

110 Configuring TTI Switch for BE The activation procedure is changed.
Services Based on Coverage

106 Configuring HSUPA 2 ms/10 ms TTI The context is changed.
Handover

Compared with issue 05 (2012-12-31), this issue does not exclude any topics.

05 (2012-12-31)
This is the fifth commercial release of RAN14.0.

Compared with issue 04 (2012-11-07), this issue does not include any topics.

Compared with issue 04 (2012-11-07), this issue incorporates the following changes:

Content Description

285 Configuring Access Class Restriction The verification procedure is changed.

248 Configuring Domain Specific Access The verification procedure is changed.
Control (DSAC)

107 Configuring HSUPA 5.74Mbps per The activation procedure is changed.
User

153 Configuring Downlink 64QAM The prerequisite is changed.
+MIMO

217 Configuring UDP MUX for Iu-CS The prerequisite is changed.
Transmission

291 Configuring TCP Accelerator The prerequisite is changed.

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 1 Changes in the RAN Feature Activation Guide

Compared with issue 04 (2012-11-07), this issue does not exclude any topics.

04 (2012-11-07)
This is the fourth commercial release of RAN14.0.
Compared with issue 03 (2012-08-30), this issue does not include any topics.
Compared with issue 03 (2012-08-30), this issue incorporates the following changes:

Content Description

250 Configuring Enhanced Multiband The verification procedure is changed.
Management

263 Configuring Dynamic Configuration The activation procedure is changed.
of HSDPA CQI Feedback Period

186 Configuring RAN Sharing The activation procedure is changed.
Introduction Package

167 Configuring Uplink Enhanced The prerequisite is changed.
CELL_FACH

68 Configuring TFO/TrFO The context is changed.

270 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover The activation procedure is changed.
Based on Coverage

Compared with issue 03 (2012-08-30), this issue does not exclude any topics.

03 (2012-08-30)
This is the third commercial release of RAN14.0.
Compared with issue 02 (2012-06-30), this issue includes the following topics:
l 138 Configuring HS-DPCCH Preamble Support
Compared with issue 02 (2012-06-30), this issue incorporates the following changes:

Content Description

43 Configuring Dynamic AAL2 The task example is changed.
Connections in Iub/IuCS/Iur Interface

156 Configuring DC-HSDPA+MIMO The task example is changed.

155 Configuring HSPA+ Downlink 84 The task example is changed.
Mbit/s per User

148 Configuring HSPA+ Downlink The task example is changed.
21Mbps per User

147 Configuring HSPA+ Downlink The task example is changed.
28Mbps per User

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 1 Changes in the RAN Feature Activation Guide

Content Description

141 Configuring SRB over HSDPA The task example is changed.

106 Configuring HSUPA 2 ms/10 ms TTI The task example is changed.
Handover

110 Configuring TTI Switch for BE The procedure is changed.
Services Based on Coverage

220 Configuring Satellite Transmission on The procedure is changed.
Iub Interface

167 Configuring Uplink Enhanced The procedure is changed.
CELL_FACH

237 Configuring Inter Frequency Hard The procedure is changed.
Handover Based on DL QoS

271 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover The procedure is changed.
Based on DL QoS

236 Configuring Inter Frequency Hard The procedure is changed.
Handover Based on Coverage

269 Configuring GSM and UMTS Traffic The procedure is changed.
Steering Based on Iur-g

92 Configuring A-GPS Based LCS The task example and the procedure are
changed.

67 Configuring AMR/WB-AMR Speech The procedure is changed.
Rates Control

112 Configuring Dynamic CE Resource The procedure is changed.
Management

175 Configuring Enhanced Fast The procedure is changed.
Dormancy

137 Configuring HSDPA DRD The procedure is changed.

157 Configuring UL 16QAM The procedure is changed.

49 Configuring Link Aggregation The procedure is changed.

58 Configuring Connection with TMA The procedure is changed.
(Tower Mounted Amplifier)

144 Configuring Adaptive Configuration The data preparation is added.
of Typical HSPA Rate

146 Configuring Adaptive Adjustment of The data preparation is added.
HSUPA Small Target Retransmissions

176 Configuring Voice Service Experience The procedure is changed, and the data
Improvement for Weak Reception UEs preparation is added.

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 1 Changes in the RAN Feature Activation Guide

Content Description

200 Configuring MOCN Cell Resource The data preparation is added.
Demarcation

202 Configuring One Tunnel The data preparation is added.

247 Configuring Inter Frequency Load The data preparation is added.
Balance

250 Configuring Enhanced Multiband The data preparation is added.
Management

263 Configuring Dynamic Configuration The data preparation is added.
of HSDPA CQI Feedback Period

264 Configuring Load-based Uplink The data preparation is added.
Target BLER Configuration

265 Configuring Inter-Frequency Load The data preparation is added.
Balancing Based on Configurable Load
Threshold

282 Configuring Service-Based PS The data preparation is added.
Handover from UMTS to LTE

283 Configuring Fast CS Fallback Based The data preparation is added.
on RIM

Compared with issue 02 (2012-06-30), this issue does not exclude any topics.

02 (2012-06-30)
This is the second commercial release of RAN14.0.

Compared with issue 01 (2012-04-26), this issue does not include any topics.

Compared with issue 01 (2012-04-26), this issue incorporates the following changes:

Content Description

167 Configuring Uplink Enhanced The activation procedure is changed.
CELL_FACH

175 Configuring Enhanced Fast The activation procedure is optimized.
Dormancy

68 Configuring TFO/TrFO The context is changed.

282 Configuring Service-Based PS The activation procedure is optimized.
Handover from UMTS to LTE

287 Configuring Differentiated Service The activation procedure is optimized.
Based on SPI Weight

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 5
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 1 Changes in the RAN Feature Activation Guide

Content Description

159 Configuring DC-HSDPA The activation procedure is optimized.

265 Configuring Inter-Frequency Load The activation procedure is optimized.
Balancing Based on Configurable Load
Threshold

200 Configuring MOCN Cell Resource The activation procedure is optimized.
Demarcation

261 Configuring CE Overbooking The activation procedure is optimized.

115 Configuring Anti-Interference The activation procedure is optimized.
Scheduling for HSUPA

151 Configuring Downlink 64QAM The activation procedure is optimized.

Compared with issue 01 (2012-04-26), this issue does not exclude any topics.

01 (2012-04-26)
This is the first commercial release of RAN14.0.

Compared with issue Draft B (2012-03-26), this issue includes the following new topics:
l 200 Configuring MOCN Cell Resource Demarcation
l 283 Configuring Fast CS Fallback Based on RIM
l 155 Configuring HSPA+ Downlink 84 Mbit/s per User
l 69 Configuring AMR Voice Quality Improvement Based on PLVA
l 160 Configuring HSPA+ Uplink 23 Mbit/s per User
l 261 Configuring CE Overbooking
l 295 Configuring Micro NodeB Self-Planning

Compared with issue Draft B (2012-03-26), this issue incorporates the following changes:

content Description

156 Configuring DC-HSDPA+MIMO The activation procedure is optimized.

215 Configuring PDCP Header The step of activating the license is deleted.
Compression (RFC2507)

263 Configuring Dynamic Configuration The dependencies on other features is
of HSDPA CQI Feedback Period changed.

176 Configuring Voice Service Experience The verification procedure is optimized.
Improvement for Weak Reception UEs

270 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover The verification procedure is optimized.
Based on Coverage

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 1 Changes in the RAN Feature Activation Guide

content Description

251 Configuring DRD Introduction The configuration procedure of activating the
Package RRC Inter-frequency Redirection Based on
Distance is added.

192 Configuring Dedicated Iub The configuration procedure of activating
Transmission Control Dedicated Iub Transmission Control in IP
mode is added.

105 Configuring HSUPA 2ms TTI The step of enabling the single-user peak-rate
improvement algorithm of HSUPA 2 ms TTI
is added.

175 Configuring Enhanced Fast The configuration procedure is optimized.
Dormancy

52 Configuring NodeB Self-Discovery The configuration of NodeB deployment on
Based on IP Mode the M2000 is modified.

120 Configuring Control Channel Parallel The verification steps are modified.
Interference Cancellation (Phase 2)

161 Configuring DC-HSUPA The description of the HSPA+ Uplink 23
Mbit/s per User feature is incorporated into
160 Configuring HSPA+ Uplink 23 Mbit/s
per User.

296 Configuring NodeB Integrated IPSec The task example is optimized.

297 Configuring NodeB PKI Support The task example is optimized.

143 Configuring MIMO Prime The cell configuration is added.

Compared with issue Draft B (2012-03-26), this issue does not exclude any topics.

Draft B (2012-03-26)
This is the Draft B release of RAN14.0.
Compared with issue Draft A (2012-02-15), this issue does not include any new topics.
Compared with issue Draft A (2012-02-15), this issue incorporates the following changes:

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 7
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 1 Changes in the RAN Feature Activation Guide

content Description

150 Configuring HSPA+ Downlink The dependecy of BBU3806C is deleted from
42Mbps per User prerequisites.
288 Configuring Optimization of R99 and
HSUPA Users Fairness
174 Configuring Enhanced DRX
172 Configuring Flexible HSPA+
Technology Selection
169 Configuring 96 HSUPA Users per Cell
164 Configuring CPC - DTX /DRX
162 Configuring Downlink Enhanced
CELL_FACH
119 Configuring SRB over HSUPA
148 Configuring HSPA+ Downlink
21Mbps per User
152 Configuring 2x2 MIMO
147 Configuring HSPA+ Downlink
28Mbps per User
142 Configuring CQI Adjustment Based
on Dynamic BLER Target
141 Configuring SRB over HSDPA
115 Configuring Anti-Interference
Scheduling for HSUPA
107 Configuring HSUPA 5.74Mbps per
User
106 Configuring HSUPA 2 ms/10 ms TTI
Handover
260 Configuring Dynamic Target ROT
Adjustment
105 Configuring HSUPA 2ms TTI
159 Configuring DC-HSDPA
151 Configuring Downlink 64QAM
144 Configuring Adaptive Configuration
of Typical HSPA Rate

144 Configuring Adaptive Configuration The dependencies on hardware are added to
of Typical HSPA Rate prerequisites.

172 Configuring Flexible HSPA+ The limit that WRFD-010704 Flexible HSPA
Technology Selection + Technology Selection cannot be used
together with WRFD-010699 DC-HSDPA
+MIMO is deleted from prerequisites, and the
configuration of DC-HSDPA and MIMO is
added.

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 8
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 1 Changes in the RAN Feature Activation Guide

Compared with issue Draft A (2012-02-15), this issue does not exclude any topics.

Draft A (2012-02-15)
This is the Draft A release of RAN14.0.
Compared with issue 05 (2012-01-05) of RAN13.0, this issue includes the following new topics:
l 41 Configuring CS Fallback Guarantee for LTE Emergency Calls
l 144 Configuring Adaptive Configuration of Typical HSPA Rate
l 145 Configuring HSDPA Scheduling Based on UE Location
l 146 Configuring Adaptive Adjustment of HSUPA Small Target Retransmissions
l 161 Configuring DC-HSUPA
l 176 Configuring Voice Service Experience Improvement for Weak Reception UEs
l 177 Configuring Layered Paging in URA_PCH
l 218 Configuring Iu/Iur Transmission Resource Pool in RNC
l 219 Configuring Iub Transmission Resource Pool in RNC
l 260 Configuring Dynamic Target ROT Adjustment
l 262 Configuring Intelligent Access Class Control
l 263 Configuring Dynamic Configuration of HSDPA CQI Feedback Period
l 264 Configuring Load-based Uplink Target BLER Configuration
l 265 Configuring Inter-Frequency Load Balancing Based on Configurable Load
Threshold
l 282 Configuring Service-Based PS Handover from UMTS to LTE
l 296 Configuring NodeB Integrated IPSec
l 297 Configuring NodeB PKI Support
l 298 Configuring Intelligent Battery Management
l 304 Multi-mode BS Common IPSec(UMTS)
l 306 Configuring Dynamic MA for GU Dynamic Spectrum Sharing (UMTS)
l 307 Configuring GSM Power Control on Interface Frequency for GU Small
Frequency Gap (UMTS)
Compared with issue 05 (2012-01-05) of RAN13.0, this issue incorporates the following
changes:

content Description

202 Configuring One Tunnel The configuration of S12 interface is added.

235 Configuring Independent The configuration of new function is added.
Demodulation of Signals from Multiple
RRUs in One Cell

247 Configuring Inter Frequency Load The configuration of new function is added.
Balance

250 Configuring Enhanced Multiband The configuration of new function is added.
Management

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 9
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 1 Changes in the RAN Feature Activation Guide

Compared with issue 05 (2012-01-05) of RAN13.0, this issue does not exclude any topics.

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 10
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

2 Feature Activation and License Item
Descriptions

RANFeatures are classified into basic and optional features. Basic features are not license-
controlled and therefore do not require license activation before use. Some optional features are
license-controlled and therefore require license activation before use. If the Configuration
Method column for a basic feature in the RAN basic feature list is None, enabling this feature
does not involve any configurations. If the Configuration Method column for an optional feature
in the RAN optional feature list is None, this feature is enabled once it is activated.

Table 2-1 lists the RAN basic features. Table 2-2 lists the RAN optional features.

Table 2-1 RAN Basic Feature List

Feature ID Feature Name Configuration Method

WRFD-000001 System Improvement for None
RAN5.1

WRFD-000002 System Improvement for None
RAN6.0

WRFD-000003 System Improvement for None
RAN6.1

WRFD-000004 System Improvement for None
RAN10.0

WRFD-000005 System Improvement for None
RAN11.0

WRFD-000006 System Improvement for None
RAN11.1

WRFD-000007 System Improvement for None
RAN12.0

WRFD-000008 System Improvement for None
RAN13.0

WRFD-010101 3GPP R9 Specifications None

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 11
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID Feature Name Configuration Method

WRFD-010102 Operating Multi-band None

WRFD-010201 FDD Mode None

WRFD-010510 3.4/6.8/13.6/27.2Kbps RRC 5 Configuring
Connection and Radio 3.4/6.8/13.6/27.2Kbps RRC
Access Bearer Establishment Connection and Radio
and Release Access Bearer
Establishment and Release

WRFD-010501 Conversational QoS Class 6 Configuring
Conversational QoS Class

WRFD-010502 Streaming QoS Class 7 Configuring Streaming
QoS Class

WRFD-010503 Interactive QoS Class 8 Configuring Interactive
QoS Class

WRFD-010504 Background QoS Class 9 Configuring Background
QoS Class

WRFD-010609 Multiple RAB Introduction None
Package (PS RAB < 2)

WRFD-01060901 Combination of Two CS None
Services (Except for Two
AMR Speech Services)

WRFD-01060902 Combination of One CS None
Service and One PS Service

WRFD-01060903 Combination of Two CS None
Services and One PS Service
(Except for Two AMR
Speech Services)

WRFD-021104 Emergency Call 10 Configuring Emergency
Call

WRFD-010506 RAB Quality of Service 11 Configuring RAB
Renegotiation over Iu Quality of Service
Interface Renegotiation over Iu
Interface

MRFD-210604 2-Way Antenna Receive 12 Configuring 2-Way
Diversity Antenna Receive Diversity

WRFD-010205 Cell Digital Combination and 13 Configuring Cell Digital
Split Combination and Split

WRFD-010208 Fast Power Congestion None
Control (FCC)

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 12
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID Feature Name Configuration Method

WRFD-010211 Active TX Chain Gain None
Calibration

WRFD-010202 UE State in Connected Mode 14 Configuring UE State in
(CELL-DCH, CELL-PCH, Connected Mode
URA-PCH, CELL-FACH) (CELL_DCH,
CELL_PCH, URA_PCH,
CELL_FACH)

WRFD-010401 System Information None
Broadcasting

WRFD-010301 Paging UE in Idle, 15 Configuring Paging UE
CELL_PCH, URA_PCH in Idle, CELL_PCH,
State (Type 1) URA_PCH State (Type 1)

WRFD-010302 Paging UE in CELL_FACH, 16 Configuring Paging UE
CELL_DCH State (Type 2) in CELL_FACH,
CELL_DCH State (Type 2)

WRFD-020900 Logical Channel None
Management

WRFD-021000 Transport Channel None
Management

WRFD-022000 Physical Channel None
Management

WRFD-021101 Dynamic Channel 17 Configuring Dynamic
Configuration Control Channel Configuration
(DCCC) Control

WRFD-011401 Integrity Protection 18 Configuring Integrity
Protection

WRFD-011402 Encryption 19 Configuring Encryption

WRFD-020501 Open Loop Power Control 20 Configuring Open Loop
Power Control

WRFD-020502 Downlink Power Balance 21 Configuring Downlink
Power Balance

WRFD-020503 Outer Loop Power Control 22 Configuring Outer Loop
Power Control

WRFD-020504 Inner Loop Power Control 23 Configuring Inner Loop
Power Control

WRFD-020101 Admission Control 24 Configuring Admission
Control

WRFD-020102 Load Measurement 25 Configuring Load
Measurement

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 13
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID Feature Name Configuration Method

WRFD-020106 Load Reshuffling 26 Configuring Load
Reshuffling

WRFD-020107 Overload Control 27 Configuring Overload
Control

WRFD-020108 Code Resource Management 28 Configuring Code
Resource Management

WRFD-020105 Potential User Control 29 Configuring Potential
User Control

WRFD-021102 Cell Barring 30 Configuring Cell
Barring

WRFD-021301 Shared Network Support in 31 Configuring Shared
Connected Mode Network Support in
Connected Mode

MRFD-210104 BSC/RNC Resource Sharing None

WRFD-020201 Intra NodeB Softer Handover 32 Configuring Intra
NodeB Softer Handover

WRFD-020202 Intra RNC Soft Handover 33 Configuring Intra RNC
Soft Handover

WRFD-020203 Inter RNC Soft Handover 34 Configuring Inter RNC
Soft Handover

WRFD-020301 Intra Frequency Hard 35 Configuring Intra
Handover Frequency Hard Handover

WRFD-010801 Intra RNC Cell Update 36 Configuring Intra RNC
Cell Update

WRFD-010802 Inter RNC Cell Update 37 Configuring Inter RNC
Cell Update

WRFD-010901 Intra RNC URA Update 38 Configuring Intra RNC
URA Update

WRFD-010902 Inter RNC URA Update 39 Configuring Inter RNC
URA Update

WRFD-021400 Direct Signaling Connection 40 Configuring Direct
Re-establishment (DSCR) Signaling Connection Re-
establishment (DSCR)

WRFD-140102 CS Fallback Guarantee for 41 Configuring CS
LTE Emergency Calls Fallback Guarantee for
LTE Emergency Calls

MRFD-210204 Star Topology None

MRFD-210205 Chain Topology None

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 14
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID Feature Name Configuration Method

MRFD-210206 Tree Topology None

MRFD-210501 NodeB Clock 42 Configuring NodeB
Clock

MRFD-210502 RNC Clock None

WRFD-050301 ATM Transmission None
Introduction Package

WRFD-05030101 ATM over E1T1 on Iub None
Interface

WRFD-05030102 ATM over Channelized None
STM-1/OC-3 on Iub
Interface

WRFD-05030103 ATM over Non-channelized None
STM-1/OC-3c on Iub/Iu/Iur
Interface

WRFD-05030104 Dynamic AAL2 Connections 43 Configuring Dynamic
in Iub/IuCS/Iur Interface AAL2 Connections in Iub/
IuCS/Iur Interface

WRFD-05030105 Permanent AAL5 44 Configuring Permanent
Connections for Control AAL5 Connections for
Plane Traffic Control Plane Traffic

WRFD-05030106 Call Admission Based on 45 Configuring Call
Used AAL2 Path Bandwidth Admission Based on Used
AAL2 Path Bandwidth

WRFD-05030107 CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, 46 Configuring CBR, rt-
UBR ATM QoS Classes VBR, nrt-VBR, UBR ATM
QoS Classes

WRFD-05030110 F5 47 Configuring F5

WRFD-050304 IMA for E1T1 or None
Channelized STM-1/OC-3
on Iub Interface

WRFD-050305 UBR+ ATM QoS Class 48 Configuring UBR+
ATM QoS Class

MRFD-210103 Link aggregation 49 Configuring Link
Aggregation

WRFD-040100 Flow Control 50 Configuring Flow
Control

WRFD-040101 DPU Board Replaced None
without Service Interrupt in
RNC

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 15
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID Feature Name Configuration Method

MRFD-210101 System Redundancy None

MRFD-210102 Operate System Security None
Management

MRFD-210302 Performance Management None

MRFD-210304 Fault Management None

MRFD-210303 Inventory Management None

MRFD-210301 Configuration Management None

MRFD-210305 Security Management None

MRFD-210801 Interface Tracing None

MRFD-210802 Call Tracing None

MRFD-210401 RNC Software Management None

MRFD-210402 NodeB Software None
Management

MRFD-210310 NodeB Software USB None
Download

WRFD-031100 BOOTP 51 Configuring BOOTP

WRFD-031101 NodeB Self-discovery Based 52 Configuring NodeB Self-
on IP Mode Discovery Based on IP
Mode

WRFD-031102 NodeB Remote Self- None
configuration

WRFD-031103 NodeB Self-test None

MRFD-210403 License Management None

WRFD-040300 License Control for Urgency 53 Configuring License
Control for Urgency

MRFD-210309 DBS Topology Maintenance None

WRFD-031000 Intelligently Out of Service 54 Configuring
Intelligently Out of Service

WRFD-031200 OCNS 55 Configuring OCNS

WRFD-031400 Power off the equipment 56 Configuring Power Off
level by level the Equipment Level by
Level

WRFD-031500 Solar Power Device 57 Configuring Solar
Management Power Device Management

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 16
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID Feature Name Configuration Method

WRFD-021404 Single IP Address for NodeB None

WRFD-020406 Intelligent Power None
Measurement

WRFD-010212 Improved CE Mapping for E- None
DCH

MRFD-210701 Documentation None

MRFD-210601 Connection with TMA 58 Configuring Connection
(Tower Mounted Amplifier) with TMA (Tower
Mounted Amplifier)

MRFD-210602 Remote Electrical Tilt 59 Configuring Remote
Electrical Tilt

WRFD-060003 Same Band Antenna Sharing 60 Configuring Same Band
Unit (900Mhz) Antenna Sharing Unit (900
MHz)

MRFD-220001 Multi-mode BS Common None
CPRI Interface(NodeB)

MRFD-220002 Multi-mode BS RRU/RFU None
star-connection with separate
CPRI interface(NodeB)

Table 2-2 RAN Optional Feature List
Feature ID Feature Name License License Configuration
Control Item Configured Method
on...

WRFD-010617 VoIP over VoIP over BSC6900 61 Configuring
HSPA/HSPA+ HSPA VoIP over
Introduction HSPA/HSPA+
Pakage

WRFD-010617 RAB Mapping VoIP over BSC6900 None
01 HSPA
Introduction
Pakage

WRFD-010617 Optimized VoIP over BSC6900 62 Configuring
03 Scheduling for HSPA Optimized
VoIP over Introduction Scheduling for
HSPA Pakage VoIP over
HSPA

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 17
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID Feature Name License License Configuration
Control Item Configured Method
on...

WRFD-010618 IMS Signaling IMS Signaling BSC6900 63 Configuring
over HSPA over HSPA IMS Signaling
over HSPA

WRFD-011501 PDCP Header PDCP ROHC BSC6900 64 Configuring
Compression Function PDCP Header
(RoHC) Compression
(RoHC)

WRFD-010619 CS voice over CS voice over BSC6900 65 Configuring
HSPA/HSPA+ HSPA CS Voice over
HSPA/HSPA+

WRFD-010613 AMR-WB Wide Band BSC6900 66 Configuring
(Adaptive Multi AMR AMR-WB
Rate Wide (Adaptive
Band) Multi Rate
Wide Band)

WRFD-020701 AMR/WB- AMR voice BSC6900 67 Configuring
AMR Speech coding rate AMR/WB-
Rates Control control AMR Speech
Rates Control

WRFD-011600 TFO/TrFO TFO/TrFO BSC6900 68 Configuring
TFO/TrFO

WRFD-140201 AMR Voice AMR Voice NodeB 69 Configuring
Quality Quality AMR Voice
Improvement Improvement Quality
Based on PLVA Based on PLVA Improvement
Based on
PLVA

WRFD-011000 Cell Broadcast Cell broadcast BSC6900 70 Configuring
Service service Cell Broadcast
Service

WRFD-011001 Simplified Cell Simplified Cell BSC6900 71 Configuring
Broadcast Broadcast Simplified Cell
Broadcast

WRFD-020127 Warning of Warning of BSC6900 72 Configuring
Disaster Disaster Warning of
Disaster

WRFD-010616 MBMS MBMS BSC6900&Nod 73 Configuring
Introduction Function eB MBMS
Package Introduction
Package

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 18
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID Feature Name License License Configuration
Control Item Configured Method
on...

WRFD-010616 MBMS MBMS BSC6900&Nod None
01 Broadcast Mode Function eB

WRFD-010616 MBMS MBMS BSC6900&Nod 74 Configuring
02 Admission Function eB MBMS
Control Admission
Control

WRFD-010616 MBMS Load MBMS BSC6900&Nod 75 Configuring
03 Control Function eB MBMS Load
Control

WRFD-010616 MBMS Soft/ MBMS BSC6900&Nod None
04 Selective Function eB
Combining

WRFD-010616 MBMS MBMS BSC6900&Nod 76 Configuring
05 Transport Function eB MBMS
Resource Transport
Management Resource
Management

WRFD-010616 Streaming MBMS BSC6900&Nod 77 Configuring
06 Service on Function eB Streaming
MBMS Service on
MBMS

WRFD-010616 MBMS 2 MBMS BSC6900&Nod None
07 Channels per Function eB
Cell

WRFD-010616 16/32/64/128K MBMS BSC6900&Nod 78 Configuring
08 bps Channel Function eB 16/32/64/128K
Rate on MBMS bps Channel
Rate on MBMS

WRFD-010660 MBMS Phase 2 None BSC6900 79 Configuring
MBMS Phase 2

WRFD-010660 MBMS MBMS BSC6900 80 Configuring
01 Enhanced Enhanced MBMS
Broadcast Mode Broadcast Mode Enhanced
Broadcast
Mode

WRFD-010660 MBMS P2P MBMS P2P BSC6900 81 Configuring
02 over HSDPA over HSDPA MBMS P2P
over HSDPA

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 19
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID Feature Name License License Configuration
Control Item Configured Method
on...

WRFD-010660 MBMS MBMS BSC6900 82 Configuring
03 Admission Admission MBMS
Enhancement Enhancement Admission
Enhancement

WRFD-010660 Inter-Frequency None None 83 Configuring
04 Neighboring Inter-
Cell Selection Frequency
for MBMS PTP Neighboring
Users Cell Selection
for MBMS
PTP Users

WRFD-010627 FACH None None 84 Configuring
Transmission FACH
Sharing for Transmission
MBMS Sharing for
MBMS

WRFD-010626 MBMS FLC MBMS FLC BSC6900 85 Configuring
(Frequency (Frequency MBMS FLC
Layer Layer (Frequency
Convergence)/ Convergence)/ Layer
FLD(Frequency FLD(Frequency Convergence)/
Layer Layer FLD
Dispersion) Dispersion) (Frequency
Layer
Dispersion)

WRFD-010624 MBMS 8 MBMS 8 BSC6900 None
Channels per Channels per
Cell Cell

WRFD-010625 256Kbps 256Kbps BSC6900 None
Channel Rate on Channel Rate on
MBMS MBMS

WRFD-010628 MBMS 16 MBMS 16 BSC6900 None
Channels per Channels per
Cell Cell

WRFD-010661 MBMS over Iur MBMS over Iur BSC6900 86 Configuring
MBMS over
Iur

WRFD-010662 Dynamic Power Dynamic Power BSC6900 87 Configuring
Estimation for Estimation for Dynamic
MTCH MTCH Power
Estimation for
MTCH

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 20
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID Feature Name License License Configuration
Control Item Configured Method
on...

WRFD-010663 MSCH MSCH BSC6900 88 Configuring
Scheduling Scheduling MSCH
Scheduling

WRFD-010665 MBMS Channel MBMS Channel BSC6900 89 Configuring
Audience Audience MBMS
Rating Statistics Rating Statistics Channel
Audience
Rating
Statistics

WRFD-020801 Cell ID + RTT Cell ID LCS BSC6900 90 Configuring
Function Based Cell ID + RTT
LCS Function
Based LCS

WRFD-020802 OTDOA Based OTDOA LCS BSC6900 91 Configuring
LCS OTDOA Based
LCS

WRFD-020803 A-GPS Based AGPS LCS BSC6900 92 Configuring
LCS A-GPS Based
LCS

WRFD-020804 LCS Classified LCS Classified BSC6900 93 Configuring
Zones Zones LCS Classified
Zones

WRFD-020805 LCS over Iur LCS over Iur BSC6900 94 Configuring
LCS over Iur

WRFD-020807 Iupc Interface Iu-PC Interface BSC6900 95 Configuring
for LCS service for LCS service Iupc Interface
for LCS
Service

WRFD-020134 Push to Talk Push To Talk BSC6900 96 Configuring
(per PTT Active Push to Talk
User)

WRFD-010612 HSUPA RNC:High BSC6900&Nod 97 Configuring
Introduction Speed Uplink eB HSUPA
Package Packet Access Introduction
NodeB:the Package
number of
NodeBs with
HSUPA
function
enabled

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 21
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID Feature Name License License Configuration
Control Item Configured Method
on...

WRFD-010612 HSUPA UE RNC:High BSC6900&Nod None
01 Category Speed Uplink eB
Support Packet Access
NodeB:the
number of
NodeBs with
HSUPA
function
enabled

WRFD-010612 HSUPA HARQ RNC:High BSC6900&Nod None
09 and Fast UL Speed Uplink eB
Scheduling in Packet Access
Node B NodeB:the
number of
NodeBs with
HSUPA
function
enabled

WRFD-010612 HSUPA RNC:High BSC6900&Nod 98 Configuring
02 Admission Speed Uplink eB HSUPA
Control Packet Access Admission
NodeB:the Control
number of
NodeBs with
HSUPA
function
enabled

WRFD-010612 HSUPA Power RNC:High BSC6900&Nod 99 Configuring
03 Control Speed Uplink eB HSUPA Power
Packet Access Control
NodeB:the
number of
NodeBs with
HSUPA
function
enabled

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 22
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID Feature Name License License Configuration
Control Item Configured Method
on...

WRFD-010612 HSUPA RNC:High BSC6900&Nod 100
04 Mobility Speed Uplink eB Configuring
Management Packet Access HSUPA
NodeB:the Mobility
number of Management
NodeBs with
HSUPA
function
enabled

WRFD-010612 HSUPA DCCC RNC:High BSC6900&Nod 101
08 Speed Uplink eB Configuring
Packet Access HSUPA DCCC
NodeB:the
number of
NodeBs with
HSUPA
function
enabled

WRFD-010612 HSUPA RNC:High BSC6900&Nod None
07 Transport Speed Uplink eB
Resource Packet Access
Management NodeB:the
number of
NodeBs with
HSUPA
function
enabled

WRFD-010612 Interactive and RNC:High BSC6900&Nod None
06 Background Speed Uplink eB
Traffic Class on Packet Access
HSUPA NodeB:the
number of
NodeBs with
HSUPA
function
enabled

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 23
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID Feature Name License License Configuration
Control Item Configured Method
on...

WRFD-010612 HSUPA RNC:High BSC6900&Nod None
10 1.44Mbps per Speed Uplink eB
User Packet Access
NodeB:the
number of
NodeBs with
HSUPA
function
enabled

WRFD-010612 20 HSUPA RNC:High BSC6900&Nod 102
11 Users per Cell Speed Uplink eB Configuring 20
Packet Access HSUPA Users
NodeB:the per Cell
number of
NodeBs with
HSUPA
function
enabled

WRFD-010612 HSUPA Iub None None 103
12 Flow Control in Configuring
Case of Iub HSUPA Iub
Congestion Flow Control
in Case of Iub
Congestion

WRFD-010614 HSUPA Phase 2 HSUPA 2ms/ BSC6900 None
10ms TTI
handover
the number of
NodeBs with
HSUPA 2ms
TTI function
enabled

WRFD-010614 HSUPA E- HSUPA 2ms/ BSC6900 104
01 AGCH Power 10ms TTI Configuring
Control (Based handover HSUPA E-
on CQI or HS- AGCH Power
SCCH) Control (Based
on CQI or HS-
SCCH)

WRFD-010614 Enhanced Fast HSUPA 2ms/ BSC6900 None
02 UL Scheduling 10ms TTI
handover

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 24
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID Feature Name License License Configuration
Control Item Configured Method
on...

WRFD-010614 HSUPA 2ms the number of NodeB 105
03 TTI NodeBs with Configuring
HSUPA 2ms HSUPA 2ms
TTI function TTI
enabled

WRFD-010614 HSUPA 2ms/ HSUPA 2ms/ BSC6900 106
04 10ms TTI 10ms TTI Configuring
Handover handover HSUPA 2 ms/
10 ms TTI
Handover

WRFD-010614 HSUPA HSUPA BSC6900 107
05 5.74Mbps per 5.74Mbps per Configuring
User User HSUPA
5.74Mbps per
User

WRFD-010632 Streaming Streaming BSC6900 108
Traffic Class on Traffic Class on Configuring
HSUPA HSUPA Streaming
Traffic Class
on HSUPA

WRFD-010635 HSUPA over Iur HSUPA over Iur BSC6900 109
Configuring
HSUPA over
Iur

WRFD-010640 Uplink Macro Uplink Macro BSC6900 None
Diversity Diversity
Intelligent Intelligent
Receiving Receiving

WRFD-010690 TTI Switch for TTI Switch for BSC6900 110
BE Services BE Services Configuring
Based on Based on TTI Switch for
Coverage Coverage BE Services
Based on
Coverage

WRFD-010641 HSUPA HSUPA BSC6900 111
Adaptive Adaptive Configuring
Transmission Retransmission HSUPA
Adaptive
Transmission

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 25
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID Feature Name License License Configuration
Control Item Configured Method
on...

WRFD-010638 Dynamic CE the number of NodeB 112
Resource NodeBs with Configuring
Management dynamic CE Dynamic CE
function Resource
enabled Management

WRFD-010692 HSUPA FDE The number of NodeB 113
Cells with FDE Configuring
function HSUPA FDE
enabled

WRFD-010712 Adaptive Adaptive BSC6900 114
Configuration Configuration Configuring
of Traffic of Traffic Adaptive
Channel Power Channel Power Configuration
offset for offset for of Traffic
HSUPA HSUPA Channel Power
offset for
HSUPA

WRFD-020136 Anti- the number of NodeB 115
Interference cells with anti- Configuring
Scheduling for interference Anti-
HSUPA scheduling for Interference
HSUPA Scheduling for
function HSUPA
enabled

WRFD-020137 Dual-Threshold the number of NodeB 116
Scheduling with NodeBs with Configuring
HSUPA dual-threshold Dual-
Interference scheduling with Threshold
Cancellation HSUPA Scheduling
interference with HSUPA
cancellation Interference
function Cancellation
enabled

WRFD-010634 60 HSUPA 60 HSUPA BSC6900 117
Users per Cell Users per Cell Configuring 60
HSUPA Users
per Cell

WRFD-010210 Control the number of NodeB None
Channel NodeBs with
Parallel CCPIC function
Interference enabled
Cancellation
(CCPIC)

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 26
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID Feature Name License License Configuration
Control Item Configured Method
on...

WRFD-010691 HSUPA UL The number of NodeB 118
Interference Cells with UL Configuring
Cancellation IC function HSUPA UL
enabled Interference
Cancellation

WRFD-010636 SRB over SRB over BSC6900 119
HSUPA HSUPA Configuring
SRB over
HSUPA

WRFD-140202 Control The number of NodeB 120
Channel NodeBs with Configuring
Parallel flexible Control
Interference frequency Channel
Cancellation separation Parallel
(Phase 2) function Interference
enabled Cancellation
(Phase 2)

WRFD-010610 HSDPA High Speed BSC6900 121
Introduction Downlink Configuring
Package Packet Access HSDPA
Introduction
Package

WRFD-010610 QPSK NodeB:HSDPA NodeB None
17 Modulation RRM package 1
NodeB:HSDPA
function

WRFD-010610 15 Codes per NodeB:HSDPA NodeB 122
01 Cell RRM package 1 Configuring 15
NodeB:HSDPA Codes per Cell
function

WRFD-010610 Time and HS- NodeB:HSDPA NodeB 123
18 PDSCH Codes RRM package 1 Configuring
Multiplex NodeB:HSDPA Time and HS-
function PDSCH Codes
Multiplex

WRFD-010610 HSDPA H- NodeB:HSDPA NodeB 124
09 ARQ & RRM package 1 Configuring
Scheduling NodeB:HSDPA HSDPA H-
(MAX C/I, RR function ARQ &
and PF) Scheduling
(MAX C/I, RR,
and PF)

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 27
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID Feature Name License License Configuration
Control Item Configured Method
on...

WRFD-010610 HSDPA Static NodeB:HSDPA NodeB 125
05 Code Allocation RRM package 1 Configuring
and RNC- NodeB:HSDPA HSDPA Static
Controlled function Code
Dynamic Code Allocation and
Allocation RNC-
Controlled
Dynamic Code
Allocation

WRFD-010610 HSDPA Power NodeB:HSDPA NodeB 126
04 Control RRM package 1 Configuring
NodeB:HSDPA HSDPA Power
function Control

WRFD-010610 HSDPA NodeB:HSDPA NodeB 127
03 Admission RRM package 1 Configuring
Control NodeB:HSDPA HSDPA
function Admission
Control

WRFD-010610 HSDPA NodeB:HSDPA NodeB None
19 Dynamic Power RRM package 1
Allocation NodeB:HSDPA
function

WRFD-010610 Improvement of NodeB:HSDPA NodeB 128
20 User Experience RRM package 1 Configuring
in Low Traffic NodeB:HSDPA Improvement
Service function of User
Experience in
Low Traffic
Service

WRFD-010610 HSDPA Flow NodeB:HSDPA NodeB 129
10 Control RRM package 1 Configuring
NodeB:HSDPA HSDPA Flow
function Control

WRFD-010610 HSDPA NodeB:HSDPA NodeB 130
06 Mobility RRM package 1 Configuring
Management NodeB:HSDPA HSDPA
function Mobility
Management

WRFD-010610 HSDPA NodeB:HSDPA NodeB None
14 Transport RRM package 1
Resource NodeB:HSDPA
Management function

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 28
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID Feature Name License License Configuration
Control Item Configured Method
on...

WRFD-010610 Interactive and NodeB:HSDPA NodeB None
08 Background RRM package 1
Traffic Class on NodeB:HSDPA
HSDPA function

WRFD-010610 HSDPA UE NodeB:HSDPA NodeB 131
02 Category 1 to 28 RRM package 1 Configuring
NodeB:HSDPA HSDPA UE
function Category 1 to
28

WRFD-010610 HSDPA NodeB:HSDPA NodeB None
15 1.8Mbps per RRM package 1
User NodeB:HSDPA
function

WRFD-010610 16 HSDPA NodeB:HSDPA NodeB None
16 Users per Cell RRM package 1
NodeB:HSDPA
function

WRFD-010620 HSDPA High Speed BSC6900 None
3.6Mbps per Downlink
User Packet Access
Function 3.6M

WRFD-010629 DL 16QAM NodeB:HSDPA NodeB 132
Modulation RRM package 1 Configuring
NodeB:HSDPA DL 16QAM
function Modulation

WRFD-010631 Dynamic Code HSDPA RRM NodeB 133
Allocation package 1 Configuring
Based on Node Dynamic Code
B Allocation
Based on
NodeB

WRFD-010621 HSDPA High Speed BSC6900 None
7.2Mbps per Downlink
User Packet Access
Function 7.2M

WRFD-010622 32 HSDPA 32 HSDPA BSC6900 None
Users per Cell Users per Cell

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 29
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID Feature Name License License Configuration
Control Item Configured Method
on...

WRFD-010611 HSDPA None BSC6900 134
Enhanced Configuring
Package HSDPA
Enhanced
Package

WRFD-010611 Scheduling None None 135
03 based on EPF Configuring
and GBR Scheduling
based on EPF
and GBR

WRFD-010611 HSDPA State HSDPA State BSC6900 136
11 Transition Transition Configuring
HSDPA State
Transition

WRFD-010611 HSDPA DRD HSDPA DRD BSC6900 137
12 Configuring
HSDPA DRD

WRFD-010611 HS-DPCCH HS-DPCCH BSC6900 138
13 Preamble Preamble Configuring
Support support HS-DPCCH
Preamble
Support

WRFD-010630 Streaming Streaming BSC6900 139
Traffic Class on Traffic Class on Configuring
HSDPA HSDPA Streaming
Traffic Class
on HSDPA

WRFD-010650 HSDPA HSDPA BSC6900 None
13.976Mbps per 13.976Mbps per
User User

WRFD-010651 HSDPA over Iur HSDPA over Iur BSC6900 140
Configuring
HSDPA over
Iur

WRFD-010652 SRB over SRB over BSC6900 141
HSDPA HSDPA Configuring
SRB over
HSDPA

WRFD-010623 64 HSDPA 64 HSDPA BSC6900 None
Users per Cell Users per Cell

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 30
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID Feature Name License License Configuration
Control Item Configured Method
on...

WRFD-030010 CQI CQI NodeB 142
Adjustment Adjustment Configuring
Based on Based on CQI
Dynamic BLER Dynamic BLER Adjustment
Target Target(per Cell) Based on
Dynamic
BLER Target

WRFD-030011 MIMO Prime MIMO Prime NodeB 143
(per Cell) Configuring
MIMO Prime

WRFD-030004 Adaptive Self-adaption of BSC6900 144
Configuration HSPA Typical Configuring
of Typical Throughput Adaptive
HSPA Rate Configuration
of Typical
HSPA Rate

WRFD-140221 HSDPA HSDPA NodeB 145
Scheduling Scheduling Configuring
Based on UE Based on UE HSDPA
Location Location(Per Scheduling
Cell) Based on UE
Location

WRFD-140222 Adaptive None None 146
Adjustment of Configuring
HSUPA Small Adaptive
Target Adjustment of
Retransmission HSUPA Small
s Target
Retransmissio
ns

WRFD-010680 HSPA+ HSPA + BSC6900 147
Downlink Downlink 28 Configuring
28Mbps per Mbit/s Per User HSPA+
User Downlink
28Mbps per
User

WRFD-010681 HSPA+ HSPA + BSC6900 148
Downlink Downlink 21 Configuring
21Mbps per Mbit/s Per User HSPA+
User Downlink
21Mbps per
User

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 31
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID Feature Name License License Configuration
Control Item Configured Method
on...

WRFD-010685 Downlink Downlink BSC6900 149
Enhanced L2 Enhanced L2 Configuring
Downlink
Enhanced L2

WRFD-010689 HSPA+ HSPA+ BSC6900 150
Downlink Downlink 42 Configuring
42Mbps per Mbit/s per User HSPA+
User Downlink
42Mbps per
User

WRFD-010683 Downlink the number of NodeB 151
64QAM cells with Configuring
64QAM Downlink
function 64QAM
enabled

WRFD-010684 2x2 MIMO the number of NodeB 152
cells with Configuring
MIMO function 2x2 MIMO
enabled

WRFD-010693 DL 64QAM the number of NodeB 153
+MIMO Cells with DL Configuring
64QAM Downlink
+MIMO 64QAM
function +MIMO
enabled

WRFD-010698 HSPA+ Uplink HSPA+ Uplink BSC6900 154
11.5Mbit/s per 11.5Mbit/s per Configuring
User User HSPA+ Uplink
11.5Mbit/s per
User

WRFD-010703 HSPA+ HSPA+ BSC6900 155
Downlink Downlink Configuring
84Mbit/s per 84Mbit/s per HSPA+
User User Downlink 84
Mbit/s per User

WRFD-010699 DC-HSDPA the number of NodeB 156
+MIMO cells with DC- Configuring
HSDPA DC-HSDPA
+MIMO +MIMO
function
enabled

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 32
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID Feature Name License License Configuration
Control Item Configured Method
on...

WRFD-010694 UL 16QAM The number of NodeB 157
Cells with UL Configuring
16QAM UL 16QAM
function
enabled

WRFD-010695 UL Layer 2 The number of NodeB 158
Improvement Cells with UL Configuring
L2 UL Layer 2
Improvement Improvement
function
enabled

WRFD-010696 DC-HSDPA The number of NodeB 159
Cells with DL Configuring
DC function DC-HSDPA
enabled

WRFD-140203 HSPA+ Uplink HSPA+ Uplink BSC6900 160
23 Mbit/s per 23 Mbit/s per Configuring
User User HSPA+ Uplink
23 Mbit/s per
User

WRFD-140204 DC-HSUPA DC-HSUPA NodeB 161
(Per Cell) Configuring
DC-HSUPA

WRFD-010688 Downlink Enhanced BSC6900 162
Enhanced CELL_FACH Configuring
CELL_FACH Downlink
Enhanced
CELL_FACH

WRFD-010700 Performance the number of NodeB 163
Improvement of cells with Configuring
MIMO and performace Performance
HSDPA Co- improvement of Improvement
carrier MIMO and of MIMO and
HSDPA co- HSDPA Co-
carrier function carrier
enabled

WRFD-010686 CPC - DTX / CPC-DTX / BSC6900 164
DRX DRX Configuring
CPC - DTX /
DRX

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 33
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID Feature Name License License Configuration
Control Item Configured Method
on...

WRFD-010687 CPC - HS- CPC-HS-SCCH BSC6900 165
SCCH less Less Operation Configuring
operation CPC - HS-
SCCH less
operation

WRFD-010697 E-DPCCH the number of NodeB 166
Boosting cells with E- Configuring E-
DPCCH DPCCH
boosting Boosting
function
enabled

WRFD-010701 Uplink Enhanced BSC6900 167
Enhanced Uplink for Configuring
CELL_FACH CELL_FACH Uplink
Enhanced
CELL_FACH

WRFD-010653 96 HSDPA 96 HSDPA BSC6900 168
Users per Cell Users per Cell Configuring 96
HSDPA Users
per Cell

WRFD-010639 96 HSUPA 96 HSUPA BSC6900 169
Users per Cell Users per Cell Configuring 96
HSUPA Users
per Cell

WRFD-010654 128 HSDPA 128 HSDPA BSC6900 170
Users per Cell Users per Cell Configuring
128 HSDPA
Users per Cell

WRFD-010670 128 HSUPA 128 HSUPA BSC6900 171
Users per Cell Users per Cell Configuring
128 HSUPA
Users per Cell

WRFD-010704 Flexible HSPA Flexible HSPA BSC6900 172
+ Technology + Technology Configuring
Selection Selection Flexible HSPA
+ Technology
Selection

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 34
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID Feature Name License License Configuration
Control Item Configured Method
on...

WRFD-010713 Traffic-Based the number of NodeB 173
Activation and cells with Configuring
Deactivation of traffic-based Traffic-Based
the activation and Activation and
Supplementary deactivation of Deactivation of
Carrier In Multi- the slave carrier the
carrier function Supplementar
enabled y Carrier In
Multi-carrier

WRFD-010702 Enhanced DRX Enhanced DRX BSC6900 174
Configuring
Enhanced
DRX

WRFD-020500 Enhanced Fast Fast Dormancy BSC6900 175
Dormancy Enhancement Configuring
(per PS Active Enhanced Fast
User) Dormancy

WRFD-140205 Voice Service Voice Service BSC6900 176
Experience Experience Configuring
Improvement Improvement Voice Service
for Weak for Weak Experience
Reception Ues Reception Ues Improvement
for Weak
Reception UEs

WRFD-140206 Layered Paging Layered Paging BSC6900 177
in URA_PCH in URA_PCH Configuring
Layered
Paging in
URA_PCH

WRFD-020132 Web browsing Web Browsing BSC6900 178
acceleration Acceleration Configuring
Web browsing
acceleration

WRFD-020133 P2P P2P Rate BSC6900 179
Downloading Control Configuring
Rate Control P2P
during Busy Downloading
Hour Rate Control
during Busy
Hour

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 35
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID Feature Name License License Configuration
Control Item Configured Method
on...

WRFD-020116 Dynamic Power the number of NodeB 180
Sharing in NodeBs with Configuring
Multi-Carriers PA-SHARING Dynamic
function Power Sharing
enabled of Multi-
Carriers

WRFD-020117 Multi-Carrier Multi-carrier BSC6900 181
Switch off switch off based Configuring
Based on Traffic on traffic load Multi-Carrier
Load Switch off
Based on
Traffic Load

WRFD-020118 Energy the number of NodeB 182
Efficiency NodeBs with Configuring
Improved energy Energy
efficiency Efficiency
improved Improved
function
enabled

WRFD-020119 Multi-Carrier the number of NodeB 183
Switch off NodeBs with Configuring
Based on Power multi-carrier Multi-Carrier
Backup switch off based Switch off
on power Based on
backup function Power Backup
enabled

WRFD-020122 Multi-Carrier the number of NodeB 184
Switch off cells with multi- Configuring
Based on QoS carrier switch Multi-Carrier
off based on Switch off
QoS function Based on QoS
enabled

WRFD-020121 Intelligent the number of NodeB 185
Power NodeBs with Configuring
Management PSU Intelligent Intelligent
Shutdown Power
function Management
enabled

WRFD-021304 RAN Sharing RAN Sharing BSC6900 186
Introduction Function Configuring
Package RAN Sharing
Introduction
Package

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 36
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID Feature Name License License Configuration
Control Item Configured Method
on...

WRFD-021304 Dedicated RAN Sharing BSC6900 187
01 Carrier for Each Function Configuring
Operator Dedicated
Carrier for
Each Operator

WRFD-021304 Flexible RAN Sharing BSC6900 188
02 Network Function Configuring
Architecture Flexible
Network
Architecture

WRFD-021304 Mobility RAN Sharing BSC6900 189
03 Control and Function Configuring
Service Mobility
Differentiation Control and
Service
Differentiation

WRFD-021304 Independent RAN Sharing BSC6900 190
04 License Control Function Configuring
Independent
License
Control

WRFD-021304 Independent RAN Sharing BSC6900 None
05 Cell-level FM/ Function
PM/CM

WRFD-021304 Transmission RAN Sharing BSC6900 None
06 Recourse Function
Sharing on Iub/
Iur Interface

WRFD-021305 RAN Sharing RAN Sharing BSC6900 191
Phase 2 Enhanced Configuring
Package RAN Sharing
Phase 2

WRFD-021305 Dedicated Iub RAN Sharing BSC6900 192
01 Transmission Enhanced Configuring
Control Package Dedicated Iub
Transmission
Control

WRFD-021303 IMSI Based IMSI Based BSC6900 193
Handover Handover Configuring
IMSI Based
Handover

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 37
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID Feature Name License License Configuration
Control Item Configured Method
on...

WRFD-021311 MOCN MOCN BSC6900 194
Introduction Introduction Configuring
Package Package MOCN
Introduction
Package

WRFD-021311 Carrier Sharing MOCN BSC6900 195
01 by Operators Introduction Configuring
Package Carrier
Sharing by
Operators

WRFD-021311 Dedicated Node MOCN BSC6900 196
02 B/Cell for Introduction Configuring
Operators Package Dedicated
NodeB/Cell for
Operators

WRFD-021311 MOCN MOCN BSC6900 197
03 Mobility Introduction Configuring
Management Package MOCN
Mobility
Management

WRFD-021311 MOCN Load MOCN BSC6900 198
04 Balance Introduction Configuring
Package MOCN Load
Balance

WRFD-021311 MOCN MOCN BSC6900 None
05 Independent Introduction
Performance Package
Management

WRFD-021311 Routing MOCN BSC6900 199
06 Roaming UEs in Introduction Configuring
Proportion Package Routing
Roaming UEs
in Proportion

WRFD-140223 MOCN Cell MOCN Cell BSC6900 200
Resource Resource Configuring
Demarcatio Demarcation MOCN Cell
(per Cell) Resource
Demarcation

WRFD-021200 HCS Hierarchical BSC6900 201
(Hierarchical Cell Structure Configuring
Cell Structure) HCS
(Hierarchical
Cell Structure)

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 38
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID Feature Name License License Configuration
Control Item Configured Method
on...

WRFD-020111 One Tunnel One Tunnel BSC6900 202
Configuring
One Tunnel

WRFD-050405 Overbooking on ATM IUB BSC6900 203
ATM overbooking Configuring
Transmission Function Overbooking
on ATM
Transmission

WRFD-050105 ATM Switching ATM Switching NodeB 204
Based Hub Based Hub Configuring
Node B NodeB (per ATM
NodeB) Switching-
Based Hub
NodeB

WRFD-050106 AAL2 ATM Switching NodeB 205
Switching Based Hub Configuring
Based Hub NodeB (per AAL2
Node B NodeB) Switching-
Based Hub
NodeB

WRFD-050406 ATM QoS HUB IUB BSC6900 None
Introduction on overbooking
Hub Node B Function
(Overbooking
on Hub Node B
Transmission)

WRFD-050302 Fractional ATM Fractional ATM BSC6900 None
Function on Iub
Interface

WRFD-050402 IP Transmission IP BSC6900 206
Introduction on Transportation Configuring IP
Iub Interface in Iub Interface Transmission
Introduction
on Iub
Interface

WRFD-050411 Fractional IP Fractional IP BSC6900 None
Function on Iub
Interface

WRFD-050403 Hybrid Iub IP IUB Hybrid IP BSC6900 207
Transmission Transportation Configuring
Function Hybrid Iub IP
Transmission

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 39
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID Feature Name License License Configuration
Control Item Configured Method
on...

WRFD-050404 ATM/IP Dual IUB ATM/IP BSC6900 208
Stack Node B Dual Stack Configuring
Transportation ATM/IP Dual
Function Stack NodeB

WRFD-050409 IP Transmission IP BSC6900 209
Introduction on Transportation Configuring IP
Iu Interface in Iu Interface Transmission
Introduction
on Iu Interface

WRFD-050410 IP Transmission IP BSC6900 210
Introduction on Transportation Configuring IP
Iur Interface in Iur Interface Transmission
Introduction
on Iur
Interface

WRFD-050420 FP MUX for IP FP MUX BSC6900 211
Transmission Configuring
FP MUX for IP
Transmission

WRFD-050422 Dynamic Dynamic BSC6900 212
Bandwidth Bandwidth Configuring
Control of Iub Control of Iub Dynamic
IP IP Bandwidth
Control of Iub
IP

WRFD-050408 Overbooking on IP IUB BSC6900 213
IP Transmission overbooking Configuring
Function Overbooking
on IP
Transmission

WRFD-050107 IP routing Based IP Routing NodeB 214
Hub Node B Based Hub Configuring IP
NodeB (per Routing-Based
NodeB) Hub NodeB

WRFD-011500 PDCP Header PDCP Header BSC6900 215
Compression compression Configuring
(RFC2507) PDCP Header
Compression
(RFC2507)

WRFD-012001 RNC offload None None 216
(trial) Configuring
RNC Offload

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 40
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID Feature Name License License Configuration
Control Item Configured Method
on...

WRFD-050412 UDP MUX for UDP MUX for BSC6900 217
Iu-CS Iu-CS Configuring
Transmission Transmission UDP MUX for
Iu-CS
Transmission

WRFD-140207 Iu/Iur Iu/Iur BSC6900 218
Transmission Transmission Configuring
Resource Pool Resource Pool Iu/Iur
in RNC in RNC Transmission
Resource Pool
in RNC

WRFD-140208 Iub Iub BSC6900 219
Transmission Transmission Configuring
Resource Pool Resource Pool Iub
in RNC in RNC Transmission
Resource Pool
in RNC

WRFD-050104 Satellite Satellite BSC6900 220
Transmission Communication Configuring
on Iub Interface in Iub Interface Satellite
Transmission
on Iub
Interface

WRFD-050108 Satellite Satellite BSC6900 221
Transmission Transmission Configuring
on Iu Interface on Iu Interface Satellite
Transmission
on Iu Interface

WRFD-050501 Clock Sync on the number of NodeB 222
Ethernet in NodeBs with IP Configuring
Node B Clock function Clock
enabled Synchronizatio
n on Ethernet
in NodeB

WRFD-050502 Synchronous The Number of NodeB 223
Ethernet NodeBs with Configuring
Ethernet Synchronous
Synchronizatio Ethernet
n Function
Enabled

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 41
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID Feature Name License License Configuration
Control Item Configured Method
on...

WRFD-050425 Ethernet OAM Ethernet NodeB 224
Operation and Configuring
Maintenance Ethernet OAM
Function (per
NodeB)

WRFD-040202 RNC Node RNC Node BSC6900 225
Redundancy Redundancy Configuring
RNC Node
Redundancy

WRFD-040203 RRU RRU Backup NodeB 226
Redundancy (per Sector) Configuring
RRU
Redundancy

WRFD-021302 Iu Flex IU FLEX BSC6900 227
Configuring Iu
Flex

WRFD-021306 Iu Flex Load Enhanced Iu BSC6900 228
Distribution Flex Configuring Iu
Management Flex Load
Distribution
Management

WRFD-010203 Transmit Transmit NodeB 229
Diversity Diversity (per Configuring
NodeB) Transmit
Diversity

WRFD-010209 4-Antenna 4-Antenna NodeB 230
Receive Receive (per Configuring 4-
Diversity NodeB) Antenna
Receive
Diversity

WRFD-021308 Extended Cell None None 231
Coverage up to Configuring
200km Extended Cell
Coverage up to
200km

WRFD-021309 Improved Improved BSC6900 None
Downlink Downlink
Coverage Coverage

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 42
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID Feature Name License License Configuration
Control Item Configured Method
on...

WRFD-020138 HSUPA HSUPA BSC6900 232
Coverage Coverage Configuring
Enhancement at Enhancement at HSUPA
UE power UE power Coverage
limitation limitation Enhancement
at UE Power
Limitation

WRFD-021001 Flexible The number of NodeB 233
frequency NodeBs with Configuring
bandwidth of flexible Flexible
UMTS carrier frequency frequency
separation bandwidth of
function UMTS carrier
enabled

WRFD-010206 High Speed None None 234
Access Configuring
High Speed
Access

WRFD-021350 Independent the number of NodeB 235
Demodulation RRUs with in Configuring
of Signals from independent Independent
Multiple RRUs demodulation of Demodulation
in One Cell signals in one of Signals from
cell Multiple RRUs
in One Cell

WRFD-020302 Inter Frequency Inter frequency BSC6900 236
Hard Handover hard handover Configuring
Based on Inter
Coverage Frequency
Hard
Handover
Based on
Coverage

WRFD-020304 Inter Frequency Inter Frequency BSC6900 237
Hard Handover Hard Handover Configuring
Based on DL Based on DL Inter
QoS QoS Frequency
Hard
Handover
Based on DL
QoS

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 43
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID Feature Name License License Configuration
Control Item Configured Method
on...

WRFD-020605 SRNS SRNS BSC6900 None
Relocation Relocation (UE
Introduction Not Involved)
Package

WRFD-020605 SRNS SRNS BSC6900 238
01 Relocation (UE Relocation (UE Configuring
Not Involved) Not Involved) SRNS
Relocation (UE
Not Involved)

WRFD-020605 SRNS SRNS BSC6900 239
02 Relocation with Relocation with Configuring
Hard Handover Hard Handover SRNS
Relocation
with Hard
Handover

WRFD-020605 SRNS SRNS BSC6900 240
03 Relocation with Relocation with Configuring
Cell/URA Cell/URA SRNS
Update Update Relocation
with Cell/URA
Update

WRFD-020605 Lossless SRNS Lossless SRNS BSC6900 None
04 Relocation Relocation

WRFD-010615 Multiple RAB Multiple RAB BSC6900 241
Package Configuring
Multiple RAB
Package (PS
RAB ≥2)

WRFD-010615 Combination of Multiple RAB BSC6900 242
01 Two PS Configuring
Services Combination
of Two PS
Services

WRFD-010615 Combination of Multiple RAB BSC6900 243
02 One CS Service Configuring
and Two PS Combination
Services of One CS
Service and
Two PS
Services

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 44
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID Feature Name License License Configuration
Control Item Configured Method
on...

WRFD-010615 Combination of Multiple RAB BSC6900 244
03 Three PS Configuring
Services Combination
of Three PS
Services

WRFD-010615 Combination of Multiple RAB BSC6900 245
04 One CS Service Configuring
and Three PS Combination
Services of One CS
Service and
Three PS
Services

WRFD-010615 Combination of Multiple RAB BSC6900 246
05 Four PS Configuring
Services Combination
of Four PS
Services

WRFD-020103 Inter Frequency Inter frequency BSC6900 247
Load Balance load handover Configuring
Inter
Frequency
Load Balance

WRFD-020114 Domain Domain BSC6900 248
Specific Access Specific Access Configuring
Control Control Domain
(DSAC) (DSAC) Specific Access
Control
(DSAC)

WRFD-020110 Multi Multi BSC6900 249
Frequency Band Frequency Band Configuring
Networking Networking Multi
Management Management Frequency
Band
Networking
Management

WRFD-020160 Enhanced Enhancement BSC6900 250
Multiband for Multi Configuring
Management frequency band Enhanced
Networking Multiband
management Management

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 45
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID Feature Name License License Configuration
Control Item Configured Method
on...

WRFD-020400 DRD None None 251
Introduction Configuring
Package DRD
Introduction
Package

WRFD-020400 Intra System Intra System BSC6900 252
01 Direct Retry Direct Retry Configuring
Intra System
Direct Retry

WRFD-020400 Inter System Inter System BSC6900 253
02 Direct Retry Direct Retry Configuring
Inter System
Direct Retry

WRFD-020400 Inter System Inter System BSC6900 254
03 Redirect Redirect Configuring
Inter-System
Redirect

WRFD-020400 Traffic Steering None None 255
04 and Load Configuring
Sharing During Traffic
RAB Setup Steering and
Load Sharing
During RAB
Setup

WRFD-020402 Measurement Measurement BSC6900 256
Based Direct Based Direct Configuring
Retry Retry Function Measurement
Based Direct
Retry

WRFD-020120 Service Steering Service Steering BSC6900 257
and Load in RRC Configuring
Sharing in RRC Connection Service
Connection Setup Steering and
Setup Load Sharing
in RRC
Connection
Setup

WRFD-020124 Uplink Flow Uplink Flow BSC6900 258
Control of User Control of User Configuring
Plane Plane Uplink Flow
Control of User
Plane

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 46
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID Feature Name License License Configuration
Control Item Configured Method
on...

WRFD-020104 Intra Frequency Intra frequency BSC6900 259
Load Balance load balancing Configuring
Intra
Frequency
Load Balance

WRFD-140211 Dynamic Target Dynamic Target BSC6900 260
RoT ROT Configuring
Adjustment Adjustment(per Dynamic
Cell) Target ROT
Adjustment

WRFD-140212 CE CE overbooking NodeB 261
Overbooking (Per NodeB) Configuring
CE
Overbooking

WRFD-140213 Intelligent Intelligent BSC6900 262
Access Class Access Class Configuring
Control Control Intelligent
Access Class
Control

WRFD-140215 Dynamic Dynamic BSC6900 263
Configuration Configuration Configuring
of HSDPA CQI of HSDPA CQI Dynamic
Feedback Feedback Configuration
Period Period (per Cell) of HSDPA CQI
Feedback
Period

WRFD-140216 Load-based Load-based BSC6900 264
Uplink Target Uplink Target Configuring
BLER BLER Load-based
Configuration Configuration Uplink Target
(per Cell) BLER
Configuration

WRFD-140217 Inter-Frequency Inter-Frequency BSC6900 265
Load Balancing Load Balancing Configuring
Based on Based on Inter-
Configurable Configurable Frequency
Load Threshold Load Threshold Load
(per Cell) Balancing
Based on
Configurable
Load
Threshold

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 47
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID Feature Name License License Configuration
Control Item Configured Method
on...

WRFD-070004 Load Based Handover BSC6900 266
GSM and Based on Load Configuring
UMTS on Iur-g Load Based
Handover GSM and
Enhancement UMTS
Based on Iur-g Handover
Enhancement
Based on Iur-g

WRFD-070005 NACC NACC BSC6900 267
Procedure Procedure Configuring
Optimization Optimization NACC
Based on Iur-g Based on Iur-g (Network
Assisted Cell
Change)
Procedure
Optimization
Based on Iur-g

WRFD-070006 GSM and BSC Load BSC6900 268
UMTS Load Balancing Configuring
Balancing Based on Iur-g GSM and
Based on Iur-g UMTS Load
Balancing
Based on Iur-g

WRFD-070007 GSM and BSC Service BSC6900 269
UMTS Traffic Distribution Configuring
Steering Based Based on Iur-g GSM and
on Iur-g UMTS Traffic
Steering Based
on Iur-g

WRFD-020303 Inter-RAT Coverage Based BSC6900 270
Handover Inter-RAT Configuring
Based on Handover Inter-RAT
Coverage Between UMTS Handover
and GSM/ Based on
GPRS Coverage

WRFD-020309 Inter-RAT Inter-RAT BSC6900 271
Handover Handover Configuring
Based on DL Based on DL Inter-RAT
QoS QoS Handover
Based on DL
QoS

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 48
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID Feature Name License License Configuration
Control Item Configured Method
on...

WRFD-020307 Video Video BSC6900 272
Telephony Telephony Configuring
Fallback to Fallback to Video
Speech (AMR) Speech (AMR) Telephony
for Inter-RAT for Inter-RAT Fallback to
HO HO Speech (AMR)
for Inter-RAT
HO

WRFD-020308 Inter-RAT None BSC6900 273
Handover Phase Configuring
2 Inter-RAT
Handover
Phase 2

WRFD-020308 NACC NACC BSC6900 274
01 (Network (Network Configuring
Assisted Cell Assisted Cell NACC
Change) Change) (Network
Assisted Cell
Change)

WRFD-020308 PS Handover PS Handover BSC6900 275
02 Between UMTS Between UMTS Configuring
and GPRS and GPRS PS Handover
between
UMTS and
GPRS

WRFD-020305 Inter-RAT Inter system BSC6900 276
Handover Service Configuring
Based on Handover Inter-RAT
Service Handover
Based on
Service

WRFD-020306 Inter-RAT Inter system BSC6900 277
Handover Load Handover Configuring
Based on Load Inter-RAT
Handover
Based on Load

WRFD-020401 Inter-RAT Inter System BSC6900 278
Redirection Redirect Based Configuring
Based on on Distance Inter-RAT
Distance Redirection
Based on
Distance

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 49
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID Feature Name License License Configuration
Control Item Configured Method
on...

WRFD-020310 3G/2G 3G/2G BSC6900 279
Common Load Common Load Configuring
Management Management 3G/2G
Common Load
Management

WRFD-020126 Mobility Mobility BSC6900 280
Between UMTS Between UMTS Configuring
and LTE Phase and LTE Phase Mobility
1 1 Between
UMTS and
LTE Phase 1

WRFD-020129 Service-Based Service-Based BSC6900 281
PS Service PS Service Configuring
Redirection Redirection Service-Based
from UMTS to from UMTS to PS Service
LTE LTE Redirection
from UMTS to
LTE

WRFD-140218 Service-Based PS Service BSC6900 282
PS Handover Redirection Configuring
from UMTS to from UMTS to Service-Based
LTE LTE PS Handover
from UMTS to
LTE

WRFD-140224 Fast CS Fast CS BSC6900 283
Fallback Based Fallback Based Configuring
on RIM on RIM Fast CS
Fallback Based
on RIM

WRFD-010505 Queuing and Queuing and BSC6900 284
Pre-Emption Pre-emption Configuring
Queuing and
Preemption

WRFD-021103 Access Class Access Class BSC6900 285
Restriction Restriction Configuring
when SPU Access Class
overload Restriction

WRFD-050424 Traffic Priority Traffic Priority BSC6900 286
Mapping onto Mapping on Configuring
Transmission Transport Traffic
Resources Priority
Mapping onto
Transmission
Resources

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 50
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID Feature Name License License Configuration
Control Item Configured Method
on...

WRFD-020806 Differentiated Differentiated BSC6900 287
Service Based Service Based Configuring
on SPI Weight on SPI Weight Differentiated
Service Based
on SPI Weight

WRFD-020131 Optimization of Optimization of BSC6900 288
R99 and R99 and Configuring
HSUPA Users HSUPA Users Optimization
Fairness Fairness of R99 and
HSUPA Users
Fairness

WRFD-011502 Active Queue Active Queue BSC6900 289
Management Management Configuring
(AQM) (AQM) Active Queue
Management
(AQM)

WRFD-020128 Quality Quality BSC6900 290
Improvement Improvement Configuring
for Subscribed for Subscribed Quality
Service Service Improvement
for Subscribed
Service

WRFD-020123 TCP TCP BSC6900 291
Accelerator Accelerator Configuring
TCP
Accelerator

WRFD-010507 Rate RAB BSC6900 292
Negotiation at Downsizing at Configuring
Admission Admission Rate
Control Control Negotiation at
Admission
Control

WRFD-020130 Videophone Videophone BSC6900 293
Service Service Configuring
Restriction Restriction Videophone
Service
Restriction

WRFD-020135 Intelligent Inter- Intelligent Inter- BSC6900 294
Carrier UE Carrier UE Configuring
Layered Layered Intelligent
Management Management Inter-Carrier
(per Cell) UE Layered
Management

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 51
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID Feature Name License License Configuration
Control Item Configured Method
on...

WRFD-140219 Micro NodeB Micro NodeB NodeB 295
Self-Planning Self-Planning Configuring
(Per Cell) Micro NodeB
Self-Planning

WRFD-140209 NodeB NodeB NodeB 296
Integrated integrated IPSec Configuring
IPSec (Per NodeB) NodeB
Integrated
IPSec

WRFD-140210 NodeB PKI NodeB PKI NodeB 297
Support support(Per Configuring
NodeB) NodeB PKI
Support

WRFD-140220 Intelligent Intelligent NodeB 298
Battery Battery Configuring
Management Management Intelligent
(Per NodeB) Battery
Management

MRFD-221801 Multi-mode GSM and NodeB 299
Dynamic Power UMTS Configuring
Sharing Dynamic Power Multi-mode
(UMTS) Sharing Dynamic
Power Sharing
(UMTS)

MRFD-221802 GSM and GSM and NodeB 300
UMTS UMTS Configuring
Dynamic Dynamic GSM and
Spectrum Spectrum UMTS
Sharing Sharing Dynamic
(UMTS) (UMTS)(Per Spectrum
NodeB) Sharing
(UMTS)

MRFD-221501 IP-Based Multi- None None 301
mode Co- Configuring
Transmission IP-Based
on BS side Multi-Mode
(NodeB) Co-
Transmission
on Base Station
Side (NodeB)

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 52
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID Feature Name License License Configuration
Control Item Configured Method
on...

MRFD-221504 TDM-Based Multi Mode NodeB 302
Multi-mode Co- BTS Configuring
Transmission Transmission TDM-Based
via Backplane Sharing Multi-mode
on BS side Co-
(NodeB) Transmission
via Backplane
on BS side
(NodeB)

MRFD-221505 Bandwidth the number of NodeB None
sharing of NodeBs with
MBTS Multi- Bandwidth
mode Co- sharing of
Transmission MBTS Multi-
(NodeB) mode Co-
Transmission
function
enabled

MRFD-221601 Multi-mode BS None None 303
Common Configuring
Reference Multi-Mode
Clock(NodeB) BS Common
Reference
Clock (NodeB)

MRFD-221602 Multi-mode BS Co-IPSec NodeB 304 Multi-
Common IPSec Between mode BS
(UMTS) GSM,UMTS Common
and LTE IPSec(UMTS)
(UMTS)

MRFD-221703 2.0MHz Central 2.0MHz Central NodeB 305
Frequency point Frequency point Configuring
separation separation 2.0MHz
between GSM between GSM Central
and UMTS and UMTS Frequency
mode(UMTS) mode(UMTS) point
(Per NodeB) separation
between GSM
and UMTS
mode(UMTS)

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 53
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID Feature Name License License Configuration
Control Item Configured Method
on...

MRFD-221803 Dynamic MA Dynamic MA NodeB 306
for GU for GU Configuring
Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic MA
Spectrum Spectrum for GU
Sharing Sharing Dynamic
(UMTS) (UMTS) Spectrum
Sharing
(UMTS)

MRFD-221804 GSM Power GSM Power NodeB 307
Control on Control on Configuring
Interference Interference GSM Power
Frequency for Frequency for Control on
GU Small GU Small Interface
Frequency gap Frequency gap Frequency for
(UMTS) (UMTS) GU Small
Frequency
Gap (UMTS)

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 54
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 3 Overview of Configurations on the CME

3 Overview of Configurations on the CME

About This Chapter

This section provides an overview of the configuration on the CME. The CME is a configuration
tool on GUIs assisting you to effectively configure the data about wireless NE features. You can
reconfigure configuration parameters by using the configuration expresses provided by the CME
to activate or deactivate specified features.

Feature activation and deactivation are mainly performed on the configuration expresses on the
CME. This part introduces the operations on the configuration expresses and you need to
understand the operations before activating or deactivating features.
3.1 Introduction to Configuration Methods
This section describes how to configure the features of one or multiple NEs at a time by using
the CME.
3.2 Configuring Device Data
This section describes how to configure device data on the device panel.
3.3 Introduction to the Configuration Express for UMTS Global Parameters
This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration
express for UMTS global parameters.
3.4 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Iub Interfaces
This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration
express for Iub interfaces.
3.5 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Iu-CS Interfaces
This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration
express for Iu-CS interfaces.
3.6 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Iu-PS Interfaces
This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration
express for Iu-PS interfaces.
3.7 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Iur Interfaces
This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration
express for Iur interfaces.
3.8 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Iu-BC Interfaces

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 55
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 3 Overview of Configurations on the CME

This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration
express for Iu-BC interfaces.
3.9 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Iu-PC Interfaces
This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration
express for Iu-PC interfaces.
3.10 Introduction to the Configuration Express for the (U)Iur-g Interface
This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration
express for the (U)Iur-g interface.
3.11 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Gi Interfaces
This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration
express for Gi interfaces.
3.12 Introduction to the Configuration Express for UMTS Global Radio Parameters
This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration
express for UMTS global radio parameters.
3.13 Introduction to the Configuration Express for UMTS Cells
This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration
express for UMTS cells.
3.14 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Neighboring UMTS Cells
This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration
express for neighboring UMTS cells.
3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches
This section describes how to change values of specified parameters for specified RNCs in
batches.
3.16 Modifying Logical NodeB Parameters in Batches
This section describes how to change values of specified parameters for specified logical NodeBs
in batches.
3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches
This section describes how to modify the data about multiple physical NodeBs in batches.
3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches
This section describes how to change values of specified parameters for specified UMTS cells
in batches.
3.19 Modifying RNC External Cell Parameters in Batches
This section describes how to change values of specified parameters for specified RNC external
cells in batches.
3.20 Modifying UMTS Channel Parameters in Batches
This section describes how to change values of specified parameters for specified UMTS
channels in batches.
3.21 Introduction to the Object Group Configuration
This section describes how to search for external cells in an object group and configure them.

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 56
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 3 Overview of Configurations on the CME

3.1 Introduction to Configuration Methods
This section describes how to configure the features of one or multiple NEs at a time by using
the CME.

Introduction to Configuration Methods
The CME enables you to configure NE features in both single and batch modes. For details, see
Table 3-1.

Table 3-1 Introduction to configuration methods

Config Characteristics
uratio
n
Metho
d

Single Configures parameters for only one object (for example, a base station or a cell)
configu each time.
ration The CME provides configuration expresses and device panels for various types of
data to configure one object.
l The CME displays a navigation tree in the left pane and a table in the right pane.
The navigation tree shows managed objects (MOs) while the table shows the
parameters of the MOs and parameter values. After selecting an MO in the
navigation tree, you can configure its values in the table.
l The device panel is displayed on a GUI, allowing you to directly configure data
for devices such as cabinet, subrack, and board.

Batch Applies the configuration data about an object (for example, a base station or a
modific cell) to other objects.
ation NOTE
center This method is applicable to scenarios where the parameters for multiple objects need to be
configured the same.
For example, after setting the VAMOSSWITCH parameter for cell 1 to ON, you
can use the batch modification function to set the VAMOSSWITCH parameters
for other specified cells to ON at a time. By doing this, you do not need to configure
the parameters for these cells one by one.

Introduction to Data Configuration Procedures
Before using the CME to configure features, you need to be familiar with basic operations on
the CME. For details, see CME Guidelines in the M2000 Help.
The procedures for using the CME to activate or deactivate features are as follows:
1. Synchronize the data in the current data area with the data on the live network.
2. Create a planned data area and copy the data in the current data area to the planned data
area for configuration.

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 57
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 3 Overview of Configurations on the CME

3. Modify the parameters according to the planned data.
4. After configuring data, export the data as scripts.
5. Deliver the exported scripts to the live network for the configuration data to take effect on
NEs.

3.2 Configuring Device Data
This section describes how to configure device data on the device panel.
Right-click a BSC to be configured in the Main View navigation tree in the left pane, and choose
Device Panel from the shortcut menu. The NE device panel is displayed, as shown in Figure
3-1.

Figure 3-1 Device panel

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 58
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 3 Overview of Configurations on the CME

Operatio Operation description
n

Add l In the upper-right part of the device panel window, click Add Cabinet.
l Right-click an empty subrack on the device panel window, and choose Add
Subrack from the shortcut menu.
l Right-click the empty slots on the panels of each subrack, and choose the
required board types from the shortcut menu.

Delete l Right-click a cabinet to be deleted, and choose Delete Cabinet from the
shortcut menu.
l Right-click a subrack to be deleted, and choose Delete Subrack from the
shortcut menu.
l Right-click a board to be deleted, and choose Delete Board from the shortcut
menu.

View or Right-click a device to be viewed or modified, and choose Property to view or
modify modify the device.

3.3 Introduction to the Configuration Express for UMTS
Global Parameters
This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration
express for UMTS global parameters.
The configuration express provides a window for configuring RNC-level objects, as shown in
Figure 3-2.

Figure 3-2 Configuration express for UMTS global parameters

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 59
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 3 Overview of Configurations on the CME

Configuration Guidance
1. In area 1, choose The NE to be configured > UMTS > RNC in the Transport navigation
tree. The express window for configuring UMTS global parameters is displayed.
2. In area 2, select an object to be configured in the Properties navigation tree. The
configuration parameters of the object are displayed in area 3.
TIP

In area 2, you can also type the parameters to be configured on the tab pages Parameter List and
Search. This helps to quickly locate parameters.
3. In area 3, configure the data.

3.4 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Iub
Interfaces
This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration
express for Iub interfaces.
The configuration express provides a window for configuring interface-level objects, as shown
in Figure 3-3.

Figure 3-3 Configuration express for Iub interfaces

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 60
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 3 Overview of Configurations on the CME

Configuration Guidance
1. In area 1, choose The NE to be configured > UMTS > Iub in the Transport navigation
tree. The express window for configuring Iub interfaces is displayed.
2. In area 2, select a NodeB to be configured.
3. In area 3, select an object to be configured in the navigation tree Properties. The
configuration parameters of the object are displayed in area 4.
TIP

In area 3, you can also type the parameters to be configured on the tab pages Parameter List and
Search. This helps to quickly locate parameters.
4. In area 4, configure the parameters.

3.5 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Iu-CS
Interfaces
This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration
express for Iu-CS interfaces.

The configuration express provides a window for configuring interface-level objects, as shown
in Figure 3-4.

Figure 3-4 Configuration express for Iu-CS interfaces

Configuration Guidance
1. In area 1, choose The NE to be configured > UMTS > Iu-CS in the Transport navigation
tree. The express window for configuring Iu-CS interfaces is displayed.

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 61
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 3 Overview of Configurations on the CME

2. In area 2, select an object to be configured in the Properties navigation tree. The
configuration parameters of the object are displayed in area 3.
TIP

In area 2, you can also type the parameters to be configured on the tab pages Parameter List and
Search. This helps to quickly locate parameters.
3. In area 3, configure the data.

3.6 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Iu-PS
Interfaces
This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration
express for Iu-PS interfaces.

The configuration express provides a window for configuring interface-level objects, as shown
in Figure 3-5.

Figure 3-5 Configuration express for Iu-PS interfaces

Configuration Guidance
1. In area 1, choose The NE to be configured > UMTS > Iu-PS in the Transport navigation
tree. The express window for configuring Iu-PS interfaces is displayed.
2. In area 2, select an object to be configured in the Properties navigation tree. The
configuration parameters of the object are displayed in area 3.
TIP

In area 2, you can also type the parameters to be configured on the tab pages Parameter List and
Search. This helps to quickly locate parameters.

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 62
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 3 Overview of Configurations on the CME

3. In area 3, configure the data.

3.7 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Iur
Interfaces
This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration
express for Iur interfaces.
The configuration express provides a window for configuring interface-level objects, as shown
in Figure 3-6.

Figure 3-6 Configuration express for Iur interfaces

Configuration Guidance
1. In area 1, choose The NE to be configured > UMTS > Iur in the Transport navigation
tree. The express window for configuring Iur interfaces is displayed.
2. In area 2, select an object to be configured in the Properties navigation tree. The
configuration parameters of the object are displayed in area 3.
TIP

In area 2, you can also type the parameters to be configured on the tab pages Parameter List and
Search. This helps to quickly locate parameters.
3. In area 3, configure the data.

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 63
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 3 Overview of Configurations on the CME

3.8 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Iu-BC
Interfaces
This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration
express for Iu-BC interfaces.
The configuration express provides a window for configuring interface-level objects, as shown
in Figure 3-7.

Figure 3-7 Configuration express for Iu-BC interfaces

Configuration Guidance
1. In area 1, choose The NE to be configured > UMTS > Iu-BC in the Transport navigation
tree. The express window for configuring Iu-BC interfaces is displayed.
2. In area 2, select an object to be configured in the Properties navigation tree. The
configuration parameters of the object are displayed in area 3.
TIP

In area 2, you can also type the parameters to be configured on the tab pages Parameter List and
Search. This helps to quickly locate parameters.
3. In area 3, configure the data.

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 64
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 3 Overview of Configurations on the CME

3.9 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Iu-PC
Interfaces
This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration
express for Iu-PC interfaces.
The configuration express provides a window for configuring interface-level objects, as shown
in Figure 3-8.

Figure 3-8 Configuration express for Iu-PC interfaces

Configuration Guidance
1. In area 1, choose The NE to be configured > UMTS > Iu-PC in the Transport navigation
tree. The express window for configuring Iu-PC interfaces is displayed.
2. In area 2, select an object to be configured in the Properties navigation tree. The
configuration parameters of the object are displayed in area 3.
TIP

In area 2, you can also type the parameters to be configured on the tab pages Parameter List and
Search. This helps to quickly locate parameters.
3. In area 3, configure the data.

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 65
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 3 Overview of Configurations on the CME

3.10 Introduction to the Configuration Express for the (U)
Iur-g Interface
This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration
express for the (U)Iur-g interface.
The configuration express provides a window for configuring interface-level objects, as shown
in Figure 3-9.

Figure 3-9 Configuration express for the (U)Iur-g interface

Configuration Guidance
1. In area 1, choose The NE to be configured > UMTS > Iur-g in the Transport navigation
tree. The configuration express window for configuring (U)Iur-g interfaces is displayed.
2. In area 2, select an object to be configured in the Properties navigation tree. The
configuration parameters of the object are displayed in area 3.
TIP

In area 2, you can also type the parameters to be configured on the tab pages Parameter List and
Search. This helps to quickly locate parameters.
3. In area 3, configure the data.

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 66
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 3 Overview of Configurations on the CME

3.11 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Gi
Interfaces
This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration
express for Gi interfaces.
The configuration express provides a window for configuring interface-level objects, as shown
in Figure 3-10.

Figure 3-10 Configuration express for Gi interfaces

Configuration Guidance
1. In area 1, choose The NE to be configured > UMTS > Gi in the Transport navigation
tree. The express window for configuring Gi interfaces is displayed.
2. In area 2, select an object to be configured in the Properties navigation tree. The
configuration parameters of the object are displayed in area 3.
TIP

In area 2, you can also type the parameters to be configured on the tab pages Parameter List and
Search. This helps to quickly locate parameters.
3. In area 3, configure the data.

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 67
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 3 Overview of Configurations on the CME

3.12 Introduction to the Configuration Express for UMTS
Global Radio Parameters
This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration
express for UMTS global radio parameters.
The configuration express provides a window for configuring BSC-level objects, as shown in
Figure 3-11.

Figure 3-11 Configuration express for UMTS global radio parameters

Configuration Guidance
1. In area 1, right-click a UMTS NE to be configured in the Main View navigation tree, and
choose UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express from the shortcut menu. The express
window for configuring UMTS global radio parameters is displayed.
2. In area 2, select an object to be configured in the Properties navigation tree. The
configuration parameters of the object are displayed in area 3.
TIP

In area 2, you can also type the parameters to be configured on the tab pages Parameter List and
Search. This helps to quickly locate parameters.
3. In area 3, configure the data.

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 68
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 3 Overview of Configurations on the CME

3.13 Introduction to the Configuration Express for UMTS
Cells
This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration
express for UMTS cells.
The configuration express provides a window for configuring cell-level objects, as shown in
Figure 3-12.

Figure 3-12 Configuration express for UMTS cells

Configuration Guidance
1. In area 1, right-click a UMTS cell in the Main View navigation tree, and choose UMTS
Cell Configuration Express from the shortcut menu. The express window for configuring
UMTS cells is displayed.
2. (Optional)In area 2, select a cell to be configured.
3. In area 3, select an object to be configured in the navigation tree Properties. The
configuration parameters of the object are displayed in area 4.
TIP

In area 3, you can also type the parameters to be configured on the tab pages Parameter List and
Search. This helps to quickly locate parameters.
4. In area 4, configure the data.

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 69
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 3 Overview of Configurations on the CME

3.14 Introduction to the Configuration Express for
Neighboring UMTS Cells
This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration
express for neighboring UMTS cells.
The configuration express provides a window for cell-level objects, as shown in Figure 3-13.

Figure 3-13 Configuration express for neighboring UMTS cells

Configuration Guidance
1. In area 1, right-click a UMTS cell in the Main View navigation tree, and then choose
UMTS Neighboring Cell Configuration Express. The express window for configuring
neighboring UMTS cells is displayed.
2. (Optional)Select a source cell in area 2.
3. Select the object to be configured in the Properties navigation tree in area 3.
4. Select the corresponding Template and NE in area 4. Select one or multiple required
neighboring cells, and click Add. The information about the neighboring cell is displayed
in area 5.
5. (Optional) Right-click the neighboring cell selected in area 5, and choose Modify NCell
Relationship from the shortcut menu to modify the information about the neighboring cell.

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 70
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 3 Overview of Configurations on the CME

3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches
This section describes how to change values of specified parameters for specified RNCs in
batches.

Procedure

Step 1 In the configuration window, select a data record and click . The dialog box for selecting
objects is displayed.

Step 2 Select RNCs to be modified in batches.

Step 3 Click Next. The dialog box for selecting parameters is displayed.

Step 4 Select parameters to be modified in batches.
NOTE

The dialog box displays only names and values of the parameters that can be changed in batches. You can
change parameter values as required.
The CME uses values of selected parameters as references to change parameter values of other specified
RNCs in batches.

Step 5 Click Next. The CME starts batch modification. After modification, the CME displays the
results.

Step 6 Click Finish.

----End

3.16 Modifying Logical NodeB Parameters in Batches
This section describes how to change values of specified parameters for specified logical NodeBs
in batches.

Procedure

Step 1 In the configuration window, select a data record and click . The dialog box for selecting
objects is displayed.

Step 2 Click Add. Select the mode for adding NodeBs. For details, see Introduction to the Object
Selection Modes.

Step 3 Click Next. The dialog box for selecting parameters is displayed.

Step 4 Select parameters to be modified in batches.
NOTE

The dialog box displays only names and values of the parameters that can be changed in batches. You can
change parameter values as required.
The CME uses values of selected parameters as references to change parameter values of other specified
NodeBs in batches.

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 71
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 3 Overview of Configurations on the CME

Step 5 Click Next. The CME starts batch modification. After modification, the CME displays the
results.

Step 6 Click Finish.

----End

3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches
This section describes how to modify the data about multiple physical NodeBs in batches.

Procedure
Step 1 In the Main View navigation tree in the left pane of the planned data area, right-click a UMTS
NE, and choose CM Express > UMTS Application > Physical NodeB Management > Modify
Physical NodeB Parameters in Bulk (M2000 Client Mode) or UMTS Application > Physical
NodeB Management > Modify Physical NodeB Parameters in Bulk (CME Client Mode)
from the menu bar. The Modify Physical NodeB Parameters in Bulk dialog box is displayed.

Step 2 Select an object to be modified and click Next. The data about the object for all physical NodeBs
in the planned data area is displayed in the lower part of the window. Select one or multiple
records, and click .

Step 3 Click Next, and modify the parameters value of the selected object.

Step 4 Click Finish. The CME starts to modify the parameter value of the selected object.

Step 5 After the modification is complete, click Finish to exit the wizard.

After the automatic modification is complete, the CME displays a message, indicating whether
the modification is successful. If the modification fails, you need to locate and solve the problem
based on the displayed information.

----End

3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches
This section describes how to change values of specified parameters for specified UMTS cells
in batches.

Procedure

Step 1 In the configuration window, select a data record and click . The dialog box for selecting
objects is displayed.

Step 2 Select cells to be modified in batches.

If you need to... Then...

Modify all cells under an NE in batches Select BY NE from the Select mode drop-down
list and select NEs in the NE list.

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 72
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 3 Overview of Configurations on the CME

If you need to... Then...

Modify specified cells under an NE in Select BY Cell from the Select mode drop-down
batches list, click Add, and select the mode for adding
cells based on site requirements. For details, see
Introduction to the Object Selection Modes.

Step 3 Click Next. The dialog box for selecting parameters is displayed.
Step 4 Select parameters to be modified in batches.
NOTE

The dialog box displays only names and values of the parameters that can be changed in batches. You can
change parameter values as required.
The CME uses values of selected parameters as references to change parameter values of other specified
cells in batches.

Step 5 Click Next. The CME starts batch modification. After modification, the CME displays the
results.
Step 6 Click Finish.

----End

3.19 Modifying RNC External Cell Parameters in Batches
This section describes how to change values of specified parameters for specified RNC external
cells in batches.

Procedure

Step 1 In the configuration window, select a data record and click . The dialog box for selecting
objects is displayed.
Step 2 Select RNC external cells to be modified in batches.

If you need to... Then...

Modify all RNC external cells under an Select BY NE from the Select mode drop-down
NE in batches list and select NEs in the NE list.

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 73
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 3 Overview of Configurations on the CME

If you need to... Then...

Modify specified RNC external cells The following uses RNC 2G external cell as an
under an NE in batches example.
Select BY GSMCELL from the Select mode
drop-down list, click Add, and select the mode for
adding RNC external cells based on site
requirements. For details, see Introduction to the
Object Selection Modes.
NOTE
l If you want to modify RNC 3G external cells, the
Select mode drop-down list displays BY
NRNCCELL.
l If you want to modify RNC LTE external cells, the
Select mode drop-down list displays By
LTECELL.

Step 3 Click Next. The dialog box for selecting parameters is displayed.

Step 4 Select parameters to be modified in batches.
NOTE

The dialog box displays only names and values of the parameters that can be changed in batches. You can
change parameter values as required.
The CME uses values of selected parameters as references to change parameter values of other specified
RNC external cells in batches.

Step 5 Click Next. The CME starts batch modification. After modification, the CME displays the
results.

Step 6 Click Finish.

----End

3.20 Modifying UMTS Channel Parameters in Batches
This section describes how to change values of specified parameters for specified UMTS
channels in batches.

Procedure

Step 1 In the configuration window, select a data record and click . The dialog box for selecting
objects is displayed.

Step 2 Select cells to be modified in batches.

If you need to... Then...

Modify all cells under an NE in batches Select BY NE from the Select mode drop-down
list and select NEs in the NE list.

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 74
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 3 Overview of Configurations on the CME

If you need to... Then...

Modify specified cells under an NE in Select BY Cell from the Select mode drop-down
batches list, click Add, and select the mode for adding
cells based on site requirements. For details, see
Introduction to the Object Selection Modes.

Step 3 Click Next. The dialog box for selecting parameters is displayed.

Step 4 Select parameters to be modified in batches.
NOTE

The dialog box displays only names and values of the parameters that can be changed in batches. You can
change parameter values as required.
The CME uses values of selected parameters as references to change parameter values of other specified
cells in batches.

Step 5 Click Next. The CME starts batch modification. After modification, the CME displays the
results.

Step 6 Click Finish.

----End

3.21 Introduction to the Object Group Configuration
This section describes how to search for external cells in an object group and configure them.

Figure 3-14 shows the window for configuring external cells.

Figure 3-14 Window for configuring external cells

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 75
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 3 Overview of Configurations on the CME

Configuration Guidance
1. In area 1, select the BSC to be configured in the Main View navigation tree.
2. In area 2, select the external cell to be configured in the Object Group navigation tree.
TIP

In area 2, you can also type the parameters to be set on the Search tab page. This helps quickly locate
parameters.
3. In area 3, configure the data.

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 76
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 4 Activating the UMTS License

4 Activating the UMTS License

About This Chapter

In the case of certain UMTS features, a license control item is defined for each feature. The
license control item of a feature must be activated before the configuration and use of the feature.
The license control items related to the RNC can be activated on the M2000 or RNC LMT,
whereas those related to the NodeB can be activated only on the M2000.

4.1 Activating the BSC6900 License
This section describes how to activate the BSC6900 license.
4.2 Allocating a license to Telecom Operators
When multiple telecom operators share one RAN, they can also share the resources defined in
a NodeB license after you allocate the license to the telecom operators.
4.3 Allocating a License to NodeBs
After uploading a NodeB license file of a RAN to the M2000 server, you need to allocate the
license to the NodeBs in the RAN. Then you can activate the license for it to take effect.

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 77
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 4 Activating the UMTS License

4.1 Activating the BSC6900 License
This section describes how to activate the BSC6900 license.

Prerequisites
l The LMT is started and you have logged in to the BSC6900.
l The BSC6900 is in service.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the BSC6900 MML command LST ESN and record the Equipment Serial Number (ESN)
of the BSC.

Step 2 Run the BSC6900 MML command DLD LICENSE to download the license file from the FTP
server to the \ftp\license directory of the main area directory of the OMU.

Step 3 Run the LST LICENSE command and enter the filename of the license to be activated to query
the file information.

If... Then...

The file information complies with the information of Go to Step 4.
the file that you apply for,

The file information does not comply with the Exit the task and contact Huawei.
information of the file that you apply for,

Step 4 Run the LST CFGMODE command to query the BSC6900 configuration status. If the
BSC6900 is ineffective, run the SET CFGDATAEFFECTIVE command to switch it to the
effective state.

Step 5 Run the ACT LICENSE command to activate the license.

Step 6 If the primary operator and secondary operators exist, run the SET LICENSE command to
active the license for the primary operator first and then for secondary operators. If multiple
secondary operators exist, run the SET LICENSE command repeatedly.

Step 7 Run the BSC6900 MML command CMP LICENSE to check whether the running license on
the host is consistent with that on the OMU.

If... Then...

If the running license on the host is consistent with that End the task or go to Step 8.
on the OMU

If the running license on the host is inconsistent with End the task and contact Huawei.
that on the OMU

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 78
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 4 Activating the UMTS License

Step 8 In the case of high traffic, run the SET LICENSECTRL command to enable the license control
function of the BSC6900 to enter the grace protection period.

----End

4.2 Allocating a license to Telecom Operators
When multiple telecom operators share one RAN, they can also share the resources defined in
a NodeB license after you allocate the license to the telecom operators.

Prerequisites
You have uploaded a valid NodeB license file to the M2000 server.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose License > NE License Management > NodeB License Management. The NodeB
License Management window is displayed.

Step 2 From the navigation tree in the left pane of the NodeB License Management window, select
an RNC node whose NodeB license file is already uploaded to the M2000 server.

Step 3 Right-click a license, and then choose License Distributed to Operator from the shortcut menu.

Step 4 In the License Distributed to Operator window, set available functions and resources for each
telecom operator, and then click OK.

----End

4.3 Allocating a License to NodeBs
After uploading a NodeB license file of a RAN to the M2000 server, you need to allocate the
license to the NodeBs in the RAN. Then you can activate the license for it to take effect.

Prerequisites
You have uploaded a valid NodeB license file to the M2000 server.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose License > NE License Management > NodeB License Management. The NodeB
License Management window is displayed.

Step 2 From the navigation tree in the left pane of the NodeB License Management window, select
an RNC node whose NodeB license file is already uploaded to the M2000 server.

Step 3 Optional: In the lower part of the license information area, click the tab of a telecom operator.

If a RAN is shared by multiple telecom operators, you can allocate a NodeB license to them by
referring to 4.2 Allocating a license to Telecom Operators.

The license allocation information about all the NodeBs related to the telecom operator is
displayed in a list.

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 79
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 4 Activating the UMTS License

Step 4 Double-click a NodeB to which you need to allocate the license, or right-click the NodeB and
choose Modify from the shortcut menu. Then, set available resources and functions for the
NodeB.
NOTE

l You can set a function control item to either 0 or 1. 0 indicates that the function is not enabled while
1 indicates that the function is enabled.
l You can hold down Ctrl or Shift to select multiple NodeBs at a time. Right-click the selected NodeBs,
and then choose Modify from the shortcut menu to set a control item value to all the selected NodeBs.
l If a control item is unavailable in the Modify dialog box, it indicates that the control item is not
supported by NodeBs. To view the values indicating that the control item is not supported by NodeBs,
click the status description on the right in the Modify dialog box. For descriptions of the values, see
Parameter Description in the dialog box.
l When setting a certain control item, you can click Clear to clear the preset values in the column of the
control item.
l You can click Settings in the Modify dialog box to add or delete one or multiple control items to be
set.

Step 5 Perform operations according to license allocation policies.
After a NodeB license file is uploaded to the M2000, you can allocate the license to NodeBs
immediately. You can also create a scheduled task for delivering preset license allocation
information to NodeBs at a certain non-busy hour. You can allocate an inactive license to
NodeBs. After an inactive license is allocated to NodeBs, it is activated automatically.

If you want to ... Then ...

Allocate a license to NodeBs immediately 1. In the license information area, right-click a
license record, and then choose Distribute
from the shortcut menu.
2. In the displayed Message dialog box, click
Yes.
You can click Details to view the license
allocate information.

Deliver license allocation information to 1. In the license information area, right-click a
NodeBs on a scheduled basis license record, and then chooseLicense
Distribute Task from the shortcut menu.
Alternatively, select the license record, and

then click . The Task Management
window is displayed.
2. Set the parameters of the scheduled task for
delivering license allocation information.

----End

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 80
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0 5 Configuring 3.4/6.8/13.6/27.2Kbps RRC Connection and
Feature Activation Guide Radio Access Bearer Establishment and Release

5 Configuring 3.4/6.8/13.6/27.2Kbps RRC
Connection and Radio Access Bearer
Establishment and Release

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010510
3.4/6.8/13.6/27.2Kbps RRC Connection and Radio Access Bearer Establishment and Release.

Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
– This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
– This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
– This feature is not under license control.

Context
This feature enables RRC connection establishment and release and RAB assignment for
services of different rates, so as to meet different QoS requirements. This feature is fundamental
to service provision.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URRCESTCAUSE (CME single
configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Channel Type and
Rate of RRC Setup Cause Configuration > RRC Connection Establish Channel
Type And Bit Rate; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC
Parameters in Batches) to set the channel type and bit rate corresponding to a specific
RRC connection establishment cause.
NOTE

Do not set Channel type for RRC establishment to FACH. Set Switch for RRC established
on E_FACH to OFF.
l Verification Procedure

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 81
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0 5 Configuring 3.4/6.8/13.6/27.2Kbps RRC Connection and
Feature Activation Guide Radio Access Bearer Establishment and Release

1. Start Iub interface tracing on the BSC6900 LMT, as shown in Figure 5-1

Figure 5-1 Iub Interface Trace dialog box

2. Establish a service on the UE. Among the traced Iub data, view the dCH-ID in the
DCH-Specific-FDD-Item IE in the NBAP_RL_SETUP_REQ message. The result
shows that the ID of the transport channel that carries signaling is 32.
3. View the transmissionTimeInterval and nrOfTransportBlocks IEs in the ul-
TransportFormatSet IE associated with the DCH whose dCH-ID value is 32.
– If the value of transmissionTimeInterval is 40, you can infer that an RRC
connection is established for a 3.4 kbit/s service.
– If the value of transmissionTimeInterval is 20, you can infer that an RRC
connection is established for a 6.8 kbit/s service.
– If the value of transmissionTimeInterval is 10 and the maximum value of
nrOfTransportBlocks is 1, you can infer that an RRC connection is established
for a 13.6 kbit/s service.
– If the value of transmissionTimeInterval is 10 and the maximum value of
nrOfTransportBlocks is 2, you can infer that an RRC connection is established
for a 27.2 kbit/s service.
4. Release the service on the UE, and perform Uu interface tracing. If you find an
RRC_RRC_CONN_REL_CMP message in the traced data, you can infer that the
RRC connection is released.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. This feature does not need to be deactivated.

----End

Example
//Activating 3.4/6.8/13.6/27.2Kbps RRC Connection and Radio Access Bearer
Establishment and Release.

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 82
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0 5 Configuring 3.4/6.8/13.6/27.2Kbps RRC Connection and
Feature Activation Guide Radio Access Bearer Establishment and Release

//set the channel type and bit rate corresponding to a specific RRC
connection establishment cause

SET URRCESTCAUSE: RrcCause=ORIGCONVCALLEST,
SigChType=DCH_3.4K_SIGNALLING, EFachSwitch=OFF;

SET URRCESTCAUSE: RrcCause=ORIGCONVCALLEST,
SigChType=DCH_6.8K_SIGNALLING, EFachSwitch=OFF;

SET URRCESTCAUSE: RrcCause=ORIGCONVCALLEST,
SigChType=DCH_13.6K_SIGNALLING, EFachSwitch=OFF;

SET URRCESTCAUSE: RrcCause=ORIGCONVCALLEST,
SigChType=DCH_27.2K_SIGNALLING, EFachSwitch=OFF;

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 83
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 6 Configuring Conversational QoS Class

6 Configuring Conversational QoS Class

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010501
Conversational QoS Class.

Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
– This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
– This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
– This feature is not under license control.
l Others
– The UE and the CN support the conversational class.

Context
Based on QoS requirements, 3GPP defines four traffic classes: conversational, streaming,
interactive, and background.
They differ in their sensitivity to delay. The conversational class is highly sensitive to the delay
and therefore has a high requirement on real-time transmission. The conversational class has the
following fundamental characteristics:
l Preservation of the time relationships between information entities in a stream and
limitation of the transmission delay and delay jitter within an acceptable range.
l Conversational pattern (stringent requirement on the delay).
Conversational services are applicable in both the CS and PS domains. Most typical applications
of the conversational class are voice services and videophone services in the CS domain and
VoIP services in the PS domain.
Huawei RAN supports the following basic types of conversational services:
l CS AMR speech services at the rates of 12.2 kbit/s, 10.2 kbit/s, 7.95 kbit/s, 7.4 kbit/s, 6.7
kbit/s, 5.9 kbit/s, 5.15 kbit/s, and 4.75 kbit/s
l CS transparent data services (conversational class) at the rates of 64 kbit/s, 56 kbit/s, 32
kbit/s, and 28.8 kbit/s

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 84
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 6 Configuring Conversational QoS Class

l PS bidirectional symmetric voice services at the rates of 64 kbit/s, 42.8 kbit/s, 32 kbit/s, 16
kbit/s, and 8 kbit/s

Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA (CME single
configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic Resource
Control Parameter Configuration > Channel Type Parameters; CME batch
modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set
CS voice channel type and VOIP channel type to DCH(UL_DCH,DL_DCH).
l Verification Procedure
1. Initiate Iub interface tracing on the BSC6900 LMT, as shown in Figure 6-1.

Figure 6-1 Iub interface trace dialog box

2. Establish a conversational service on the UE. Check the DPC (that is, the source) of
the RANAP_RAB_ASSIGNMENT_REQ message among the traced Iu data to
determine whether the service is a CS service or PS service.
3. View the trafficClass IE in the rRB-Parameters IE of the
RANAP_RAB_ASSIGNMENT_REQ message to verify that the traffic class is
conversational.
4. View the maxBitrate and rAB-AsymmetryIndicator IEs in the
RANAP_RAB_ASSIGNMENT_REQ message.
– If the value of the rAB-AsymmetryIndicator IE is Asymmetric bidirectional,
then the maxBitrate IE contains two values. The first value indicates the downlink
rate of the conversational service, and the second indicates the uplink rate of the
service. That is, the uplink and downlink transmission uses asymmetric rates.
– If the value of the rAB-AsymmetryIndicator IE is Symmetric bidirectional,
then the maxBitrate IE contains one value, which indicates the rate applicable in
both the uplink and the downlink. That is, the uplink and downlink transmission
uses symmetric rates.
– If the value of the rAB-AsymmetryIndicator IE is Asymmetric Uni directional
downlink, then the maxBitrate IE contains one value, which indicates the
downlink rate of the conversational service. In this case, the uplink rate of the
service is 0.
– If the value of the rAB-AsymmetryIndicator IE is Asymmetric Uni directional
Uplink, then the maxBitrate IE contains one value, which indicates the uplink

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 85
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 6 Configuring Conversational QoS Class

rate of the conversational service. In this case, the downlink rate of the service is
0.
5. View the guaranteedBitRate (the guaranteed bit rate of the conversational service)
and rAB-AsymmetryIndicator IEs in the RANAP_RAB_ASSIGNMENT_REQ
message by following the same rules as those for viewing maxBitrate.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. This feature does not need to be deactivated.
----End

Example
//Activating conversational QoS class
SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: CSVoiceChlType=DCH, VoipChlType=DCH;

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 86
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 7 Configuring Streaming QoS Class

7 Configuring Streaming QoS Class

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010502
Streaming QoS Class.

Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
– This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
– This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
– This feature is not under license control.
l Others
– The UE and CN support streaming services.

Context
Based on QoS requirements, there are four traffic classes: conversational, streaming, interactive,
and background.

QoS indicates the sensitivity of services to the delay. The streaming class is a relatively recent
development in data communications, which raises a number of new requirements in both
telecommunication and data communication systems. The transmission of streaming services
must follow the time sequence of information entities . The streaming class has the following
features:
l The time sequence of information entities in a stream is not changed.
l Streaming services are applicable in both the CS and PS domains. The most typical
applications of the streaming class are fax services in the CS domain and streaming video
services in the PS domain.

Streaming services are real-time services, such as audio and video programs. They are
transmitted in only one direction and serve individual users.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 87
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 7 Configuring Streaming QoS Class

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA (CME single
configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic Resource
Control Parameter Configuration > Channel Type Parameters; CME batch
modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the
HSDPA/HSUPA rate threshold for streaming services. If the assigned rate of a
streaming service is lower than this threshold, the streaming service is set up on R99
channels.
NOTE

In the tests on 384 kbit/s streaming services, the settings of the thresholds cannot ensure that
the services are set up on R99 services. In this case, you can disable the HSDPA and HSUPA
capabilities of the cell to enable the streaming services to be set up on R99 channels.
2. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA UCELLHSDPA (CME single
configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell
HSDPA Parameters. Set ACTSTATUS to Deactivated; CME batch modification
center: No supported) to disable the HSDPA capability of the cell.
3. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA UCELLHSUPA (CME single
configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters >
Configuration of HSUPA in Cell. Set Cell HSUPA state to Deactivated; CME batch
modification center: No supported) to disable the HSUPA capability of the cell.
l Verification Procedure
1. Start Iu interface tracing on the BSC6900 LMT, as shown in Figure 7-1

Figure 7-1 Iu Interface Trace dialog box

2. Use a UE to set up a streaming service. Check the DPC (that is, the source) of the
RANAP_RAB_ASSIGNMENT_REQ message among the traced Iu data to
determine whether the service is a CS service or PS service.
3. Check the RANAP_RAB_ASSIGNMENT_REQ message and check that the value
of the trafficClass information element (IE) in rRB-Parameters is streaming.
4. View the maxBitrate and rAB-AsymmetryIndicator IEs in the
RANAP_RAB_ASSIGNMENT_REQ message.
Expected result:
– If the value of the rAB-AsymmetryIndicator IE is Asymmetric bidirectional,
the maxBitrate IE contains two values. The first value indicates the downlink rate
of the streaming service, and the second indicates the uplink rate of the service.

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 88
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 7 Configuring Streaming QoS Class

– If the value of the rAB-AsymmetryIndicator IE is Symmetric bidirectional, the
maxBitrate IE contains one value, which indicates the rate in both the uplink and
the downlink. That is, the uplink and downlink transmission use the same rate.
– If the value of the rAB-AsymmetryIndicator IE is Asymmetric Uni directional
downlink, the maxBitrate IE contains one value, which indicates the downlink
rate of the streaming service. In this case, the uplink rate of the service is 0.
– If the value of the rAB-AsymmetryIndicator IE is Asymmetric Uni directional
Uplink, the maxBitrate IE contains one value, which indicates the uplink rate of
the streaming service. In this case, the downlink rate of the service is 0.
5. View the guaranteedBitRate (the guaranteed bit rate of the streaming service) and
rAB-AsymmetryIndicator IEs in the RANAP_RAB_ASSIGNMENT_REQ
message by following the same rules as those for the maxBitrate IE.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. This feature does not need to be deactivated.
----End

Example
//Activating Streaming Class QoS
SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: DlStrThsOnHsdpa=D384, UlStrThsOnHsupa=D384;
DEA UCELLHSDPA: CellId=1;
DEA UCELLHSUPA: CellId=1;

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 89
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 8 Configuring Interactive QoS Class

8 Configuring Interactive QoS Class

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010503
Interactive QoS Class.

Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
– This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
– This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
– This feature is not under license control.
l Others
– The UE and CN support interactive services.

Context
Based on QoS requirements, there are four traffic classes: conversational, streaming, interactive,
and background. QoS indicates the sensitivity of services to the delay.
The interactive class is a typical data communication solution. It is characterized by the request/
response pattern of end users. For example, a person or an entity at the destination sends a data
request to a remote server and expects a response message within a specific time. In this situation,
the Round Trip Time (RTT) is one of the key attributes of the interactive class. Another
characteristic is that the packets should be transparently transferred at a low Bit Error Rate
(BER). In summary, the interactive class has the following fundamental characteristics: request/
response pattern and preservation of the payload.
Interactive services are applicable in the PS domain and not applicable in the CS domain. The
most typical application of the interactive class is web browsing.
Huawei RAN supports the following types of interactive services: PS bidirectional symmetric
or asymmetric interactive services at the rates of 384 kbit/s, 285 kbit/s, 144 kbit/s, 128 kbit/s,
64 kbit/s, 32 kbit/s, 16 kbit/s, and 8 kbit/s.

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 90
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 8 Configuring Interactive QoS Class

Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA (CME single
configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic Resource
Control Parameter Configuration > Channel Type Parameters; CME batch
modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the
HSDPA/HSUPA rate threshold for interactive services. If the assigned rate of an
interactive service is lower than this threshold, the interactive service is set up on R99
channels.
l Verification Procedure
1. Start Iu interface tracing on the BSC6900 LMT, as shown in Figure 8-1

Figure 8-1 Iu Interface Trace dialog box

2. Use a UE to set up an interactive service. Check the
RANAP_RAB_ASSIGNMENT_REQ message and check that the value of the
trafficClass information element (IE) in rRB-Parameters is interactive.
3. View the maxBitrate and rAB-AsymmetryIndicator IEs in the
RANAP_RAB_ASSIGNMENT_REQ message.
Expected result:
– If the value of the rAB-AsymmetryIndicator IE is Asymmetric bidirectional,
the maxBitrate IE contains two values. The first value indicates the downlink rate
of the interactive service, and the second indicates the uplink rate of the service.
– If the value of the rAB-AsymmetryIndicator IE is Symmetric bidirectional, the
maxBitrate IE contains one value, which indicates the rate in both the uplink and
the downlink. That is, the uplink and downlink transmission use the same rate.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. This feature does not need to be deactivated.

----End

Example
//Activating Interactive QoS Class
SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: DlBeTraffThsOnHsdpa=D13900,
UlBeTraffThsOnHsupa=D5440;

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 91
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 9 Configuring Background QoS Class

9 Configuring Background QoS Class

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010504
Background QoS Class.

Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
– This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
– This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
– This feature is not under license control.
l Others
– The UE and CN support this feature.

Context
Based on QoS requirements, there are four traffic classes: conversational, streaming, interactive,
and background.

QoS indicates the sensitivity of services to the delay. A typical type of background service is
data services. One of the characteristics of the background class is that the destination does not
expect data within a specific time, and therefore the background class is delay-insensitive.
Another characteristic is that the packets should be transparently transferred at a low Bit Error
Rate (BER).

In summary, the background class has the following fundamental characteristics: destination not
expecting data within a specific time and preservation of the payload.

Background services are applicable in the PS domain and not applicable in the CS domain. The
most typical applications of the background class are download and emails.

Huawei RAN supports the following types of background services: PS bidirectional symmetric
or asymmetric background services at the rates of 384 kbit/s, 256 kbit/s, 144 kbit/s, 128 kbit/s,
64 kbit/s, 32 kbit/s, 16 kbit/s, and 8 kbit/s.

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 92
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 9 Configuring Background QoS Class

Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA (CME single
configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic Resource
Control Parameter Configuration > Channel Type Parameters; CME batch
modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the
HSDPA/HSUPA rate threshold for background services. If the assigned rate of a
background service is lower than this threshold, the background service is set up on
R99 channels.
l Verification Procedure
1. Start Iu interface tracing on the BSC6900 LMT, as shown in Figure 9-1

Figure 9-1 Iu Interface Trace dialog box

2. Use a UE to set up a background service. Check the
RANAP_RAB_ASSIGNMENT_REQ message and check that the value of the
trafficClass information element (IE) in rRB-Parameters is background.
3. View the maxBitrate and rAB-AsymmetryIndicator IEs in the
RANAP_RAB_ASSIGNMENT_REQ message.
Expected result:
– If the value of the rAB-AsymmetryIndicator IE is Asymmetric bidirectional,
the maxBitrate IE contains two values. The first value indicates the downlink rate
of the background service, and the second indicates the uplink rate of the service.
– If the value of the rAB-AsymmetryIndicator IE is Symmetric bidirectional, the
maxBitrate IE contains one value, which indicates the rate in both the uplink and
the downlink. That is, the uplink and downlink transmission use the same rate.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. This feature does not need to be deactivated.

----End

Example
//Activating Background QoS Class
SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: DlBeTraffThsOnHsdpa=D13900,
UlBeTraffThsOnHsupa=D5440;

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 93
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 10 Configuring Emergency Call

10 Configuring Emergency Call

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-021104
Emergency Call.

Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
– This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
– This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
– This feature is not under license control.

Context
This feature grants higher priority to emergency calls so that they are preferentially processed,
compared to normal calls.

CAUTION
If the license of the AMR-WB service is not activated on a RNC, ensure that AMR-WB is not
enabled for this RNC on the CS core network side. Otherwise, both the AMR-NB services and
emergency calls cannot be set up for the UE supporting AMR-WB.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure
This feature need not be activated.
l Verification Procedure
1. Use a UE to initiate an emergency call.. The emergency call is successfully established.
l Deactivation Procedure
This feature need not be deactivated.
----End

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 94
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0 11 Configuring RAB Quality of Service Renegotiation over
Feature Activation Guide Iu Interface

11 Configuring RAB Quality of Service
Renegotiation over Iu Interface

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010506
RAB Quality of Service Renegotiation over Iu Interface.

Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
– The NEs in the core network must support selective configuration of the maximum bit
rate (MBR) and guaranteed bit rate (GBR).
l Dependencies on Other Features
– This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
– This feature is not under license control.

Context
This feature enables the BSC6900 to initiate Iu renegotiation on the MBR and GBR of PS real-
time services to reduce the rate of real-time services.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single
configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell
Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell
Parameters in Batches) to enable the cell-level LDR algorithm. In this step, set Cell
LDC algorithm switch to UL_UU_LDR(Uplink UU LDR Algorithm),
DL_UU_LDR(Downlink UU LDR Algorithm), and CELL_CREDIT_LDR
(Credit LDR Algorithm).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNODEBALGOPARA (CME single
configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > NodeB Basic
Information > NodeB Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.16
Modifying Logical NodeB Parameters in Batches) to enable the NodeB-level LDR
algorithm. In this step, set NodeB LDC algorithm switch to IUB_LDR(IUB LDR

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 95
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0 11 Configuring RAB Quality of Service Renegotiation over
Feature Activation Guide Iu Interface

Algorithm), LCG_CREDIT_LDR(LCG Credit LDR Algorithm), and
NODEB_CREDIT_LDR(NodeB Credit LDR Algorithm).
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLLDM (CME single configuration:
UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Oriented LDM
Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS
Cell Parameters in Batches) to set the cell-level LDR trigger threshold. In this step,
set UL/DL LDR Trigger threshold and DL State Trans Hysteresis threshold
according to the network plan.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNODEBLDR (CME single
configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > NodeB Basic
Information > NodeB LDR Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification
center: 3.16 Modifying Logical NodeB Parameters in Batches) to set the NodeB-
level LDR credit spreading factor (SF) reserved threshold. In this step, set Ul LDR
Credit SF reserved threshold and Dl LDR Credit SF reserved threshold according
to the network plan.
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLLDR (CME single configuration:
UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell LDR Algorithm
Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell
Parameters in Batches) to set the NodeB credit LDR threshold for the local cell. In
this step, set Ul LDR Credit SF reserved threshold and DL LDR Credit SF
reserved threshold according to the network plan.
6. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET ULDCPERIOD (CME single configuration:
UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Load Control Parameter
Configuration > RNC Oriented LDC Algorithm Cycle Length; CME batch
modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set
LDR period timer length according to the network plan.
7. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLLDR (CME single configuration:
UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell LDR Algorithm
Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell
Parameters in Batches) to enable QoS renegotiation on real-time services. In this
step, set DL LDR first action to QOSRENEGO.
l Verification Procedure
1. Establish a PS streaming service.
2. Trigger LDR in the cell according to the cell LDR threshold specified in the activation
procedure.
3. If RAB MODIFY REQUEST is traced on the Iu interface, this feature has been
activated.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single
configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell
Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell
Parameters in Batches) to disable the cell-level LDR algorithm. In this step, deselect
UL_UU_LDR(Uplink UU LDR Algorithm), DL_UU_LDR(Downlink UU LDR
Algorithm), and CELL_CREDIT_LDR(Credit LDR Algorithm) from the Cell
LDC algorithm switch drop-down list box.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNODEBALGOPARA (CME single
configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > NodeB Basic
Information > NodeB Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.16
Modifying Logical NodeB Parameters in Batches) to disable the NodeB-level LDR
algorithm. In this step, deselect IUB_LDR(IUB LDR Algorithm),

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 96
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0 11 Configuring RAB Quality of Service Renegotiation over
Feature Activation Guide Iu Interface

LCG_CREDIT_LDR(LCG Credit LDR Algorithm), and
NODEB_CREDIT_LDR(NodeB Credit LDR Algorithm) from the NodeB LDC
algorithm switch drop-down list box.
----End

Example
/*Activating RAB Quality of Service Renegotiation over Iu Interface*/

//Enabling the cell-level LDR algorithm
MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=111, NBMLdcAlgoSwitch=
UL_UU_LDR-1&DL_UU_LDR-1&CELL_CREDIT_LDR-1;

//Enabling the NodeB-level LDR algorithm
MOD UNODEBALGOPARA: NodeBName="NODEB1",
NodeBLdcAlgoSwitch=IUB_LDR-1&NODEB_CREDIT_LDR-1&LCG_CREDIT_LDR-1;

//Enable QoS renegotiation on real-time services
MOD UCELLLDR: CellId=111, DlLdrFirstAction=QoSRenego;

/*Deactivating RAB Quality of Service Renegotiation over Iu Interface*/

//Disabling the cell-level LDR algorithm
MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=111, NBMLdcAlgoSwitch=
UL_UU_LDR-0&DL_UU_LDR-0&CELL_CREDIT_LDR-0;

//Disabling the NodeB-level LDR algorithm
MOD UNODEBALGOPARA: NodeBName="NODEB1",
NodeBLdcAlgoSwitch=IUB_LDR-0&NODEB_CREDIT_LDR-0&LCG_CREDIT_LDR-0;

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 97
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 12 Configuring 2-Way Antenna Receive Diversity

12 Configuring 2-Way Antenna Receive
Diversity

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210604
2-Way Antenna Receive Diversity.

Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
– In receive diversity mode, the NodeB should provide sufficient RF channels and
demodulation resources to meet the requirements for the number of antenna diversities.
l Dependencies on Other Features
– This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
– This feature is not under license control.

Context
The 2-Antenna Receive Diversity is an effective approach of reducing signal attenuation by
using two antennas to receive a signal at the reception end, where two received signals are
combined after certain processing.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the NodeB MML command ADD SEC (CME single configuration: NodeB
Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > Sector; CME batch
modification center: not supported). In this step, set Antenna Magnitude to 2.
l Verification Procedure
1. Run the NodeB MML command LST SEC to query the value of Antenna
Magnitude.
Expected result: Antenna Magnitude is 2.
l Deactivation Procedure
This feature does not need to be deactivated.
----End

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 98
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 12 Configuring 2-Way Antenna Receive Diversity

Example
//Activation procedure
ADD SEC: STN=1, SECN=0, SECT=REMOTE_SECTOR, ANTM=2, DIVM=COMMON_MODE,
ANT1SRN=60, ANT1N=R0A, ANT2SRN=60, ANT2N=R0B;
//Verification procedure
LST SEC: STN=1, SECN=0;

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 99
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 13 Configuring Cell Digital Combination and Split

13 Configuring Cell Digital Combination
and Split

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010205
Cell Digital Combination and Split.

Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
– Only DBS3800/DBS3900 supports this feature, RRU3801c cannot support this feature.
– Each RRU is configured with only one RX antenna.
– It is not recommended that distributed sectors and non-distributed sectors are configured
on an RRU chain.
– If distributed sectors are configured, one CPRI port supports a maximum of four
cascaded RRUs, a maximum of four RRUs share one cell, and a maximum of three
distributed cells are supported.
– One BBU supports combination of uplink digital signals on only one CPRI port. A
maximum of four RRUs share one cell.
– In consideration of delay requirements, the remote distance of fiber optic cables for the
RRUs in a cell and with the same coverage should be smaller than four kilometers.
– RF modules, RRU3828 and RRU3829 can only support a maximum of four carriers
when they are implemented for Cell Digital Combination and Split.
l Dependencies on Other Features
– This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
– This feature is not under license control.

Context
The feature enables multiple sectors to use the resources in the same cell, which improves system
spectrum efficiency and resource utilization. Compared with the analog combination and split,
the digital combination and split can provide higher capacity and wider coverage without
bringing additional noises or signal losses. Cell coverage can be adjusted simply through
software to adapt to actual traffic distribution and changes, which improves CE resource
utilization and operation benefits.

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 100
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 13 Configuring Cell Digital Combination and Split

Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the NodeB MML command ADD RRUCHAIN (CME single configuration:
NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Device Panel > Right click
TOPO > Add RXU Chain; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add
an RRU chain. In this step, set Topo Type to CHAIN.
2. Run the NodeB MML command ADD RRU (CME single configuration: NodeB
Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Device Panel > TOPO > Right click RXU
CHAIN > Add RXU Board; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add
an RRU. In this step, set a group of RRUs in consecutive numbering to the RRUs to
be used by the distributed sector.
3. Run the NodeB MML command ADD SEC (CME single configuration: NodeB
Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > Sector; CME batch
modification center: not supported) to add a sector. In this step, set Sector Type to
DIST_SECTOR(DIST_SECTOR).
4. Run the NodeB MML command ADD LOCELL (CME single configuration: NodeB
Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > xx Sector > Locell; CME
batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in
Batches) to add a local cell. In this step, set Sector Type to DIST_SECTOR
(DIST_SECTOR).
l Verification Procedure
1. Run the NodeB MML command LST SEC. In this step, check that Sector Type is
set to DIST_SECTOR(DIST_SECTOR).
2. Run the NodeB MML command LST LOCELL. In this step, check that Sector
Type is set to DIST_SECTOR(DIST_SECTOR).
l Deactivation Procedure
This feature does not need to be deactivated.

----End

Example
1. NodeB V200R014
//Activation procedure
ADD RRUCHAIN: RCN=0, TT=CHAIN, BM=COLD, HSN=2, HPN=0;
ADD RRU: CN=0, SRN=60, SN=0, TP=TRUNK, RCN=0, PS=0, RT=MRRU, RS=UO;
ADD RRU: CN=0, SRN=61, SN=1, TP=TRUNK, RCN=0, PS=1, RT=MRRU, RS=UO;
ADD SEC: STN=0, SECN=1, SECT=DIST_SECTOR, SRNB=60, SRNE=61;
ADD LOCELL: LOCELL=100, STN=0, SECN=1, SECT=DIST_SECTOR,
RRUMODE=SYNC, ULFREQ=9610, DLFREQ=10560, HISPM=FALSE;
//Verification procedure
LST SEC: STN=0, SECN=1;
LST LOCELL: MODE=LOCALCELL, LOCELL=100;
2. NodeB V100R014
//Activation procedure
ADD RRUCHAIN: RCN=0, TT=CHAIN, HSN=0, HPN=0;
ADD RRU: CN=0, SRN=60, TP=TRUNK, RCN=0, PS=0, RT=MRRU;
ADD RRU: CN=0, SRN=61, TP=TRUNK, RCN=0, PS=0, RT=MRRU;
ADD SEC: STN=0, SECN=1, SECT=DIST_SECTOR, SRNB=60, SRNE=61;
ADD LOCELL: LOCELL=100, STN=0, SECN=1, SECT=DIST_SECTOR,
BBPOOLTYPE=GEN_POOL, RRUMODE=SYNC, ULFREQ=9610, DLFREQ=10560,
HISPM=FALSE;

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 101
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 13 Configuring Cell Digital Combination and Split

//Verification procedure
LST SEC: STN=0, SECN=1;
LST LOCELL: MODE=LOCALCELL, LOCELL=100;

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 102
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0 14 Configuring UE State in Connected Mode (CELL_DCH,
Feature Activation Guide CELL_PCH, URA_PCH, CELL_FACH)

14 Configuring UE State in Connected
Mode (CELL_DCH, CELL_PCH, URA_PCH,
CELL_FACH)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010202
UE State in Connected Mode (CELL_DCH, CELL_PCH, URA_PCH, CELL_FACH).

Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
– This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
– This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
– This feature is not under license control.
l Other Prerequisites
– The Iu-PS activity factor is already modified.
The Iu-PS activity factor can be modified by running the ADD TRMFACTOR (CME
single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Transmission
Resources Configuration > Factor Table; CME batch modification center: not
supported) and MOD ADJMAP (CME single configuration: IUPS Configuration
Express > IP Transport > Adjacent Node Mapping; CME batch modification center:
not supported) commands. The recommended value of the Iu-PS activity factor is 10%.
NOTE

If there are excessive users in the CELL_PCH or URA_PCH state, a large amount of bandwidth
on the Iu-PS interface is consumed though such users do not have data to transmit.
Adjusting the Iu-PS activity factor can prevent PS service admission failures due to the increase
in the number of UEs in the CELL_PCH or URA_PCH state.
– The Fast Dormancy procedure of the UE must comply with 3GPP TS 25.331 CR3483.
– UEs must support associated states.

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 103
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0 14 Configuring UE State in Connected Mode (CELL_DCH,
Feature Activation Guide CELL_PCH, URA_PCH, CELL_FACH)

Context
Huawei RAN supports four states of UEs in connected mode: CELL_DCH, CELL_PCH,
URA_PCH, and CELL_FACH. This feature helps save radio resources efficiently.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure
A UE can directly enter the CELL_FACH or CELL_DCH state. It can enter the CELL_PCH
or URA_PCH state only through state transition from CELL_FACH or CELL_DCH. The
settings of state transition are as follows:
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single
configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express >
Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented
Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC
Parameters in Batches). In this step, select the
DRA_PS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH check box under the parameter
Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch.
2. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH
(CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express >
Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented
Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC
Parameters in Batches). In this step, select the DRA_F2U_SWITCH check box
under the parameter Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch to enable state transition
from CELL_FACH to URA_PCH directly.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER (CME single
configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > UE State Transition
Parameter Configuration > RNC StateTrans Timer Parameters; CME batch
modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set
BE FACH or E_FACH to PCH Transition Timer and Cell Reselection Timer to
appropriate values.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UUESTATETRANS (CME single
configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > UE State Transition
Parameter Configuration > UE State Translating Parameters; CME batch
modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set
Cell Reselection Counter Threshold to an appropriate value.
NOTE

l This feature involves the parameter settings of state transition from CELL_FACH or CELL_DCH to
CELL_PCH or URA_PCH. For the parameter settings of other types of state transition, see 17
Configuring Dynamic Channel Configuration Control.
l For the parameter settings related to fast dormancy, see 175 Configuring Enhanced Fast
Dormancy.
l Verification Procedure
This feature cannot be verified separately. The state of a UE changes when it requests
different services. This is referred to as state transition. For details, see 17 Configuring
Dynamic Channel Configuration Control.
l Deactivation Procedure
This feature does not need to be deactivated.

----End

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 104
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0 14 Configuring UE State in Connected Mode (CELL_DCH,
Feature Activation Guide CELL_PCH, URA_PCH, CELL_FACH)

Example
//Activating UE State in Connected Mode (CELL_DCH, CELL_PCH, URA_PCH,
CELL_FACH)
//Enabling status transition (CELL_FACH/CELL_PCH/URA_PCH)
SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH:
DraSwitch=DRA_PS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH-1&DRA_F2U_SWITCH-1;
//(Optional) Enabling state transition from CELL_FACH to URA_PCH directly
SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER: BeF2PStateTransTimer=65535,
CellReSelectTimer=180;
//Setting the parameters related to this feature
SET UUESTATETRANS: CellReSelectCounter=9;

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 105
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0 15 Configuring Paging UE in Idle, CELL_PCH, URA_PCH
Feature Activation Guide State (Type 1)

15 Configuring Paging UE in Idle,
CELL_PCH, URA_PCH State (Type 1)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010301
Paging UE in Idle, CELL_PCH, URA_PCH State (Type 1).

Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
– This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
– This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
– This feature is not under license control.

Context
In paging type 1, the UTRAN sends a paging message to the UE in idle mode, CELL_PCH state,
or URA_PCH state through the paging control channel (PCCH).

Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single
configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express >
Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented
Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC
Parameters in Batches) with Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch set to
DRA_HSDPA_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH,
DRA_HSUPA_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH and
DRA_PS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URRCTRLSWITCH (CME single
configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Process Switch
Configuration > Process Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying
RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the parameter Reserved parameter 1 to
RSVDBIT1_BIT21 (Reserved Parameter 1 Bit 21).

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 106
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0 15 Configuring Paging UE in Idle, CELL_PCH, URA_PCH
Feature Activation Guide State (Type 1)

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER (CME single
configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > UE State Transition
Parameter Configuration > RNC StateTrans Timer Parameters; CME batch
modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the
parameter BE FACH or E_FACH to PCH Transition Timer to 10
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UPSINACTTIMER (CME single
configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > PS Permanent
Online Detection Timer Configuration > PS User Inactive Detecting Timer; CME
batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set
Interactive service T1 and Background service T1 to 1800.
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD TRMFACTOR (CME single configuration:
UMTS Global Configuration Express > Transmission Resources Configuration
> Factor Table; CME batch modification center: not supported) and MOD
ADJMAP (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express >
IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > Adjacent Node Mapping; CME batch modification
center: not supported) to modify the Iu-PS activation factor. The recommended value
is 10%.
NOTE

l After this feature is activated, number of UEs in CELL_PCH or URA_PCH state will increase
sharply. These UEs consume a large number of Iu-PS resources although there is no service data
transmission.
l You can adjust the Iu-PS activation factor to avoid the PS admission failure due to increasing
number of UEs in CELL_PCH or URA_PCH state.
l Verification Procedure (Paging a UE in Idle Mode)
1. On the BSC6900 LMT, click Trace > UMTS Services, and then double-click Uu
Interface Trace. The Uu Interface Trace dialog box is displayed.
2. Set parameters in the areas Cell Config, Uu Message Type, Trace Mode and Save
File. Then, click Submit.
3. Power on UE1 and UE2, and camp on CELL1. Use UE2 to call UE1. The
RRC_PAGING_TYPE1 message should be displayed on the Trace Data tab page.
l Commissioning Procedure (Paging a UE in CELL_PCH State)
1. On the BSC6900 LMT, click Trace > UMTS Services, and then double-click Uu
Interface Trace. The Uu Interface Trace dialog box is displayed.
2. On the HLR, set the PS service type to background or interactive.
3. Establish an R99 PS service on UE1. The RRC_RB_SETUP message should be
displayed in trace data, and the value of the rrc-stateindicator IE should be
CELL_DCH.
4. Do not send any data from UE1 for 30 seconds. Then, the network side should perform
UE1 transition to CELL_FACH state through the RRC_RB_RECFG message, and
the value of rrc-stateindicator IE should be CELL_FACH.
5. Do not send any data from UE1 for another while. Then, the network side should
perform UE1 transition to CELL_PCH state through the RRC_RB_RECFG message,
and the value of rrc-stateindicator IE should be CELL_PCH.
6. Use UE2 to call UE1. The RRC_PAGING_TYPE1 message should be displayed.
l Verification Procedure (Paging a UE in URA_PCH)
1. On the BSC6900 LMT, click Trace > UMTS Services, and then double-click Uu
Interface Trace. The Uu Interface Trace dialog box is displayed.

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 107
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0 15 Configuring Paging UE in Idle, CELL_PCH, URA_PCH
Feature Activation Guide State (Type 1)

2. Repeat step 3 through step 5 described in section "Paging a UE in URA_PCH" to
perform UE1 transition to CELL_PCH. Cause UE1 to perform a cell reselection
between CELL1 and CELL2. Cause UE1 to perform another cell reselection after the
Cell Reselection Timer[s] expires. Search for the last
RRC_CELL_UPDATE_CONFIRM message in trace data. The value of rrc-
stateindicator IE should be URA_PCH.
3. Use UE2 to call UE1. The RRC_PAGING_TYPE1 message should be displayed.

NOTE
For details about how to enable UE transition to CELL_PCH or URA_PCH state, see 14
Configuring UE State in Connected Mode (CELL_DCH, CELL_PCH, URA_PCH,
CELL_FACH).
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URRCTRLSWITCH (CME single
configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Process Switch
Configuration > Process Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying
RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect RSVDBIT1_BIT21 (Reserved
Parameter 1 Bit 21) from the Reserved parameter 1 drop-down list box.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER (CME single
configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > UE State Transition
Parameter Configuration > RNC StateTrans Timer Parameters; CME batch
modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set BE FACH
or E_FACH to PCH Transition Timer to 65535. When this parameter is set to
65535, the FACH-to-PCH state transition is disabled.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UPSINACTTIMER (CME single
configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > PS Permanent
Online Detection Timer Configuration > PS User Inactive Detecting Timer; CME
batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set
Interactive service T1and set Background service T1 to 20.
----End

Example
// Activation Procedure

//Setting the FACH/E_FACH-tO-PCH state transition timer for BE services
SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER: BeF2PStateTransTimer=10;

//Setting the PS inactive period detection timer for RNC
SET UPSINACTTIMER: PsInactTmrForInt=1800, PsInactTmrForBac=1800;

//Adding an activation factor
ADD TRMFACTOR: FTI=1, REMARK="Iu-PS", PSCONVDL=10, PSCONVUL=10,
PSSTRMDL=10, PSSTRMUL=10, PSINTERDL=10, PSINTERUL=10, PSBKGDL=10,
PSBKGUL=10;

//Modifying the mapping between activation factor and adjacent node
MOD ADJMAP: ANI=1, ITFT=IUPS, FTI=1;

//Enabling the cell update during CS service setup
SET URRCTRLSWITCH: RsvdPara1=RSVDBIT1_BIT21-0;

// Deactivation Procedure

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 108
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0 15 Configuring Paging UE in Idle, CELL_PCH, URA_PCH
Feature Activation Guide State (Type 1)

//Setting the FACH/E_FACH-tO-PCH state transition timer for BE services
SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER: BeF2PStateTransTimer=65535;

//Setting the PS inactive period detection timer for RNC
SET UPSINACTTIMER: PsInactTmrForInt=20, PsInactTmrForBac=20;

//Disabling the cell update during CS service setup
SET URRCTRLSWITCH: RsvdPara1=RSVDBIT1_BIT21-1;

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 109
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0 16 Configuring Paging UE in CELL_FACH, CELL_DCH
Feature Activation Guide State (Type 2)

16 Configuring Paging UE in CELL_FACH,
CELL_DCH State (Type 2)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010302
Paging UE in CELL_FACH, CELL_DCH State (Type 2).

Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
– This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
– This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
– This feature is not under license control.

Context
In paging type 2, the UTRAN sends a paging message to the UE in CELL_FACH or CELL_DCH
state through the DCH or FACH.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. (Optional) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH
(CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express >
Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented
Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC
Parameters in Batches) to turn on the RNC-oriented PS BE service state transition
switch.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER (CME single
configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > UE State Transition
Parameter Configuration > RNC StateTrans Timer Parameters; CME batch
modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the
parameter BE DCH to FACH Transition Timer[s] to 30s.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UPSINACTTIMER (CME single
configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > PS Permanent

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 110
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0 16 Configuring Paging UE in CELL_FACH, CELL_DCH
Feature Activation Guide State (Type 2)

Online Detection Timer Configuration > PS User Inactive Detecting Timer; CME
batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set
inactivity detection timers for PS services.
l Verification Procedure (Paging a UE in CELL_DCH State)
1. On the BSC6900 LMT, click Trace > UMTS Services, and then double-click Uu
Interface Trace. The Uu Interface Trace dialog box is displayed.
2. Set parameters in the areas Cell Config, Uu Message Type, Trace Mode and Save
File. Then, click Submit.
3. Establish an R99 PS service on UE1. The RRC_RB_SETUP message should be
displayed in trace data, and the value of the rrc-stateindicator IE should be
CELL_DCH.
4. Use UE2 to call UE1. The RRC_PAGING_TYPE2 message should be displayed.
l Verification Procedure (Paging a UE in CELL_FACH State)
1. On the BSC6900 LMT, click Trace > UMTS Services, and then double-click Uu
Interface Trace. The Uu Interface Trace dialog box is displayed.
2. Set parameters in the areas Cell Config, Uu Message Type, and Save File, and then
click Submit. The Trace Data tab page is displayed.
3. On the HLR, set the PS service type to background or interactive.
4. Establish an R99 PS service on UE1. The RRC_RB_SETUP message should be
displayed in trace data, and the value of the rrc-stateindicator IE should be
CELL_DCH.
5. Do not send any data from UE1 for 30 seconds. Then, you can view that the network
side performs UE transition to CELL_FACH state through the RRC_RB_RECFG
message. The value of rrc-stateindicator IE should be CELL_FACH.
6. Use UE2 to call UE1. The RRC_PAGING_TYPE2 message should be displayed.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. This feature does not need to be deactivated.
----End

Example
//Activating paging type 2
SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_PS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH-1;
SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER: BeD2FStateTransTimer=30;
SET UPSINACTTIMER: PsInactTmrForInt=1440, ProtectTmrForInt=20,
PsInactTmrForBac=1440, ProtectTmrForBac=20;

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 111
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 17 Configuring Dynamic Channel Configuration Control

17 Configuring Dynamic Channel
Configuration Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-021101
Dynamic Channel Configuration Control (DCCC). (This feature cannot be configured using the
CME. )

Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
– This feature does not depend on the hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
– This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
– This feature is not under license control.

Context
This feature allows dynamic rate adjustment and UE state transition triggered by various reasons.
This improves the quality of services and increases resource utilization.

Procedure
l Activating DCCC
1. To activate the DCCC algorithm, perform the following steps:
Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In this step,
set Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch to DRA_DCCC_SWITCH.
2. To activate traffic-based BE service rate adjustment, perform the following steps:
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UTYPRABDCCCMC to set the
following event 4A and 4B parameters:
– Direction
– Event4AThd
– Event4BThd
– TimetoTrigger4A

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 112
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 17 Configuring Dynamic Channel Configuration Control

– TimetoTrigger4B
– PendingTime4A
– PendingTime4B
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UDCCC to set the following RNC-
level DCCC algorithm parameters:
– DcccStg
– UlRateUpAdjLevel
– UlRateDnAdjLevel
– DlRateUpAdjLevel
– DlRateDnAdjLevel
– UlDcccRateThd
– DlDcccRateThd
– UlMidRateCalc
– DlMidRateCalc
– UlMidRateThd
– DlMidRateThd
3. To activate throughput-based BE service rate adjustment, perform the following steps:
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In this
step, set Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch to
DRA_THROUGHPUT_DCCC_SWITCH.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UDCCC. In this step, set DCH Throu
Meas Period and HSUPA DCCC strategy.
c. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UTYPRABDCCCMC to set the
following event 4B parameters for the DCH:
– Period Amount to trigger 4B on DCH
– Period Amount after trigger 4B on DCH
4. To activate link-stability-based BE service rate adjustment, perform the following
steps:
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UQOSACT to set the RNC-level QoS
enhancement algorithm parameters. The parameters for ensuring link stability
are:
– QOS Switch for BE Traffic
– First Action for BE Uplink QOS
– Second Action for BE Uplink QOS
– Third Action for BE Uplink QOS
– Wait Timer for BE Uplink Rate
– First Action for BE Downlink QOS
– Second Action for BE Downlink QOS
– Third Action for BE Downlink QOS
– Indicator for BE Uplink QOS Event
– Srnc Parameter for BE Downlink RLC QOS
– DRNC Parameter for BE Downlink RLC QOS

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 113
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 17 Configuring Dynamic Channel Configuration Control

– Measurement of 6A1 Switch
– Measurement of 5A Switch
– Measurement of 6D Switch
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UQUALITYMEAS to set the RNC-
level QoS measurement parameters. The parameters for ensuring link stability
are:
– BE Trigger Time 6A1
– BE Trigger Time 6B1
– BE Trigger Time 6A2
– BE Trigger Time 6B2
– BE Trigger Time 6D
– UL Measurement Filter Coefficient
– DL TCP Measurement Filter Coefficient
– BE Trigger Time of Event E
– BE Reporting Period Unit for Event E
– BE Event E Reporting Period or BE Event E Reporting Period minute
– BE Trigger Time of Event F
– BE Reporting Period Unit for Event F
– BE Event F Reporting Period or BE Event F Reporting Period minute
c. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLCAC to set the cell-level Call
Admission Control (CAC) algorithm parameters. The parameters for ensuring
link stability are:
– Max UL TX power of interactive service
– Max UL TX power of background service
NOTE

The BSC6900 defines default values for Max UL TX power of interactive service and
Max UL TX power of background service. Retain the default values in normal
situations.
d. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLRLPWR to set the cell-level
downlink transmit power parameters.
e. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLQUALITYMEAS to set the
cell-level QoS measurement parameters. The parameters for ensuring link
stability are:
– BE Trigger Time 6A1
– BE Trigger Time 6B1
– BE Trigger Time 6A2
– BE Trigger Time 6B2
– BE Trigger Time 6D
– BE Trigger Time of Event E
– BE Reporting Period Unit for Event E
– BE Event E Reporting Period
– BE Trigger Time of Event F

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 114
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 17 Configuring Dynamic Channel Configuration Control

– BE Reporting Period Unit for Event F
– BE Event E Reporting Period
NOTE

The BSC6900 defines default values for the preceding parameters. Retain the default
values in normal situations.
f. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UTYPRABQUALITYMEAS to set
the following typical parameters for QoS measurement:
– Uplink Event 6A1 Relative Threshold
– Uplink Event 6A2 Relative Threshold
– Uplink Event 6B1 Relative Threshold
– Uplink Event 6B2 Relative Threshold
– Statistic Block Number for 5A Event
– Event 5A Threshold
– Event 5A Interval Block Number
– Event Ea Relative Threshold
– Event Eb Relative Threshold
g. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UTYPRABRLC to set Radio Link
Control (RLC) parameters for a typical Radio Access Bearer (RAB). The
parameters for ensuring link stability are:
– Re-TX monitor period
– Event A threshold
– Hysteresis of Event A
– Event A pending time after trigger
– Filter Coefficient of RLC Retransmission Ratio
NOTE

The BSC6900 defines default values for the preceding parameters. Retain the default
values in normal situations.
h. Link stability control for BE services is implemented through Inter-frequency
handover.
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLHOCOMM. In this step,
set Inter-Frequency and Inter-RAT Coexist Switch to INTERFREQ.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In
this step, set HandOver Switch to
HO_INTER_FREQ_HARD_HO_SWITCH.
i. To configure inter-RAT handover for the link stability of BE services, perform
the following steps:
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLHOCOMM. In this step,
set Inter-Frequency and Inter-RAT Coexist Switch to INTERRAT and
Inter-RAT PS Handover Switch to ON.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In
this step, set HandOver Switch to
HO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH.
j. To configure inter-frequency handover and inter-RAT handover for the link
stability of BE services, perform the following steps:

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 115
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 17 Configuring Dynamic Channel Configuration Control

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLHOCOMM. In this step,
set Inter-Frequency and Inter-RAT Coexist Switch to
SIMINTERFREQRAT and Inter-RAT PS Handover Switch to ON.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In
this step, set HandOver Switch to
HO_INTER_FREQ_HARD_HO_SWITCH and
HO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH.
k. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UDCCC to set the following RNC-
level DCCC algorithm parameters:
– Uplink Full Coverage Bit Rate
– Downlink Full Coverage Bit Rate
l. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLDCCC to set the following
cell-level DCCC algorithm parameters:
– Uplink Full Coverage Bit Rate
– Downlink Full Coverage Bit Rate
NOTE
For details about the settings of measurement control parameters, see 110 Configuring TTI Switch
for BE Services Based on Coverage.
5. Activating basic-congestion-based BE service rate adjustment
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UUSERGBR to set the guaranteed bit
rates (GBRs) for gold, silver, and copper users requesting interactive and
background services.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UEDCHRATEADJUSTSET to set
HSUPA Uplink Rate Adjust Set.
c. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UDCCC to set the following RNC-
level DCCC algorithm parameters:
– DCCC Rate Up Fail Time Threshold
– DCCC Rate Up Fail Monitor Time length
– DCCC Rate Up Fail Penalty Time Length
l Activating the UE state transition algorithm
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In this step,
turn on the following switches of Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch:
– DRA_PS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH
– DRA_PS_NON_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH
– DRA_F2U_SWITCH
– DRA_HSDPA_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH
– DRA_HSUPA_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH
NOTE

The HSDPA state transition license must be activated before the HSDPA state transition switch is
turned on.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UUESTATETRANS to set the measurement
control parameters of the UE state transition algorithm.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER to set the
timer parameters of the UE state transition algorithm.

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 116
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 17 Configuring Dynamic Channel Configuration Control

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UDCCC to set Low Activity Bit Rate
Threshold.
l Activating always online
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UPSINACTTIMER to set the following
timer parameters for checking the low activity of PS users:
– Conversational service T1
– Streaming service T1
– Interactive service T1
– Background service T1
– IMS signal T1
– Conversational service T2
– Streaming service T2
– Interactive service T2
– Background service T2
– IMS signal T2
l Verifying DCCC
1. Traffic-based BE service rate adjustment

Set up an R99 BE service. Check whether the information element (IE)
trafficVolumeMeasurement exists in the RRC_MEAS_CTRL message traced on
the Uu interface, as shown in Figure 17-1. In addition, check whether the value of the
IE periodicalOrEventTrigger is eventTrigger (1), as shown in Figure 17-2.

Figure 17-1 IE trafficVolumeMeasurement

Figure 17-2 IE periodicalOrEventTrigger

2. Throughput-based BE service rate adjustment
a. On the BSC6900 LMT, open the Monitor window. In the Monitor tab page,
double-click UMTS Monitoring > Connection Performance Monitoring.
Create UL Throughput Bandwidth and DL Throughput Bandwidth
monitoring tasks.

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 117
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 17 Configuring Dynamic Channel Configuration Control

b. Set up an R99 BE service and maintain the service without data operations. In
the Connection Performance Monitoring tab page, you can view the bandwidth
reduction in UL Throughput Bandwidth.
3. Link-stability-based BE service rate adjustment

Set up an R99 BE service. Check whether the value of measurementQuantity in the
RRC_MEAS_CTRL message traced on the Uu interface is ue-TransmittedPower
(0), as shown in Figure 17-3. In addition, check whether the value of the IE
periodicalOrEventTrigger is eventTrigger (1), as shown in Figure 17-4.

Figure 17-3 IE measurementQuantity

Figure 17-4 IE periodicalOrEventTrigger

4. Basic-congestion-based BE service rate adjustment
a. On the BSC6900 LMT, open the Monitor window. In the Monitor tab page,
double-click UMTS Monitoring > Connection Performance Monitoring.
Create UL Throughput Bandwidth and DL Throughput Bandwidth
monitoring tasks.
b. Set up an R99 BE service. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP
UCELLCHK to check the cell congestion status on the Uu interface (the cell is
in the basic congestion state). You can view the bandwidth decrease in UL
Throughput Bandwidth in the Connection Performance Monitoring tab
page.
l Verifying the UE state transition algorithm

Set up an R99 BE service and maintain the service without data operations. Check whether
the value of rrc-StateIndicator in the traced RRC_RB_RECFG message is cell-FACH
(1), as shown in Figure 17-5.

Figure 17-5 IE rrc-StateIndicator

l Verifying always online

Set up an R99 BE service and maintain the service without data operations. The message
RRC_RB_REL is not traced on the Uu interface.
l Deactivation Procedure

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 118
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 17 Configuring Dynamic Channel Configuration Control

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH to turn off the
related switches.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In this step,
set Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch to DRA_DCCC_SWITCH.
----End

Example
//Activating DCCC
//Activating the DCCC algorithm
SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_DCCC_SWITCH-1;
//Activating traffic-based BE service rate adjustment
MOD UTYPRABDCCCMC: RabIndex=1, Direction=DOWNLINK, Event4aThd=D1024,
Event4bThd=D16, TimetoTrigger4A=D240, PendingTime4A=D4000,
TimetoTrigger4B=D2560, PendingTime4B=D4000;
SET UDCCC: UlDcccRateThd=D64, DlDcccRateThd=D64,
DcccStg=RATE_UP_AND_DOWN_ON_DCH, UlRateUpAdjLevel=3_Rates,
UlRateDnAdjLevel=3_Rates, UlMidRateCalc=HAND_APPOINT, UlMidRateThd=D128,
DlRateUpAdjLevel=3_Rates, DlRateDnAdjLevel=3_Rates,
DlMidRateCalc=HAND_APPOINT, DlMidRateThd=D128;
//Activating throughput-based BE service rate adjustment
SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_THROUGHPUT_DCCC_SWITCH-1;
SET UDCCC: HsupaDcccStg=RATE_UP_AND_DOWN_ON_EDCH, DchThrouMeasPeriod=100;
MOD UTYPRABDCCCMC: RabIndex=1, Direction=UPLINK, Event4bThd=D64,
DchThrouTimetoTrigger4B=2, DchThrouPendingTime4B=16;
SET UUESTATETRANS: E2FThrouMeasPeriod=30;
//Activating link-stability-based BE service rate adjustment
//Setting the QoS-related parameters
SET UQOSACT: BEQosPerform=YES, BeUlAct1=RateDegrade,
BeUlAct2=InterFreqHO, BeUlAct3=InterRatHO, BeDlAct1=RateDegrade,
BeDlAct2=InterFreqHO, BeDlAct3=InterRatHO, BeUlEvTrigInd=SINGLE,
SrncBeDlRlcQosSwitch=YES, DrncBeDlRlcQosSwitch=YES,
BeUlQos6A1McSwitch=YES, BeUlQos5AMcSwitch=YES, BeUlQos6DMcSwitch=YES;
SET UQUALITYMEAS: UlBeTrigTime6A1=D640, UlBeTrigTime6B1=D2560,
UlBeTrigTime6A2=D1280, UlBeTrigTime6B2=D1280, UlBeTrigTime6D=D240,
UlMeasFilterCoef=D19, DlMeasFilterCoef=D1, DlBeTrigTimeE=64,
ChoiceRptUnitForBeE=TEN_MSEC, TenMsecForBeE=480, DlBeTrigTimeF=64,
ChoiceRptUnitForBeF=TEN_MSEC, TenMsecForBeF=480;
MOD UCELLRLPWR: CellId=1, CNDOMAINID=CS_DOMAIN, MAXBITRATE=12200,
RLMAXDLPWR=-30, RLMINDLPWR=-180, DLSF=D128;
MOD UTYPRABQUALITYMEAS: RabIndex=1, UlThd6a1=1, UlThd6a2=5, UlThd6b1=1,
UlThd6b2=5, StaBlkNum5A=500, Thd5a=280, HangBlockNum5a=512, ThdEa=2,
ThdEb=2;
MOD UTYPRABRLC: RabIndex=1, SubflowIndex=0, TrchType=TRCH_DCH,
OppositeTrchType=TRCH_DCH, DelayClass=1, RlcMode=AM,
AmRlcCfgPara=FLOWCONTROL_PARA, TimeToMoniter=6000, MoniterPrd=1000,
ReTransRatioFilterCoef=1, EventAThred=160, TimeToTriggerA=2,
PendingTimeA=1;
//Configuring inter-frequency handover for the link stability of BE
services
MOD UCELLHOCOMM: CellId=1, InterFreqRATSwitch=INTERFREQ,
CoexistMeasThdChoice=COEXIST_MEAS_THD_CHOICE_INTERFREQ,
CSServiceHOSwitch=OFF, PSServiceHOSwitch=OFF;
SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTER_FREQ_HARD_HO_SWITCH-1;
//Configuring inter-RAT handover for the link stability of BE services
MOD UCELLHOCOMM: CellId=1, InterFreqRATSwitch=INTERRAT,
CoexistMeasThdChoice=COEXIST_MEAS_THD_CHOICE_INTERFREQ,
CSServiceHOSwitch=OFF, PSServiceHOSwitch=ON;
SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH-1;
//Setting the DCCC algorithm parameters

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 119
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 17 Configuring Dynamic Channel Configuration Control

SET UDCCC: UlFullCvrRate=D64, DlFullCvrRate=D64;
MOD UCELLDCCC: CellId=1, UlFullCvrRate=D64, DlFullCvrRate=D64;
//Activating basic-congestion-based BE service rate adjustment
SET UUSERGBR: TrafficClass=INTERACTIVE, THPClass=High, BearType=R99,
UserPriority=GOLD, UlGBR=D16, DlGBR=D16;
SET UEDCHRATEADJUSTSET:
EdchRateAdjustSet=RATE_144KBPS-1&RATE_384KBPS-1&RATE_1280KBPS-1;
SET UDCCC: FailTimeTh=4, MoniTimeLen=60, DcccUpPenaltyLen=30;
//Activating the UE state transition algorithm
SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH:
DraSwitch=DRA_HSDPA_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH-1&DRA_HSUPA_DCCC_SWITCH-1&DRA_PS_B
E_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH-1&DRA_PS_NON_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH-1&DRA_F2U_SWITCH-
1;
SET UUESTATETRANS: CellReSelectCounter=9, D2F2PTvmThd=D64,
D2FTvmTimeToTrig=D5000, D2FTvmPTAT=D1000, F2PTvmTimeToTrig=D5000,
F2PTvmPTAT=D16000, BeF2DTvmThd=D1024, BeF2DTvmTimeToTrig=D0,
BeH2FTvmThd=D64, BeH2FTvmTimeToTrig=D5000, BeH2FTvmPTAT=D1000,
BeF2HTvmThd=D1024, BeF2HTvmTimeToTrig=D0, E2FThrouMeasPeriod=30,
E2FThrouThd=8, E2FThrouTimeToTrig=2, E2FThrouPTAT=4, BeF2ETvmThd=D1024,
BeF2ETvmTimeToTrig=D0, BeF2CpcHTvmThd=D1024, BeF2CpcHTvmTimeToTrig=D0,
BeF2CpcETvmThd=D1024, BeF2CpcETvmTimeToTrig=D0, BeEFach2DTvmThd=D1024,
BeEFach2DTvmTimeToTrig=D0, BeEFach2HTvmThd=D1024,
BeEFach2HTvmTimeToTrig=D0, BeEFach2CpcTvmThd=D1024,
BeEFach2CpcTvmTimeToTrig=D0, FastDormancyF2DHTvmThd=D3k;
SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER: CellReSelectTimer=180, BeD2FStateTransTimer=5,
BeF2PStateTransTimer=5, BeH2FStateTransTimer=5, BeE2FStateTransTimer=5,
BeCpc2FStateTransTimer=5, BeD2EFachStateTransTimer=5,
BeH2EFachStateTransTimer=5, BeCpc2EFachStateTransTimer=5;
SET UDCCC: LittleRateThd=D64;
//Activating always online
SET UPSINACTTIMER:PsInactTmrForInt=240, ProtectTmrForInt=10,
PsInactTmrForBac=240, ProtectTmrForBac=10, PsInactTmrForCon=240,
ProtectTmrForCon=10,PsInactTmrForStr=240, ProtectTmrForStr=10,
PSInactTmrForImsSig=3600, ProtectTmrForImsSig=10;
//Deactivating DCCC
SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_DCCC_SWITCH-0;

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 120
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 18 Configuring Integrity Protection

18 Configuring Integrity Protection

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-011401
Integrity Protection.

Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
– This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
– This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
– This feature is not under license control.

Context
This feature protects the network and user data from being listened and modified illegally.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UUIA (CME single configuration: UMTS
Radio Global Configuration Express > Security Mode Configuration > Integrity
Protection Algorithm; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC
Parameters in Batches) to enable the RNC to support the integrity protection
algorithm.
l Verification Procedure
1. On the BSC6900 LMT, click Trace > UMTS Services, and then double-click Iu
Interface Trace. The Iu Interface Trace dialog box is displayed.
2. Keep UE1 and UE2 in idle mode in CELL1.
3. Use UE2 to call UE1.
4. The messages RANAP_SECURITY_ MODE_COMMAND and
RANAP_SECURITY_MODE_COMPLETE should be displayed. The
chosenIntegrityProtectionAlgorithm IE of the latter message indicates the integrity
protection algorithm.
l Deactivation Procedure

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 121
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 18 Configuring Integrity Protection

1. This feature does not need to be deactivated.
----End

Example
//Activating integrity protection
SET UUIA: IntegrityProtectAlgo=UIA1-1;

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 122
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 19 Configuring Encryption

19 Configuring Encryption

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-011402
Encryption.

Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
– This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
– This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
– This feature is not under license control.

Context
The encryption algorithms supported by Huawei RAN include UEA0 and UEA1.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UUEA (CME single configuration: UMTS
Radio Global Configuration Express > Security Mode Configuration >
Encryption Algorithm; CME batch modification center: not supported) to enable the
RNC to support the encryption algorithm.
l Verification Procedure
1. On the BSC6900 LMT, click Trace > UMTS Services, and then double-click Iu
Interface Trace. The Iu Interface Trace dialog box is displayed.
2. Keep UE1 and UE2 in idle mode in CELL1.
3. Use UE2 to call UE1.
4. The messages RANAP_SECURITY_ MODE_COMMAND and
RANAP_SECURITY_MODE_COMPLETE should be displayed. The
chosenEncryptionAlgorithm IE of the latter message indicates the encryption
algorithm.
5. End the calling. UE1 and UE2 return to the idle mode.

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 123
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 19 Configuring Encryption

6. The messages RANAP_SECURITY_MODE_COMMAND and
RANAP_SECURITY_MODE_COMPLETE should be displayed. The
chosenEncryptionAlgorithm IE of the latter message indicates the encryption
algorithm.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. This feature does not need to be deactivated.
----End

Example
//Activating encryption
SET UUEA: EncryptionAlgo=UEA0-1&UEA1-1;

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 124
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 20 Configuring Open Loop Power Control

20 Configuring Open Loop Power Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020501
Open Loop Power Control.

Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
– This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
– This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
– This feature is not under license control.

Context
This feature enables BSC6900 to roughly estimate path loss based on power measurement
results, network parameter settings, and QoS requirements. Based on the estimation results,
BSC6900 sets the initial transmit power for a UE and a NodeB before connection is established
between them.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure

Activate open loop power control on the downlink DPCH.

1. This feature does not need to be activated on the downlink DPCH.

Activate open loop power control on the uplink DPCH.

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRC (CME single configuration: UMTS
Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic Resource Control Parameter
Configuration > RNC Oriented FRC Algorithm Parameters; CME batch
modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set
the parameters related to uplink DPCH power control.

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 125
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 20 Configuring Open Loop Power Control

NOTE

l The BSC6900 uses the Default Constant Value parameter to calculate the power offset
on the uplink DPCCH (DPCCH_Power_offset). Based on the calculation result, the UE
calculates the initial transmit power on the uplink DPCCH (DPCCH_Initial_Power).
l The formula for calculating DPCCH_Power_offset is: DPCCH_Power_offset = Primary
CPICH DL TX power + UL interference + Default Constant Value. Where,
DPCCH_Power_offset indicates the initial transmit power offset on the DPCCH, Primary
CPICH DL TX power indicates the downlink transmit power on the P-CPICH, UL
interference indicates the uplink interference, and Default Constant Value is the value of
Default Constant Value.
l The formula for calculating DPCCH_Initial_Power is: DPCCH_Initial_Power =
DPCCH_Power_offset - CPICH_RSCP. Where, CPICH_RSCP indicates the received
signal code power (RSCP) that the UE measures on the P-CPICH. An excessively small
value of DPCCH_Power_offset may lead to uplink synchronization failures at the cell edge
during initial link establishment, which affects uplink coverage. An excessively great value
of DPCCH_Power_offset may lead to instantaneous interference on uplink signal
reception, which affects the uplink receiving performance. For details, see 3GPP TS 25.331.

Activate open loop power control on the uplink PRACH.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UPRACHUUPARAS (CME single
configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Channel Configuration >
PRACH Basic Information; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this
step, set the parameters related to the PARCH to appropriate values.
l Verification Procedure
Verify open loop power control on the downlink DPCH
1. Use UE 2 to establish a conversation with UE 1.
2. The message NBAP_RL_SETUP_REQ on the Iub interface shows the value of the
IE initialDL-transmissionPower. This value is used for the downlink DPCH open
loop power control.
Verify open loop power control on the uplink DPCH
1. Check the IE dpcch-PowerOffset, whose value is the same as that of DPCCH Power
Offset, under the IE ul-DPCH-PowerControlIonfo contained in the RRC message
RRC Connection Setup, as shown in Figure 20-1. Based on the dpcch-PowerOffset
value, the UE can further calculate the initial transmit power on the uplink DPCCH
(DPCCH_Initial_Power) and perform uplink open loop power control.

Figure 20-1 ul-DPCH-PowerControlIonfo IE

Verify open loop power control on the uplink PRACH
1. Check whether the IE constantValue whose value is -20 is contained in the
RRC_SYS_INFO_TYPE5 message by referring to Tracing Messages on the Uu
Interface. If the message contains this IE, parameters configured for the UE take effect.
After obtaining values of these parameters, the UE calculates the initial transmit power
and performs open look power control on the uplink PARCH.

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 126
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 20 Configuring Open Loop Power Control

l Deactivation Procedure
1. This feature does not need to be deactivated.
----End

Example
//Activating open loop power control on the uplink DPCH
SET UFRC: DefaultConstantValue=-22;

//Activating open loop power control on the uplink PRACH
MOD UPRACHUUPARAS: CellId=111, PhyChId=1, Constantvalue=-20,
PowerRampStep=2, PreambleRetransMax=20;

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 127
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 21 Configuring Downlink Power Balance

21 Configuring Downlink Power Balance

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020502
Downlink Power Balance.

Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
– This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
– This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
– This feature is not under license control.

Context
In soft handover, error codes in a TPC command may lead to downlink transmit power drift.
The downlink power balance feature solves the problem of power imbalance between links,
thereby achieving best gain in soft handover. The greater the downlink transmit power drift, the
smaller the macro diversity gain. Downlink power balance adjusts power drift and improves
performance of soft handover.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single
configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express >
Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented
Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC
Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Power Control Switch to
PC_DOWNLINK_POWER_BALANCE_SWITCH.
l Verification Procedure
1. On the BSC6900 LMT, choose Trace > UMTS Services and double-click Uu
Interface Trace. The Uu Interface Trace dialog box is displayed.
2. Set Cell Config, Uu Message Type, and Save File. Then click Submit.
3. Move a UE from cell 1 to cell 2 to ensure that the UE performs a soft handover.

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 128
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 21 Configuring Downlink Power Balance

4. Check whether the active cell set update is complete in the traced Uu-interface
messages. Figure 21-1 shows the expected result.

Figure 21-1 RRC_ACTIVE_SET_UPDATE_CMP message traced in Uu interface message
tracing

5. Start Iub interface message tracing on the BSC6900 LMT. Check the value of the
information element dedicatedMeasurementType in the
NBAP_DEDIC_MEAS_INIT_REQ message.
Expected result: the value of dedicatedMeasurementType is transmitted-code-
power(2) shown in Figure 21-2.

Figure 21-2 Information element dedicatedMeasurementType

l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single
configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express >
Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented
Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC
Parameters in Batches). In this step, set
PC_DOWNLINK_POWER_BALANCE_SWITCH to 0.
----End

Example
//Activating downlink power balance SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH:
PcSwitch=PC_DOWNLINK_POWER_BALANCE_SWITCH-1;
//Deactivating downlink power balance SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH:
PcSwitch=PC_DOWNLINK_POWER_BALANCE_SWITCH-0;

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 129
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 22 Configuring Outer Loop Power Control

22 Configuring Outer Loop Power Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020503
Outer Loop Power Control.

Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
– This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
– This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
– This feature is not under license control.

Context
Outer loop power control guarantees the service quality by adjusting the target SIR of inner loop
power control. Outer loop power control is performed on the DCHs carrying the same RRC
connection. When the moving speed of a UE or the multi-path environment changes, the target
SIR needs to be adjusted to ensure a desirable service quality. Otherwise, the service quality
may be bad or will accordingly lead to severe interference and power waste.

The legacy OLPC algorithm enables the target SIR to quickly increase but slowly decrease,
therefore leading to a waste of uplink power. The optimized OLPC algorithm rapidly adjusts the
target SIR in any of the following scenarios: service setup, service reconfiguration, burst
interference, and status switching between insufficient UE transmit power and sufficient UE
transmit power. By doing so, the average uplink target SIR is reduced and the uplink power
consumption is decreased.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure
– Activating outer loop power control
1. Run the Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH
(CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express >
Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented
Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 130
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 22 Configuring Outer Loop Power Control

Parameters in Batches) to activate outer loop power control. In this step, select
the PC_OLPC_SWITCH check box under the PcSwitch parameter.
2. Optional: Run the Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD
UTYPRABOLPC (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global
Configuration Express > Typical Service Configuration > Typical RAB
OLPC Parameters; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step,
set the parameters related to outer loop power control based on the network plan.
– Activating optimized outer loop power control
NOTE
You need to activate outer loop power control before activating optimized outer loop power control.

1. Run the Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH
(CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express >
Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented
Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC
Parameters in Batches) to activate optimized outer loop power control. In this
step, select the PC_OLPC_FASTDOWN_OPTIMIZE_SWITCH check box
under the PcSwitch parameter.
2. Optional: Run the Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UOLPC (CME single
configuration: UMTS radio global Configuration Express > RNC-Oriented
OLPC Algorithm Parameters Configuration > RNC-Oriented OLPC
Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC
Parameters in Batches). In this step, set SIRtargetDownSpeed to an appropriate
value.
3. Optional: Run the Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD
UTYPRABOLPC (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global
Configuration Express > Typical Service Configuration > Typical RAB
OLPC Parameters; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step,
set RefSIRtarget for a DCH to an appropriate value.
l Verification Procedure
– Verifying outer loop power control
1. On the BSC6900 LMT main page, click Monitor. In the Monitor Navigation
Tree pane, choose Monitor > UMTS Monitoring > Connection Performance
Monitoring. The Connection Performance Monitoring dialog box is displayed.
In this dialog box, set Monitor Item to OLPC, Monitor Period to OLPC,
IMSI to an appropriate value, and Carrier Info to Main Carrier. Then, click
Submit to start tracing.
2. Use a UE to initiate an AMR or R99 service.
3. Check whether the target SIR in OLPC has changed. If the target SIR has changed,
this feature has been activated.
– Verifying optimized outer loop power control
1. On the BSC6900 LMT main page, click Monitor. In the Monitor Navigation
Tree pane, choose Monitor > UMTS Monitoring > Connection Performance
Monitoring. The Connection Performance Monitoring dialog box is displayed.
In this dialog box, set Monitor Item to OLPC, Monitor Period to OLPC,
IMSI to an appropriate value, and Carrier Info to Main Carrier. Then, click
Submit to start tracing.
2. Use a UE to initiate an AMR or R99 service.

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 131
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 22 Configuring Outer Loop Power Control

3. When the service is successfully set up, check whether the adjustment value of the
target SIR is the same as the specified value in each OLPC period. If they are the
same, this feature has been activated.
l Deactivation Procedure
– Deactivating outer loop power control
1. Run the Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH
(CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express >
Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented
Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC
Parameters in Batches) to deactivate outer loop power control. In this step, clear
the PC_OLPC_SWITCH check box under the PcSwitch parameter.
– Deactivating optimized outer loop power control
1. Run the Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH
(CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express >
Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented
Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC
Parameters in Batches) to deactivate optimized outer loop power control. In this
step, clear the PC_OLPC_FASTDOWN_OPTIMIZE_SWITCH check box
under the PcSwitch parameter.
----End

Example
//Activating Outer Loop Power Control
SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: PcSwitch=PC_OLPC_SWITCH-1;
//Setting the parameters related to outer loop power control
MOD UTYPRABOLPC: RabIndex=11, SubflowIndex=0, TrchType=TRCH_DCH,
DelayClass=1, BLERQuality=-20;
//Deactivating Outer Loop Power Control
SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: PcSwitch=PC_OLPC_SWITCH-0;

//Activating optimized outer loop power control
SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: PcSwitch=PC_OLPC_FASTDOWN_OPTIMIZE_SWITCH-1;
//Setting the step of uplink target SIR adjustment
SET UOLPC: SIRtargetDownSpeed=10;
//Setting the reference target SIR for a DCH
MOD UTYPRABOLPC: RabIndex=5, SubflowIndex=0, TrchType=TRCH_DCH,
DelayClass=1, RefSIRtarget=107;
//Deactivating optimized outer loop power control
SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: PcSwitch=PC_OLPC_FASTDOWN_OPTIMIZE_SWITCH-0;

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 132
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 23 Configuring Inner Loop Power Control

23 Configuring Inner Loop Power Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020504
Inner Loop Power Control.

Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
– This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
– This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
– This feature is not under license control.

Context
Inner loop power control is also known as fast close loop power control. It is applied for dedicated
channels only. It is used to adjust the transmit power based on the feedback from the physical
layer of the peer end. The UE and Node B can adjust transmit power according to the SIR sent
by each other. In this way, radio link fading can be reduced.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. The feature does not need to be activated.
l Verification Procedure
1. Click the Monitor on the BSC6900 LMT main page. On the Monitor Navigation
Tree pane, choose Monitor > UMTS Monitoring > Connection Performance
Monitoring. The Connection Performance Monitoring dialog box is displayed. In
the displayed dialog box, set Monitor Item to UL SIR and UE Tx Power, and enter
the corresponding IMSI. And then click Submit to initiate the trace.
2. UE 1 calls UE 2. UE 2 rings, answers and starts the conversation.
3. Observe the variation of UL SIR and UE Tx Power in the UL SIR and UE Tx
Power Connection Performance Monitoring window.
4. UE 1 moves in the cell to change radio link quality.
5. When you move UE 1 away from the cell center, UE_1 transmit power increases.

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 133
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 23 Configuring Inner Loop Power Control

6. When you move UE_1 towards cell center, UE_1 transmit power decreases.

Figure 23-1 UL SIR Tracing

Figure 23-2 UE Tx Power Tracing

l Deactivation Procedure
1. This feature does not need to be deactivated.
----End

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 134
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 24 Configuring Admission Control

24 Configuring Admission Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020101
Admission Control.

Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
– Uplink power admission algorithm 4 introduced in RAN14.0 is based on the actual
service load, which is reported by the NodeB. However, some boards cannot support
the measurement of the service load.
– The BTS3812E, BTS3812A and BTS3812AE do not support uplink power
admission algorithm 4.
– The DBS3800 does not support uplink power admission algorithm 4.
– If the 3900 series base station is configured with the WBBPa board or the RRU3801C
20W, uplink power admission algorithm 4 is not supported. In other configurations,
the algorithm is supported.
l Dependencies on Other Features
– This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
– This feature is not under license control.

Context
This feature enables the BSC6900 to perform admission control on UEs requesting R99 services
by considering the status of various resources. It helps ensure the QoS and optimize the allocation
of system resources.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Activating code resource admission
Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLCAC (CME single configuration:
UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Oriented CAC
Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 135
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 24 Configuring Admission Control

Cell Parameters in Batches) with Dl handover credit and code reserved SF set to
an appropriate value.
2. Activating power resource admission
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME
single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters
> Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying
UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, select associated cell-oriented
power admission control algorithms from the Cell CAC algorithm switch drop-
down list, and select an appropriate algorithm from both the Uplink CAC
algorithm switch and Downlink CAC algorithm switch drop-down lists
according to the network plan.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLCAC (CME single
configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell
Oriented CAC Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18
Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to set power resource
admission parameters to appropriate values.
3. Activating NodeB credit resource admission
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCACALGOSWITCH (CME single
configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > CAC
Algorithm Switch Configuration > CAC Algorithm Switch; CME batch
modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step,
select NODEB_CREDIT_CAC_SWITCH from the CAC algorithm switch
drop-down list to turn on the NodeB-level CE admission switch.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME
single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters
> Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying
UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, select CRD_ADCTRL
(Credit Admission Control Algorithm) from the Cell CAC algorithm
switch drop-down list to turn on the NodeB-level credit admission switch.
c. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLCAC (CME single
configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell
Oriented CAC Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18
Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set UL handover
credit reserved SF to an appropriate value.
4. Activating Iub resource admission
This feature does not need to be activated.
l Verification Procedure
The procedure for verifying downlink admission control on R99 non-real-time PS services
based on the number of equivalent subscribers is as follows:
1. Enable a UE in the idle state to camp on CELL_A11.
2. Set the PS service type to interactive on the HLR.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLCAC. In this step, set DL total
equivalent user number of CELL_A11 to 1.
4. Connect the UE to a laptop through the USB port and initiate a PS service.
Expected result: The UE fails to initiate the PS service. In the Iu Interface Trace
window, an RANAP_RAB_ASSIGNBMENT_RESP message sent from the RNC to
the CN is displayed, containing the cause value no-radio-resources-available-in-
target-cell.

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 136
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 24 Configuring Admission Control

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLCAC. In this step, set DL total
equivalent user number of CELL_A11 to 80.
6. Connect the UE to a laptop through the USB port and initiate a PS service.
Expected result: The data service is set up successfully.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Deactivating code resource admission
This feature does not need to be deactivated.
2. Deactivating power resource admission

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single
configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell
Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell
Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Uplink CAC algorithm switch and
Downlink CAC algorithm switch to ALGORITHM_OFF.
3. Deactivating NodeB credit resource admission
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCACALGOSWITCH (CME single
configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > CAC
Algorithm Switch Configuration > CAC Algorithm Switch; CME batch
modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step,
deselect NODEB_CREDIT_CAC_SWITCH from the CAC algorithm
switch drop-down list.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME
single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters
> Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying
UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect CRD_ADCTRL
(Credit Admission Control Algorithm) from the Cell CAC algorithm
switch drop-down list.
4. Deactivating Iub resource admission
This feature does not need to be deactivated.

----End

Example
//Activating code resource admission
MOD UCELLCAC: CellId=11, UlNonCtrlThdForAMR=75, UlNonCtrlThdForNonAMR=75,
UlNonCtrlThdForOther=60, DlConvAMRThd=80, DlConvNonAMRThd=80,
DlOtherThd=75, UlNonCtrlThdForHo=80, DlHOThd=85, UlCellTotalThd=83,
DlCellTotalThd=90, DlHoCeCodeResvSf=SF32;
//Activating power resource admission
MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=11, NBMUlCacAlgoSelSwitch=ALGORITHM_FIRST,
NBMDlCacAlgoSelSwitch=ALGORITHM_SECOND;
MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=11,
NBMCacAlgoSwitch=HSDPA_UU_ADCTRL-1&HSDPA_GBP_MEAS-1&HSDPA_PBR_MEAS-1;
MOD UCELLCAC: CellId=11, MaxHsdpaUserNum=64, MaxUlTxPowerforConv=24,
MaxUlTxPowerforInt=24;
//Activating NodeB credit resource admission
SET UCACALGOSWITCH: CacSwitch=NODEB_CREDIT_CAC_SWITCH-1;
MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=11, NBMCacAlgoSwitch=CRD_ADCTRL-1;
MOD UCELLCAC: CellId=11, UlHoCeResvSf=SF16;
//Deactivating power resource admission
MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=11, NBMUlCacAlgoSelSwitch=ALGORITHM_OFF,
NBMDlCacAlgoSelSwitch=ALGORITHM_OFF;

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 137
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 24 Configuring Admission Control

//Deactivating NodeB credit resource admission
SET UCACALGOSWITCH: CacSwitch=NODEB_CREDIT_CAC_SWITCH-0;
MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=11, NBMCacAlgoSwitch=CRD_ADCTRL-0;

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 138
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 25 Configuring Load Measurement

25 Configuring Load Measurement

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020102
Load Measurement.

Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
– In RAN14.0, the load measurement of total uplink services is introduced, and the
dependencies on NodeB are as follows:
– The BTS3812, BTS3812E and BTS3812AE do not report the actual service load.
– The DBS3800 does not report the actual service load.
– If the 3900 series base station is configured with the WBBPa board or the RRU3801C
20W, the actual service load is not reported. In other configurations, the actual
service load is reported.
l Dependencies on Other Features
– This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
– This feature is not under license control.

Context
This feature is used to measure the load for the load control feature.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. The function of measurement on RTWP, TCP, and non-HSPA power is always
activated. Therefore, this feature does not need to be activated.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single
configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell
Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell
Parameters in Batches). In this step, select HSDPA_PBR_MEAS(HSDPA PBR
Meas Algorithm) and HSUPA_PBR_MEAS(HSUPA PBR Meas Algorithm) from
the Cell CAC algorithm switch drop-down list to activate the cell-level load
measurement for HSDPA and HSUPA.

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 139
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 25 Configuring Load Measurement

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLLDM (CME single configuration:
UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Oriented LDM
Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS
Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set load monitoring parameters, including
the uplink/downlink load reshuffling (LDR) algorithm trigger/release thresholds and
uplink/downlink overload congestion (OLC) algorithm trigger/release thresholds to
appropriate values.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET ULDM (CME single configuration: UMTS
Radio Global Configuration Express > Load Monitoring Parameter
Configuration > LDM Algorithm Parameters of RNC; CME batch modification
center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set parameters
associated with load measurement, report period, and smoothing filter length
according to the network plan.
l Verification Procedure
1. On the BSC6900 LMT, open the Monitor page. In the Monitor navigation tree,
double-click UMTS Monitoring > Cell Performance Monitoring, and create tasks
of monitoring Cell DL Carrier TX Power and RTWP.
2. Check whether the uplink full-bandwidth RX power of the cell is displayed in the
RTWP monitoring window.
3. Check whether the downlink carrier TX power is displayed in the Cell DL Carrier
TX Power monitoring window.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. The measurement on RTWP, TCP, and non-HSPA power has been activated and
cannot be deactivated.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single
configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell
Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell
Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect HSDPA_PBR_MEAS(HSDPA PBR
Meas Algorithm) and HSUPA_PBR_MEAS(HSUPA PBR Meas Algorithm) from
the Cell CAC algorithm switch drop-down list to deactivate the cell-level load
measurement for HSDPA and HSUPA.
----End

Example
//Activating load measurement
MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=100,
NBMCacAlgoSwitch=HSDPA_PBR_MEAS-1&HSUPA_PBR_MEAS-1;
MOD UCELLLDM: CellId=1, UlLdrTrigThd=55, UlLdrRelThd=45, DlLdrTrigThd=70,
DlLdrRelThd=60, UlOlcTrigThd=95, UlOlcRelThd=85, DlOlcTrigThd=95,
DlOlcRelThd=85, HsupAuRetrnsLdTrigThd=70, HsupAuRetrnsLdRelThd=50;
SET ULDM: UlBasicCommMeasFilterCoeff=D6,
ChoiceRprtUnitForUlBasicMeas=TEN_MSEC, TenMsecForUlBasicMeas=100,
DlBasicCommMeasFilterCoeff=D6;
//Deactivating load measurement
MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=100,
NBMCacAlgoSwitch=HSDPA_PBR_MEAS-0&HSUPA_PBR_MEAS-0;

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 140
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 26 Configuring Load Reshuffling

26 Configuring Load Reshuffling

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020106
Load Reshuffling.

Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
– This feature does not depend on the hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
– This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
– This feature is not under license control.

Context
This feature provides multiple load reshuffling policies for a cell in the basic congestion state
to decrease the cell load and increase the access success rate. The load reshuffling policies are
inter-frequency load handover, code reshuffling, BE service rate reduction, CS domain inter-
RAT load handover, PS domain inter-RAT load handover, and downsizing the bit rate of AMR
voice.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure
NOTE

The following section provides the related parameters and commands. The parameter settings depend
on the network plan.
1. Enable the related load reshuffling algorithms.
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME
single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters
> Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying
UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, turn on the following switches
of Cell LDC algorithm switch:
– UL_UU_LDR(Uplink UU LDR Algorithm): UL UU load reshuffling
algorithm

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 141
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 26 Configuring Load Reshuffling

– DL_UU_LDR(Downlink UU LDR Algorithm): DL UU load reshuffling
algorithm
– CELL_CODE_LDR(Code LDR Algorithm): Code reshuffling algorithm
– CELL_CREDIT_LDR(Credit LDR Algorithm):Credit reshuffling algorithm
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNODEBALGOPARA (CME single
configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > NodeB Basic
Information > NodeB Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center:
3.16 Modifying Logical NodeB Parameters in Batches). In this step, turn on
the following switches of NodeB LDC algorithm switch:
– IUB_LDR(IUB LDR Algorithm): NodeB Iub reshuffling algorithm
– NODEB_CREDIT_LDR(NodeB Credit LDR Algorithm): NodeB-level
credit reshuffling algorithm
– LCG_CREDIT_LDR(LCG Credit LDR Algorithm): cell-group-level credit
reshuffling algorithm
2. Set the related thresholds.
– Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLLDM (CME single
configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell
Oriented LDM Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18
Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to set LDR thresholds (UL/DL
LDR Trigger/release threshold and DL State Trans Hysteresis threshold).
– Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLLDR (CME single
configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell
LDR Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying
UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to set code LDR threshold (Cell LDR SF
reserved threshold) and LDR actions.
– Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNODEBLDR (CME single
configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > NodeB Basic
Information > NodeB LDR Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification
center: 3.16 Modifying Logical NodeB Parameters in Batches) to set the cell-
group-level or NodeB-level LDR thresholds (Ul/DL LDR Credit SF reserved
threshold).
– Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLLDR (CME single
configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell
LDR Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying
UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to set the cell-level credit LDR thresholds
(Ul/DL LDR Credit SF reserved threshold).
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET ULDCPERIOD (CME single configuration:
UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Load Control Parameter
Configuration > RNC Oriented LDC Algorithm Cycle Length; CME batch
modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the LDR
period (LDR period timer length).
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single
configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express >
Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented
Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC
Parameters in Batches) to enable the functions used in the LDR actions.
– Inter-frequency load handover

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 142
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 26 Configuring Load Reshuffling

Set HandOver Switch to HO_INTER_FREQ_HARD_HO_SWITCH and
HO_ALGO_LDR_ALLOW_SHO_SWITCH.
– BE service rate reduction
Set Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch to DRA_DCCC_SWITCH.
– CS domain inter-RAT load handover
Set HandOver Switch to HO_INTER_RAT_CS_OUT_SWITCH.
– PS domain inter-RAT load handover
Set HandOver Switch to HO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH.
– Downsizing the bit rate of AMR voice
Set CS Algorithm Switch to CS_AMRC_SWITCH.
l Verification Procedure
The following section takes R99 non-real-time data services as examples to verify BE
service rate reduction in the basic congestion state.
1. Enable a UE in idle mode to camp on CELL_A11.
2. On the BSC6900 LMT, open the Monitor tab page. In the Monitor Navigation
Tree tab page, double-click UMTS Monitoring > Cell Performance Monitoring.
In the displayed dialog box, create a Cell DL Throughput monitoring task.
3. Connect the UE to a laptop through the USB port and initiate a data service. Check
the rb-mappinginfo information element (IE) contained in the RRC_RB_SETUP
message traced over the Uu interface. The value of rrc-Stateinditator is
CELL_DCH.
4. Use the UE to log in to the FTP server and then start FTP downloading. Data
downloading is normal.
5. To simulate the scenario where power load reaches 75%, run the NodeB MML
command STR DLSIM. The RRC_RB_RECFG message is displayed in the Uu
Interface Trace dialog box. In the Cell DL Throughput of the Connection
Performance Monitoring dialog box, you can view the downlink RB rate decrease
configured on the RNC.
6. To stop simulating power load, run the NodeB MML command STP DLSIM. In the
Uu Interface Trace dialog box, the RRC_RB_RECFG message is displayed. In the
Cell DL Throughput of the Connection Performance Monitoring dialog box, you can
view the downlink RB rate increase configured on the RNC.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single
configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell
Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell
Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect the following switches from Cell LDC
algorithm switch:
– UL_UU_LDR(Uplink UU LDR Algorithm): UL UU load reshuffling algorithm
– DL_UU_LDR(Downlink UU LDR Algorithm): DL UU load reshuffling algorithm
– CELL_CODE_LDR(Code LDR Algorithm): Code reshuffling algorithm
– CELL_CREDIT_LDR(Credit LDR Algorithm):Credit reshuffling algorithm
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNODEBALGOPARA (CME single
configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > NodeB Basic
Information > NodeB Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.16

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 143
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 26 Configuring Load Reshuffling

Modifying Logical NodeB Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect the
following switches from NodeB LDC algorithm switch:
– IUB_LDR(IUB LDR Algorithm): NodeB Iub reshuffling algorithm
– NODEB_CREDIT_LDR(NodeB Credit LDR Algorithm): NodeB-level credit
reshuffling algorithm
– LCG_CREDIT_LDR(LCG Credit LDR Algorithm): cell-group-level credit
reshuffling algorithm
----End

Example
//Activating Load Reshuffling
//Enabling load reshuffling algorithms
MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=100,
NBMLdcAlgoSwitch=UL_UU_LDR-1&DL_UU_LDR-1&CELL_CODE_LDR-1&CELL_CREDIT_LDR-
1;
MOD UNODEBALGOPARA: NodeBName="nodeb1",
NodeBLdcAlgoSwitch=IUB_LDR-1&NODEB_CREDIT_LDR-1&LCG_CREDIT_LDR-1;
//Setting load reshuffling thresholds
MOD UCELLLDM: CellId=100, UlLdrTrigThd=55, UlLdrRelThd=45,
DlLdrTrigThd=70, DlLdrRelThd=60, UlOlcTrigThd=95, UlOlcRelThd=85,
DlOlcTrigThd=95, DlOlcRelThd=85, DlLdTrnsHysTime=1000;
//Setting code reshuffling thresholds
MOD UCELLLDR: CellId=100, DlLdrFirstAction=CodeAdj,
DlLdrSecondAction=InterFreqLDHO, CellLdrSfResThd=SF8;
//Setting NodeB-level credit reshuffling thresholds
MOD UNODEBLDR: NodeBName="nodeb1", UlLdrCreditSfResThd=SF8,
DlLdrCreditSfResThd=SF8;
//Setting cell-level credit reshuffling thresholds
MOD UCELLLDR: CellId=100, UlLdrCreditSfResThd=SF8,
DlLdrCreditSfResThd=SF8;
//Setting load reshuffling period
SET ULDCPERIOD: LDRPERIODTIMERLEN=10;
//Turning on load reshuffling function switches
SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_DCCC_SWITCH-1,
CsSwitch=CS_AMRC_SWITCH-1,
HoSwitch=HO_ALGO_LDR_ALLOW_SHO_SWITCH-1&HO_INTER_FREQ_HARD_HO_SWITCH-1&HO
_INTER_RAT_CS_OUT_SWITCH-1&HO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH-1;

//Deactivating Load Reshuffling
MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=100,
NBMLdcAlgoSwitch=UL_UU_LDR-0&DL_UU_LDR-0&CELL_CODE_LDR-0&CELL_CREDIT_LDR-
0;
MOD UNODEBALGOPARA: NodeBName="nodeb1",
NodeBLdcAlgoSwitch=IUB_LDR-0&NODEB_CREDIT_LDR-0&LCG_CREDIT_LDR-0;

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 144
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 27 Configuring Overload Control

27 Configuring Overload Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020107
Overload Control.

Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
– This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
– This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
– This feature is not under license control.

Context
This feature provides load adjustment means to quickly lower the load in overloaded cells.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single
configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell
Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell
Parameters in Batches) to enable the air interface OLC algorithm. Select the
UL_UU_OLC(Uplink UU OLC Algorithm) and DL_UU_OLC(Downlink UU
OLC Algorithm) check boxes under the parameter Switch for Cell Load Control.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNODEBALGOPARA (CME single
configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > NodeB Basic
Information > NodeB Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.16
Modifying Logical NodeB Parameters in Batches) to enable the OLC algorithm.
Select the IUB_OLC(IUB OLC Algorithm) check box under the parameter NodeB
LDC algorithm.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLLDM (CME single configuration:
UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Oriented LDM
Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 145
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 27 Configuring Overload Control

Cell Parameters in Batches) to set UL OLC trigger threshold, DL OLC trigger
threshold, UL OLC release threshold, and DL OLC release threshold.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET ULDCPERIOD (CME single configuration:
UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Load Control Parameter
Configuration > RNC Oriented LDC Algorithm Cycle Length; CME batch
modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the OLC
period (OLC period timer value).
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLOLC (CME single configuration:
UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Overload
Congestion Control Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18
Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to set the parameter related to OLC-
related actions.
l Verification Procedure
1. Run the following BSC6900 MML commands to verify whether the activation is
successful.
– LST UCELLALGOSWTICH
– LST UCELLLDM
– LST UNODEBALGOPARA
– LST ULDCPERIOD
– LST UCELLOLC
NOTE

Consult Huawei engineers about the verification solution to obtain professional technical support.
NOTE

l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single
configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell
Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell
Parameters in Batches) to dienable the air interface OLC algorithm. Clear the
UL_UU_OLC(Uplink UU OLC Algorithm) and DL_UU_OLC(Downlink UU
OLC Algorithm) check boxes under the parameter Switch for Cell Load Control.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNODEBALGOPARA (CME single
configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > NodeB Basic
Information > NodeB Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.16
Modifying Logical NodeB Parameters in Batches) to disenable the OLC algorithm,
Clear the IUB_OLC(IUB OLC Algorithm) check box under the parameter NodeB
LDC algorithm.

----End

Example
//Activating Overload Control
MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=111,
NBMLdcAlgoSwitch=UL_UU_OLC-1&DL_UU_OLC-1;
MOD UNODEBALGOPARA: NodeBName="NodeB1", NodeBLdcAlgoSwitch=IUB_OLC-1;
SET ULDCPERIOD: OlcPeriodTimerLen=3000;
ADD UCELLOLC: CellId=111;
//Deactivating Overload Control
MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=111,

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 146
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 27 Configuring Overload Control

NBMLdcAlgoSwitch=UL_UU_OLC-0&DL_UU_OLC-0;
MOD UNODEBALGOPARA: NodeBName="NodeB1", NodeBLdcAlgoSwitch=IUB_OLC-0;

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 147
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 28 Configuring Code Resource Management

28 Configuring Code Resource
Management

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020108
Code Resource Management.

Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
– This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
– This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
– This feature is not under license control.

Context
This feature provides downlink code tree allocation and reshuffling. Through this, the code
resources can be rationally allocated, therefore increasing the utilization efficiency of the
resources.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure
NOTE
The code allocation function is always activated. The activation procedure applies to only the code
reshuffling function.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single
configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell
Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell
Parameters in Batches), and then enable the required LDR algorithm switches for
resources (CELL_CODE_LDR(Code LDR Algorithm)) through setting the Cell
LDC algorithm switch parameter.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLLDR (CME single configuration:
UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell LDR Algorithm
Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 148
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 28 Configuring Code Resource Management

Parameters in Batches) to set code LDR threshold (Cell LDR SF reserved
threshold) and set CodeAdj(Code adjust) as one of the DL LDR actions.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET ULDCPERIOD (CME single configuration:
UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Load Control Parameter
Configuration > RNC Oriented LDC Algorithm Cycle Length; CME batch
modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the length
of LDR period (LDR period timer length).
l Verification Procedure
1. Enable the UE in the idle state to camp on CELL_A11.
2. Set the PS service type to interactive on the HLR.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLLDR with Cell LDR SF reserved
threshold set to SF8 and Max user number for code adjust to 1.
4. Connect the UE to a laptop on the USB port and enable the UE to initiate a data service.
Expected result: Services are set up on the DCH successfully. You can view the rb-
mappinginfo information element (IE) in the RRC_RB_SETUP message traced over
the Uu interface. In the Cell Code Tree Monitor window, you can view that the
service occupies code SF32(4).
5. Enable the UE to log in to the FTP Internet server and then enable FTP download.
6. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP UCELLCHK to check the cell health status.
The status of cell code congestion is displayed as basic congestion.
7. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV URESERVEOVSF to release the service
that occupies code SF32(1).
8. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP UCELLCHK to check the cell health status.
The status of cell code congestion is displayed as not congested.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single
configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell
Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell
Parameters in Batches), and then deactivate the required LDR algorithm switches
for resources (CELL_CODE_LDR(Code LDR Algorithm)) through setting the Cell
LDC algorithm switch parameter.
----End

Example
//Activating Code Resource Management
MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=111, NBMLdcAlgoSwitch=CELL_CODE_LDR-1;
MOD UCELLLDR: CellId=111, DlLdrFirstAction=CodeAdj, CellLdrSfResThd=SF8;
SET ULDCPERIOD: LdrPeriodTimerLen=10;
//Verifying Code Resource Management
MOD UCELLLDR: CellId=111, CellLdrSfResThd=SF8, MaxUserNumCodeAdj=1;
DSP UCELLCHK: CHECKSCOPE=CELLID, CELLID=111;
RMV URESERVEOVSF: CellId=111, DLOVSFSF=SF32, DLCODENO=1;
//Deactivating Code Resource Management
MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=111, NBMLdcAlgoSwitch=CELL_CODE_LDR-0;

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 149
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 29 Configuring Potential User Control

29 Configuring Potential User Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020105
Potential User Control.

Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
– This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
– This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
– The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see
2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.

Context
This feature reduces system load by modifying cell selection and reselection parameters. In this
way, the cell where the UE camps can be controlled based on cell load.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single
configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell
Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell
Parameters in Batches) to select PUC(Potential User Control Algorithm) from
the Switch for Cell Load Control drop list to enable the cell-oriented PUC algorithm.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET ULDCPERIOD (CME single configuration:
UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Load Control Parameter
Configuration > RNC Oriented LDC Algorithm Cycle Length; CME batch
modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to specify the
period of potential user control. In this step, set PUC period timer length to an
appropriate value.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLPUC (CME single configuration:
UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Oriented PUC

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 150
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 29 Configuring Potential User Control

Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS
Cell Parameters in Batches) to set the cell-oriented PUC algorithm parameters.
l Verification Procedure
1. Configure two cells CELL_A11 and CELL_A12 as inter-frequency neighboring cells
on the NodeB.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLPUC to change the potential user
control threshold for CELL_A11.
3. Run the NodeB MML command STR DLSIM to simulate a situation where the cell
has a high load.
The following messages can be traced on the Iub interface: the
NBAP_SYS_INFO_UPDATE_REQ from the RNC to the NodeB, and the
NBAP_SYS_INFO_UPDATE_RSP message responded by the NodeB.
The updated system information can be traced on the Uu interface. The value of the
Sintersearch signaling element (IE) of the SIB3 of CELL_A11 decreases, and the
values of the Qoffset1s,n and Qoffset2s,n IEs of the SIB11 of CELL_A11 increase.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLPUC to change the potential user
control threshold for CELL_A12.
5. Run the NodeB MML command STR DLSIM to simulate a situation where
CELL_A12 has a high downlink load.
The following messages can be traced on the Iub interface: the
NBAP_SYS_INFO_UPDATE_REQ message from the RNC to the NodeB, and the
NBAP_SYS_INFO_UPDATE_RSP response message from the NodeB.
The updated system information can be traced on the Uu interface. The value of the
Sintersearch IE of the SIB3 of CELL_A11 decreases, and the values of the Qoffset1s,n
and Qoffset2s,n IEs of the SIB11 of CELL_A11 increase.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single
configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell
Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell
Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect the PUC(Potential User Control
Algorithm) check box under the parameter Cell LDC algorithm switch.
----End

Example
//Activating Potential User Control
MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=111, NBMLdcAlgoSwitch=PUC-1;
SET ULDCPERIOD: PucPeriodTimerLen=1800;
ADD UCELLPUC: CELLID=1, SPUCLIGHT=45, SPUCHEAVY=70, SPUCHYST=5,
OFFSINTERLIGHT=-2, OFFSINTERHEAVY=2, OFFQOFFSET1LIGHT=-4,
OFFQOFFSET2LIGHT=-4, OFFQOFFSET1HEAVY=4, OFFQOFFSET2HEAVY=4;
//Deactivating Potential User Control
MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=111, NBMLdcAlgoSwitch=PUC-0;

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 151
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 30 Configuring Cell Barring

30 Configuring Cell Barring

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-021102
Cell Barring.

Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
– This feature does not depend on the hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
– This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
– The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see
2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.

Context
If the cell barring feature is enabled, cells can be barred either automatically or manually to
facilitate operators' maintenance when the cells are running improperly.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure
– Setting automatic cell barring
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URRCTRLSWITCH (CME single
configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Process Switch
Configuration > Process Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.15
Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select
SYS_INFO_UPDATE_FOR_IU_RST and
BARRED_CELL_FOR_CSDOMAIN_RST from the Process switch drop-
down list.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UIUTIMERANDNUM (CME single
configuration: IUPS Configuration Express > CN > IU Timers And Counter
for CN Node; CME batch modification center: not supported) to enable
interruption protection by specifying CN protection timer.

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 152
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 30 Configuring Cell Barring

– Setting manual cell barring
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD URNCALLCELLBLK (CME single
configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Access
Restriction Algorithm Parameters Configuration > The Parameters for
Quickly Blocking all the Cells in the RNC; CME batch modification center: not
supported) to configure parameters related to barring of all cells served by an RNC
in a network.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCNOPALLCELLBLK (CME single
configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Access
Restriction Algorithm Parameters Configuration > The Parameters for
Quickly Blocking all the Cells of the Designated Operator in the RNC; CME
batch modification center: not supported) to configure parameters related to
operator-specific barring of all cells in a network.
l Verification Procedure
– Block the PS domain or the PS domain is disconnected, which prevents UEs from being
admitted to PS services. Perform the following steps to verify whether this feature is
activated:
NOTE

Perform the same verification procedure when blocking the CS domain or the CS domain is
disconnected.
1. Click to display Uu Interface Trace on the BSC6900 LMT. Under Uu Message
Type, select RRC_SYS_INFO_TYPE1.
2. View whether information element (IE) information of the PS domain is contained
in the traced messages. Expected result: PS domain IE information is not contained,
as shown in Figure 30-1.

Figure 30-1 Uu Interface Trace dialog box

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 153
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 30 Configuring Cell Barring

– Block CS and PS domains, CS and PS domains are disconnected, or block the CS domain
and turn on BARRED_CELL_FOR_CSDOMAIN_RST. Perform the following steps
to verify whether this feature is activated:
1. Click to display Uu Interface Trace on the BSC6900 LMT. Under Uu Message
Type, select RRC_SYS_INFO_TYPE3.
2. View whether IE information related to CS and PS domains is contained in the
traced messages. Expected result: The IE information is not contained, as shown
in Figure 30-2.

Figure 30-2 Uu Interface Trace dialog box

– Bar PS services of UEs served by an operator. Perform the following steps to verify
whether this feature is activated:
NOTE

Perform the same verification procedure when barring CS services of UEs served by an operator.

1. Click to display Uu Interface Trace on the BSC6900 LMT. Under Uu Message
Type, select RRC_SYS_INFO_TYPE3.
2. View whether IE information related to CS and PS domains is contained in the
traced messages. Expected result: The IE information is not contained, as shown
in Figure 30-3.

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 154
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 30 Configuring Cell Barring

Figure 30-3 Uu Interface Trace dialog box

l Deactivation Procedure
– Deactivating automatic cell barring
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URRCTRLSWITCH (CME single
configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Process Switch
Configuration > Process Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.15
Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect
SYS_INFO_UPDATE_FOR_IU_RST and
BARRED_CELL_FOR_CSDOMAIN_RST from the Process switch drop-
down list.
– Deactivating manual cell barring
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV URNCALLCELLBLK (CME single
configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Access
Restriction Algorithm Parameters Configuration > The Parameters for
Quickly Blocking all the Cells in the RNC; CME batch modification center: not
supported) to remove parameters related to barring of all cells served by an RNC
in a network.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV UCNOPALLCELLBLK (CME single
configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Access
Restriction Algorithm Parameters Configuration > The Parameters for
Quickly Blocking all the Cells of the Designated Operator in the RNC; CME

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 155
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 30 Configuring Cell Barring

batch modification center: not supported) to remove parameters related to operator-
specific barring of all cells in a network.
----End

Example
//Activating Cell Barring
SET URRCTRLSWITCH: PROCESSSWITCH = SYS_INFO_UPDATE_FOR_IU_RST-1;
SET URRCTRLSWITCH: PROCESSSWITCH = BARRED_CELL_FOR_CSDOMAIN_RST-1;
SET UIUTIMERANDNUM: CnOpIndex=0, CNId=0, StateIndTmr=20000;
//Deactivating Cell Barring
SET URRCTRLSWITCH: PROCESSSWITCH = SYS_INFO_UPDATE_FOR_IU_RST-0;
SET URRCTRLSWITCH: PROCESSSWITCH = BARRED_CELL_FOR_CSDOMAIN_RST-0;

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 156
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 31 Configuring Shared Network Support in Connected Mode

31 Configuring Shared Network Support in
Connected Mode

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-021301
Shared Network Support in Connected Mode. (This feature cannot be configured using the
CME. )

Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
– This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
– This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
– This feature is not under license control.
l Other Prerequisites
– CN must support this feature. When the Iur interface is used, the RNC connected over
the interface must also support this feature.

Context
This feature enables the RAN and CN together to perform UE access restriction in specified
location areas.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. For the CS service, configure two SNAs (for example, SNA1 and SNA2) on the MSC.
2. For the PS service, run the MML command ADD SNA on the SGSN to add SNA,
SNA1, and SNA2.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLACINFO to modify the RACs of
CELL1 and CELL2.
4. Set up a cell. For details, see the BSC6900 UMTS Initial Configuration Guide.
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command to turn on the soft handover switch.

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 157
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 31 Configuring Shared Network Support in Connected Mode

6. Run the BSC6900 MML command to enable the SNA function.
l Verifying the SNA Function of the CS Service
1. On the BSC6900 LMT, click Trace > UMTS Services, and then double-click Iu
Interface Trace. The Iu Interface Trace dialog box is displayed.
2. Keep UE1 and UE2 in idle mode in CELL1.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command to disable the SNA function.
4. Use UE1 to call UE2. The RANAP_COMMON_ID message from UE1 should be
displayed in Iu trace data, and it should include the SNA ACCESS information IE.
5. Move UE1 to CELL2 to trigger soft handover. The RRC_ACTIVE_SET_UPDATE
message from the RNC to UE1 and the RRC_ACTIVE_SET_UPDATE_CMP
message from UE1 to the RNC should be displayed in Uu trace data.
6. End the calling. UE1 and UE2 return to the idle mode in CELL1.
7. Run the BSC6900 MML command to enable the SNA function.
8. Add a mapping relation between IMSI of UE1 and SNA1 on the MSC.
9. Use UE1 to call UE2. The RANAP_COMMON_ID message from UE1 should be
displayed in Iu trace data, and it should include the SNA ACCESS information IE.
NOTE

CELL2 belongs to SNA2 but not SNA1. Therefore, the RRC_MEAS_CTRL message sent from
the RNC to UE1 on the Uu interface should indicate that CELL2 is not in the monitoring cell.
10. Move UE1 to CELL2, which will not trigger soft handover because UE1 does not
belong to SNA_2.
11. End the calling. UE1 and UE2 return to the idle mode in CELL1.
l Verifying the SNA Function of the PS Service
1. Run the MML command ADD SNA on the SGSN to add SNA information.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command to disable the SNA function.
3. Keep the UE in idle mode in CELL1.
4. Establish a PS service on UE1. The RANAP_COMMON_ID message from UE1
should be displayed in Iu trace data, and it should include the SNA ACCESS
information IE.
5. Move UE1 to CELL2 to trigger soft handover. The RRC_ACTIVE_SET_UPDATE
message from the RNC to UE1 and the RRC_ACTIVE_SET_UPDATE_CMP
message from UE1 to the RNC should be displayed in Uu trace data.
6. End the PS service of UE1. UE1 returns to the idle mode in CELL1.
7. Run the BSC6900 MML command to enable the SNA function.
8. Establish a PS service on UE1. The RANAP_COMMON_ID message from UE1
should be displayed in Iu trace data, and it should include the SNA ACCESS
information IE.
9. CELL2 belongs to SNA2 but not SNA1. Therefore, the RRC_MEAS_CTRL message
sent from the RNC to UE1 on the Uu interface should indicate that CELL2 is not in
the monitoring set.
10. Move UE1 to CELL2, which will not trigger soft handover because UE1 does not
belong to SNA_2.
11. End the PS service of UE1. UE1 returns to the idle mode in CELL1.
l Deactivation Procedure

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 158
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 31 Configuring Shared Network Support in Connected Mode

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH to disable the
SNA function.
----End

Example
//Adding two SNAs (for example, SNA1 and SNA2) on the MSC
ADD LOCNOLAI: LOCNONAME="SNA_1", LAI="460020001";
ADD LOCSNA: LOCNONAME=" SNA_1", SNAC=1;
ADD SNAGRPCODE: SNAGRPN="1", SNAC=1;
ADD LOCNOLAI: LOCNONAME="SNA_2", LAI="460020002";
ADD LOCSNA: LOCNONAME=" SNA_2", SNAC=2;
ADD SNAGRPCODE: SNAGRPN="2", SNAC=2;
//Activating the SNA function of the CS Service
MOD UCELLACINFO: CellId=1, LAC=1, SAC=0, CfgRacInd=REQUIRE, RAC=1;
MOD UCELLACINFO: CellId=2, LAC=2, SAC=0, CfgRacInd=REQUIRE, RAC=2;
SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTRA_FREQ_SOFT_HO_SWITCH-1;
SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_MC_SNA_RESTRICTION_SWITCH-1;
//Verifying the SNA function of the CS Service
SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_MC_SNA_RESTRICTION_SWITCH-0;
SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_MC_SNA_RESTRICTION_SWITCH-1;
///Add a mapping relation between IMSI and SNA1 on the MSC
ADD IMSIGRP: IMSIPRE=K'460071104008338, MCCMNC1=K'46002, SNAGRPN1="1";
MOD RNC: RNCID=1, CAPABILITY=SNA-1;
//Deactivating the SNA function
SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_MC_SNA_RESTRICTION_SWITCH-0;
//Adding two SNAs (for example, SNA1 and SNA2) on the SGSN
ADD SNA: PLMN="46002", LAC="1", SNAC=1;
ADD SNA: PLMN="46002", LAC="2", SNAC=2;
//Activating the SNA function of the PS Service
MOD UCELLACINFO: CellId=1, LAC=1, SAC=0, CfgRacInd=REQUIRE, RAC=1;
MOD UCELLACINFO: CellId=2, LAC=2, SAC=0, CfgRacInd=REQUIRE, RAC=2;
SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTRA_FREQ_SOFT_HO_SWITCH-1;
SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_MC_SNA_RESTRICTION_SWITCH-1;
//Adding SNA information on the SGSN
ADD SNAA: BEGIMSI="460071104008338", ENDIMSI="460071104008338",
PLMN="46002", SNAC=1;
//Verifying the SNA function of the PS Service
SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_MC_SNA_RESTRICTION_SWITCH-0;
SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_MC_SNA_RESTRICTION_SWITCH-1;
//Deactivating the SNA function
SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_MC_SNA_RESTRICTION_SWITCH-0;

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 159
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 32 Configuring Intra NodeB Softer Handover

32 Configuring Intra NodeB Softer
Handover

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020201
Intra NodeB Softer Handover.

Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
– This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
– This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
– This feature is not under license control.

Context
This feature enables softer handover within a NodeB. Intra-NodeB softer handover is one type
of soft handover. To perform softer handover, multiple RLs need to be established. In this way,
the uplink resources of a cell in the same uplink resource group can be fully shared. In contrast
to soft handover, softer handover does not consume additional transmission resources on the Iub
interface. Therefore, softer handover can provide higher combination gain and require less
transmission resources on the Iub interface.
Softer handover may occur within the same uplink resource group.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single
configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express >
Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented
Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC
Parameters in Batches). In this step, select
HO_INTRA_FREQ_SOFT_HO_SWITCH under HandOver Switch to enable
soft handover.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UHOCOMM (CME single configuration:
UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > HandOver Parameter

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 160
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 32 Configuring Intra NodeB Softer Handover

Configuration > RNC Oriented Handover Algorithm Common Parameters;
CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to
set Softer handover combination indicator switch to MAY or MUST.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UINTRAFREQNCELL (CME single
configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > Intra-
frequency Neighboring Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add
an intra-frequency neighboring cell.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UINTRAFREQHO (CME single
configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > HandOver
Parameter Configuration > RNC Oriented Intra-frequency Handover
Measurement Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15
Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the parameter related to handover.
l Verification Procedure
1. On the BSC6900 LMT, click Trace > UMTS Services, and then double-click Uu
Interface Trace. The Uu Interface Trace dialog box is displayed.
2. Set parameters in the areas Cell Config, Uu Message Type, and Save File. Then,
click Submit.
3. UE is in idle mode and camps on the CELL1.
4. UE initiates PS Dial-up, and service is set up successfully.
5. UE moves from CELL1 to CELL2, through the Trace Data, it can be observed RNC
sends the RRC_ACTIVE_SET_UPDATE message to UE and UE sends the
RRC_ACTIVE_SET_UPDATE_CMP message to RNC.
6. The data transmission remains normal while UE is moving to CELL2.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UHOCOMM (CME single configuration:
UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > HandOver Parameter
Configuration > RNC Oriented Handover Algorithm Common Parameters;
CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to
set Softer handover combination indicator switch to MUST_NOT.
----End

Example
//Activating Intra NodeB Softer Handover
SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTRA_FREQ_SOFT_HO_SWITCH-1;
SET UHOCOMM: DivCtrlField=MAY;
ADD UINTRAFREQNCELL: RNCId=202, CellId=2381, NCellRncId=203,
NCellId=3291, SIB11Ind=TRUE, SIB12Ind=FALSE, TpenaltyHcsReselect=D0,
NPrioFlag=FALSE;
SET UINTRAFREQHO: FilterCoef=D3, IntraFreqMeasQuantity=CPICH_EC/NO,
PeriodMRReportNumfor1C=D16, ReportIntervalfor1C=D4000;
//Deactivating Intra NodeB Softer Handover
SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTRA_FREQ_SOFT_HO_SWITCH-0;

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 161
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 33 Configuring Intra RNC Soft Handover

33 Configuring Intra RNC Soft Handover

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020202
Intra RNC Soft Handover.

Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
– This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
– This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
– This feature is not under license control.

Context
Intra-RNC soft handover is one type of soft handover. To implement intra-RNC soft handover,
multiple RLs need to be established between NodeBs or within a NodeB. Intra-NodeB softer
handover and intra-RNC soft handover differ in the place where macro diversity combining is
performed. For intra-RNC soft handover, macro diversity combining, which is in selective mode,
is performed within the RNC. In such a case, each RL on the Iub interface carries transmission
data independently. Compared with intra-NodeB softer handover, the intra-RNC soft handover
can be applied to more scenarios.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single
configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express >
Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented
Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC
Parameters in Batches) to enable soft handover.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UINTRAFREQNCELL (CME single
configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > Intra-
frequency Neighboring Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add
an intra-frequency neighboring cell.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UINTRAFREQHO (CME single
configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > HandOver

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 162
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 33 Configuring Intra RNC Soft Handover

Parameter Configuration > RNC Oriented Intra-frequency Handover
Measurement Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15
Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the parameter related to handover.
l Verification Procedure
1. On the BSC6900 LMT, click Trace > UMTS Services, and then double-click Uu
Interface Trace. The Uu Interface Trace dialog box is displayed.
2. Set parameters in the areas Cell Config, Uu Message Type, and Save File. Then,
click Submit.
3. Both UE1 and UE2 are in idle mode and camp on the CELL1.
4. UE1 calls UE2, and the conversation clear.
5. UE1 moves from CELL1 to CELL2, through the Trace Data, it can be observed that
RNC1 sends the RRC_ACTIVE_SET_UPDATE message to UE1, and UE1 sends the
RRC_ACTIVE_SET_UPDATE_CMP message to RNC1.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single
configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express >
Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented
Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC
Parameters in Batches) to set Softer handover combination indicator to disable
the soft handover.
----End

Example
//Activating Intra RNC Soft Handover
SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTRA_FREQ_SOFT_HO_SWITCH-1;
ADD UINTRAFREQNCELL: RNCId=202, CellId=2381, NCellRncId=203,
NCellId=3291, SIB11Ind=TRUE, SIB12Ind=FALSE, TpenaltyHcsReselect=D0,
NPrioFlag=FALSE;
SET UINTRAFREQHO: FilterCoef=D3, IntraFreqMeasQuantity=CPICH_EC/NO,
PeriodMRReportNumfor1C=D16, ReportIntervalfor1C=D4000;
//Deactivating Intra RNC Soft Handover
SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTRA_FREQ_SOFT_HO_SWITCH-0;

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 163
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 34 Configuring Inter RNC Soft Handover

34 Configuring Inter RNC Soft Handover

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020203
Inter RNC Soft Handover.

Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
– This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
– This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
– This feature is not under license control.
l Other Prerequisites
– The Iur interface is configured between adjacent RNCs.

Context
Inter-RNC soft handover is one type of soft handover. To implement inter-RNC soft handover,
multiple RLs need to be established between different RNCs. In such a case, macro diversity
combining is performed by the SRNC connected through the Iur interface. The SRNC sends the
DRNC the radio link establishment signaling over the Iur interface. Based on the signaling, the
DRNC establishes a radio link in the new NodeB. Other procedures are similar to those of intra-
RNC soft handover. This feature enables telecom operators to provide seamless connection
services to subscribers. Inter-RNC soft handover has wider application scenario than soft
handover in other forms, as it can be applied to the RNCs connected through the Iur interface.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single
configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express >
Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented
Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC
Parameters in Batches) to enable soft handover.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UNRNC (CME single configuration: IUR
Configuration Express > Neighbouring RNC > Neighboring RNC; CME batch

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 164
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 34 Configuring Inter RNC Soft Handover

modification center: not supported) or MOD UNRNC (CME single configuration:
IUR Configuration Express > Neighbouring RNC > Neighboring RNC; CME
batch modification center: not supported) to enable cross-Iur soft handover.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UEXT3GCELL (CME single
configuration: Object Group > UMTS Service Configuration and Maintenance
Management > External Cell Configuration > RNC 3G External Cell; CME batch
modification center: 3.19 Modifying RNC External Cell Parameters in Batches)
to add a neighboring RNC cell.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UINTRAFREQNCELL (CME single
configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > Intra-
frequency Neighboring Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add
an intra-frequency neighboring cell.
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UINTRAFREQHO (CME single
configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > HandOver
Parameter Configuration > RNC Oriented Intra-frequency Handover
Measurement Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15
Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the parameter related to handover.
l Verification Procedure
1. On the BSC6900 LMT, click Trace > UMTS Services, and then double-click Uu
Interface Trace. The Uu Interface Trace dialog box is displayed.
2. Set parameters in the areas Cell Config, Uu Message Type, and Save File. Then,
click Submit.
3. Both UE1 and UE2 are in idle mode and camp on the CELL1.
4. UE1 calls UE2, and the conversation clear.
5. UE1 moves from CELL1 to CELL2, through the Trace Data, it can be observed that
RNC1 sends the RRC_ACTIVE_SET_UPDATE message to UE1, and UE1 sends the
RRC_ACTIVE_SET_UPDATE_CMP message to RNC1.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNRNC (CME single configuration: IUR
Configuration Express > Neighbouring RNC > Neighboring RNC; CME batch
modification center: not supported) to disable the cross-Iur soft handover.

----End

Example
//Activating Inter RNC Soft Handover
SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTRA_FREQ_SOFT_HO_SWITCH-1;
MOD UNRNC: NRncId=1,
SHOTRIG=CS_SHO_SWITCH-1&HSPA_SHO_SWITCH-1&NON_HSPA_SHO_SWITCH-1;
ADD UEXT3GCELL: NRncId=1, CellId=2381, CellHostType=SINGLE_HOST,
CellName="2222", CnOpGrpIndex=0, PScrambCode=256, BandInd=Band1,
UARFCNUplinkInd=TRUE, UARFCNUplink=9750, UARFCNDownlink=10700,
TxDiversityInd=FALSE, LAC=2506, CfgRacInd=NOT_REQUIRE, QqualminInd=FALSE,
QrxlevminInd=FALSE, MaxAllowedUlTxPowerInd=FALSE, UseOfHcs=NOT_USED,
CellCapContainerFdd=EDCH_SUPPORT-1, EFachSupInd=FALSE;
ADD UINTRAFREQNCELL: RNCId=1, CellId=221, NCellRncId=2, NCellId=222,
SIB11Ind=TRUE, SIB12Ind=FALSE, TpenaltyHcsReselect=D0, NPrioFlag=FALSE;
//Deactivating Inter RNC Soft Handover
MOD UNRNC: NRncId=1,
SHOTRIG=CS_SHO_SWITCH-0&HSPA_SHO_SWITCH-0&NON_HSPA_SHO_SWITCH-0;

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 165
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 35 Configuring Intra Frequency Hard Handover

35 Configuring Intra Frequency Hard
Handover

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020301
Intra Frequency Hard Handover.

Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
– This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
– This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
– This feature is not under license control.

Context
When hard handover is performed, the existing connection is interrupted before new connection
is set up. Intra-frequency hard handover is performed between cells on the same frequency.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single
configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express >
Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented
Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC
Parameters in Batches) to select HO_INTRA_FREQ_HARD_HO_SWITCH from
the HandOver switch list.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UINTRAFREQNCELL (CME single
configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > Intra-
frequency Neighboring Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add
an intra-frequency or inter-RNC neighboring cell.
3. If cross-Iur hard handover is required, add the neighboring RNC and neighboring RNC
cell. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UNRNC (CME single configuration:
IUR Configuration Express > Neighbouring RNC > Neighboring RNC; CME

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 166
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 35 Configuring Intra Frequency Hard Handover

batch modification center: not supported) to add a neighboring RNC. Run the
BSC6900 MML command ADD UEXT3GCELL (CME single configuration:
Object Group > UMTS Service Configuration and Maintenance Management >
External Cell Configuration > RNC 3G External Cell; CME batch modification
center: 3.19 Modifying RNC External Cell Parameters in Batches) to add a
neighboring RNC cell. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD
UINTRAFREQNCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration
Express > Neighboring Cell > Intra-frequency Neighboring Cell; CME batch
modification center: not supported) to set the neighboring cell relations.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UINTRAFREQHO (CME single
configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > HandOver
Parameter Configuration > RNC Oriented Intra-frequency Handover
Measurement Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15
Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the parameter related to handover.
l Verification Procedure
1. On the BSC6900 LMT, click Trace > UMTS Services, and then double-click Uu
Interface Trace. The Uu Interface Trace dialog box is displayed.
2. Set parameters in the areas Cell Config, Uu Message Type, and Save File. Then,
click Submit.
3. Both UE1 and UE2 are subscribed in HLR to support speech service.
4. 4. Both UE1 and UE2 are in idle mode and camp on the CELL1.
5. UE1 calls UE2, and the conversation is clear.
6. UE1 moved from CELL1 to CELL2, through the Trace Date, it can be observed
RRC_MEAS_RPRT message with 1D event that UE1 sends to RNC1.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single
configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express >
Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented
Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC
Parameters in Batches) to deselect HO_INTRA_FREQ_HARD_HO_SWITCH
from the Handover switch list.

----End

Example
//Activating Intra Frequency Hard Handover
SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTRA_FREQ_HARD_HO_SWITCH-1;
ADD UINTRAFREQNCELL: RncId=1, CellId=111, NCellRncId=1, NCellId=211,
SIB11Ind=TRUE, SIB12Ind=FALSE, TpenaltyHcsReselect=D0, NPrioFlag=FALSE;
ADD UNRNC: NRncId =2,
SHOTRIG=CS_SHO_SWITCH-0&HSPA_SHO_SWITCH-0&NON_HSPA_SHO_SWITCH-0,
HHOTRIG=ON, SERVICEIND=SUPPORT_CS_AND_PS, IurExistInd=TRUE, DPX=1,
RNCPROTCLVER=R5, STATEINDTMR=20, TnlBearerType=ATM_TRANS;
ADD UEXT3GCELL: NRncId=2, CellId=311, CellHostType=SINGLE_HOST,
CellName="311", CnOpGrpIndex=0, PScrambCode=256, BandInd=Band1,
UARFCNUplinkInd=TRUE, UARFCNUplink=9750, UARFCNDownlink=10700,
TxDiversityInd=FALSE, LAC=H'2506, CfgRacInd=NOT_REQUIRE,
QqualminInd=FALSE, QrxlevminInd=FALSE, MaxAllowedUlTxPowerInd=FALSE,
CellCapContainerFdd=EDCH_SUPPORT-1, EFachSupInd=FALSE;
ADD UINTRAFREQNCELL: RncId=1, CellId=111, NCellRncId=2, NCellId=311,
SIB11Ind=TRUE, SIB12Ind=FALSE, TpenaltyHcsReselect=D0, NPrioFlag=FALSE;

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 167
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 35 Configuring Intra Frequency Hard Handover

//Deactivating Intra Frequency Hard Handover
SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTRA_FREQ_HARD_HO_SWITCH-0;

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 168
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 36 Configuring Intra RNC Cell Update

36 Configuring Intra RNC Cell Update

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010801
Intra RNC Cell Update.

Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
– This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
– This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
– This feature is not under license control.

Context
Cell update is mainly used to update the UE information on the network side when the UE
location or behavior is changed. Intra-RNC cell update means cell update within the RNC.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single
configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express >
Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented
Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC
Parameters in Batches) to turn on the RNC-oriented PS BE service state transition
switch.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER (CME single
configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > UE State Transition
Parameter Configuration > RNC StateTrans Timer Parameters; CME batch
modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the
parameters BE DCH to FACH Transition Timer[s] and BE FACH or E_FACH to
PCH Transition Timer[s] to 30s and 60s respectively.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UPSINACTTIMER (CME single
configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > PS Permanent
Online Detection Timer Configuration > PS User Inactive Detecting Timer; CME

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 169
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 36 Configuring Intra RNC Cell Update

batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set
inactivity detection timers for PS services.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCONNMODETIMER (CME single
configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > UE Timers and
Constants Configuration > UE Timers And Constants in Connected Mode; CME
batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the
periodic cell update timer to 5 minutes.
5. Set CELL1 and CELL2 of the RNC as intra-frequency neighboring cells. For details,
see the BSC6900 UMTS Initial Configuration Guide.
l Verifying Cell Update Triggered by Cell Reselection
1. Log on the BSC6900 LMT, click Trace > UMTS Services, and then double-click
Uu Interface Trace. The Uu Interface Trace dialog box is displayed.
2. Set parameters in the areas Cell Config, Uu Message Type, and Save File. Then,
click Submit.
3. Keep the UE in idle mode in CELL1.
4. On the HLR, set the PS service type to background or interactive.
5. Establish an R99 PS service on the UE. The RRC_RB_SETUP message should be
displayed in trace data, and the value of the rrc-stateindicator IE should be
CELL_DCH.
6. Do not send any data from UE for 30 seconds. Then, the network side should perform
UE transition to CELL_FACH state through the RRC_RB_RECFG message, and the
value of the rrc-stateindicator IE should be CELL_FACH.
7. Cause the UE to reselect a new cell so as to trigger cell update. The UE should send
the RRC_CELL_UPDATE message to the RNC, with the cell update cause of cell
reselection, and the RNC should send the RRC_CELL_UPDATE_CONFIRM
message to the UE.
l Verifying Cell Update Triggered by Uplink Data Transmission
1. Log on the BSC6900 LMT, click Trace > UMTS Services, and then double-click
Uu Interface Trace. The Uu Interface Trace dialog box is displayed.
2. Keep the UE in idle mode in CELL1.
3. On the HLR, set the PS service type to background or interactive.
4. Establish an R99 PS service on the UE. The RRC_RB_SETUP message should be
displayed in trace data, and the value of the rrc-stateindicator IE should be
CELL_DCH.
5. Do not send any data from UE for 30 seconds. Then, the network side should perform
UE transition to CELL_FACH state through the RRC_RB_RECFG message, and the
value of the rrc-stateindicator IE should be CELL_FACH.
6. Do not send any data from UE1 for another while. Then, the network side should
perform UE transition to CELL_PCH state through the RRC_RB_RECFG message,
and the value of the rrc-stateindicator IE should be CELL_PCH.
7. Use the UE to transmit data so as to trigger cell update. The UE should send the
RRC_CELL_UPDATE message to the RNC, with the cell update cause of
uplinkdatatransmission, and the RNC should send the
RRC_CELL_UPDATE_CONFIRM message to the UE.
l Verifying Periodic Cell Update
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER (CME single
configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > UE State Transition

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 170
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 36 Configuring Intra RNC Cell Update

Parameter Configuration > RNC StateTrans Timer Parameters; CME batch
modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the
parameter BE FACH or E_FACH to PCH Transition Timer[s] to 65535.
For example,
SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER: BeF2PStateTransTimer=65535;

2. Log on the BSC6900 LMT, click Trace > UMTS Services, and then double-click
Uu Interface Trace. The Uu Interface Trace dialog box is displayed.
3. Keep the UE in idle mode in CELL1.
4. On the HLR, set the PS service type to background or interactive.
5. Establish an R99 PS service on the UE. The RRC_RB_SETUP message should be
displayed in trace data, and the value of the rrc-stateindicator IE should be
CELL_DCH.
6. Do not send any data from UE for 30 seconds. Then, the network side should perform
UE transition to CELL_FACH state through the RRC_RB_RECFG message, and the
value of the rrc-stateindicator IE should be CELL_FACH.
7. Do not send any data from the UE for five minutes so as to trigger periodic cell update.
The UE should send the RRC_CELL_UPDATE message to the RNC, with the cell
update cause of periodiccellupdate, and the RNC should send the
RRC_CELL_UPDATE_CONFIRM message to the UE.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. None
----End

Example
//Activating intra-RNC cell update
SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_PS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH-1;
SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER: BeD2FStateTransTimer=30, BeF2PStateTransTimer=60;
SET UPSINACTTIMER: PsInactTmrForInt=0, PsInactTmrForBac=0;
SET UCONNMODETIMER: T305=D5;

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 171
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 37 Configuring Inter RNC Cell Update

37 Configuring Inter RNC Cell Update

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010802
Inter RNC Cell Update.

Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
– This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
– This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
– This feature is not under license control.
l Other Prerequisites
– The Iur interface is configured between adjacent RNCs.

Context
Cell update is mainly used to update the UE information on the network side when the UE
location or behavior is changed. Inter-RNC cell update means cell update between RNCs.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single
configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express >
Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented
Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC
Parameters in Batches) to turn on the RNC-oriented PS BE service state transition
switch.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER (CME single
configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > UE State Transition
Parameter Configuration > RNC StateTrans Timer Parameters; CME batch
modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the
parameter BE DCH to FACH Transition Timer to 30s.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UPSINACTTIMER (CME single
configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > PS Permanent

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 172
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 37 Configuring Inter RNC Cell Update

Online Detection Timer Configuration > PS User Inactive Detecting Timer; CME
batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set
inactivity detection timers for PS services.
4. Configure intra-frequency neighboring cells controlled by different BSC6900s. For
details, see the Configuring an Intra-Frequency Neighboring Cell.
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNRNC (CME single configuration: IUR
Configuration Express > Neighbouring RNC > Neighboring RNC; CME batch
modification center: not supported) to set the parameter IUR CCH support flag to
ON.
NOTE

IUR CCH support flag is also turned on neighboring BSC6900.
l Verifying Cell Update Triggered by Cell Reselection
1. Log on the BSC6900 LMT, click Trace > UMTS Services, and then double-click
Uu Interface Trace. The Uu Interface Trace dialog box is displayed.
2. Set parameters in the areas Cell Config, Uu Message Type, and Save File. Then,
click Submit.
3. Keep the UE in idle mode in CELL.
4. On the HLR, set the PS service type to background or interactive.
5. Establish an R99 PS service on the UE. The RRC_RB_SETUP message should be
displayed in trace data, and the value of the rrc-stateindicator IE should be
CELL_DCH.
6. Do not send any data from UE for 30 seconds. Then, the network side should perform
UE transition to CELL_FACH state through the RRC_RB_RECFG message, and the
value of the rrc-stateindicator IE should be CELL_FACH.
7. Cause the UE to perform cell reselection from local cell to intra-frequency neighboring
cell so as to trigger cell update. The UE should send the RRC_CELL_UPDATE
message to neighboring BSC6900, with the cell update cause of cell reselection, and
local BSC6900 should send the RRC_CELL_UPDATE_CONFIRM message to the
UE.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. This feature does not need to be deactivated.
----End

Example
//Activating inter-RNC cell update
SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_PS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH-1;
SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER: BeD2FStateTransTimer=30;
SET UPSINACTTIMER: PsInactTmrForInt=0, PsInactTmrForBac=0;
MOD UNRNC: NRncId=2, SuppIurCch=YES;

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 173
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 38 Configuring Intra RNC URA Update

38 Configuring Intra RNC URA Update

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010901
Intra RNC URA Update.

Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
– This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
– This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
– This feature is not under license control.

Context
The UTRAN registration area (URA) update procedure updates the URA of a UE when an RRC
connection exists and the location of the UE is known on the URA level in the UTRAN. Intra-
RNC URA update means URA update within the RNC.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLACINFO (CME single
configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Basic Information > Cell
Basic Information; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set CELL1 and
CELL2 as the intra-frequency neighboring cells that belong to the same location area,
route area, and service area.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLURA (CME single configuration:
UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Basic Information > Cell URA; CME
batch modification center: not supported) to configure CELL1 and CELL2 to make
them belong to different URAs.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single
configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express >
Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented
Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC
Parameters in Batches) to select DRA_PS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH from

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 174
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 38 Configuring Intra RNC URA Update

the Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch drop-down list to turn on the RNC-
oriented PS BE service state transition switch.
4. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH
(CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express >
Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented
Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC
Parameters in Batches). In this step, select the DRA_F2U_SWITCH check box
under the parameter Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch to to enable state
transition from CELL_FACH to URA_PCH directly.
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER (CME single
configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > UE State Transition
Parameter Configuration > RNC StateTrans Timer Parameters; CME batch
modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the Cell
Reselection Timer, BE DCH to FACH Transition Timer, and BE FACH or
E_FACH to PCH Transition Timer parameters to 60s, 10s, and 10s respectively.
6. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UPSINACTTIMER (CME single
configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > PS Permanent
Online Detection Timer Configuration > PS User Inactive Detecting Timer; CME
batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set
inactivity detection timers for PS services.
7. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCONNMODETIMER (CME single
configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > UE Timers and
Constants Configuration > UE Timers And Constants in Connected Mode; CME
batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the
periodic cell update timer to 5 minutes.
8. Configure intra-frequency neighboring cells. For details, see the BSC6900 UMTS
Initial Configuration Guide.
l Verifying URA Update Triggered by URA Reselection
1. Log on the BSC6900 LMT, click Trace > UMTS Services, and then double-click
Uu Interface Trace. The Uu Interface Trace dialog box is displayed.
2. Set parameters in the areas Cell Config, Uu Message Type, and Save File. Then,
click Submit.
3. Keep the UE in idle mode in CELL1.
4. On the HLR, set the PS service type to background or interactive.
5. Establish an R99 PS service on the UE. The RRC_RB_SETUP message should be
displayed in trace data, and the value of the rrc-stateindicator IE should be
CELL_DCH.
6. Do not send any data from UE for 30 seconds. Then, the network side should perform
UE transition to CELL_FACH state through the RRC_RB_RECFG message, and the
value of the rrc-stateindicator IE should be CELL_FACH.
7. When the DRA_F2U_SWITCH switch is on or off, the state transition of UE is
different.
– If the switch is off: Do not send any data from the UE for another while. Then, the
network side should perform UE transition to CELL_PCH state through the
RRC_RB_RECFG message, and the value of the rrc-stateindicator IE should be
CELL_PCH. Make the UE perform a cell reselection between CELL1 and
CELL2. Make UE1 perform another cell reselection after the Cell Reselection

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 175
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 38 Configuring Intra RNC URA Update

Timer[s] expires. Search for the last RRC_CELL_UPDATE_CONFIRM message
in trace data. The value of the rrc-stateindicator IE should be URA_PCH.
– If the switch is on: Do not send any data from the UE for another while. Then, the
network side should perform UE transition to URA_PCH state through the
RRC_RB_RECFG message, and the value of the rrc-stateindicator IE should be
URA_PCH.
8. Keep the UE in URA_PCH state. Perform another cell reselection between CELL1
and CELL2 so as to trigger URA update. The UE should send the
RRC_URA_UPDATE message to the RNC, with the cell update cause of
changeofURA, and the RNC should send the RRC_URA_UPDATE_CONFIRM
message to the UE.
l Verifying Periodic URA Update
1. Do not send any data from the UE for five minutes, to trigger periodic URA update.
The UE should send the RRC_URA_UPDATE message to the RNC, with the cell
update cause of URA reselection, and the RNC should send the
RRC_URA_UPDATE_CONFIRM message to the UE.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. This feature does not need to be deactivated.
----End

Example
//Activating intra-RNC URA update
//Configring the cell information
MOD UCELLACINFO: CellId=111, LAC=1, SAC=1, CfgRacInd=REQUIRE, RAC=1;
MOD UCELLACINFO: CellId=121, LAC=1, SAC=1, CfgRacInd=REQUIRE, RAC=1;
ADD UCELLURA: CellId=111, URAId=0;
ADD UCELLURA: CellId=121, URAId=1;
//Enabling status transition (CELL_FACH/CELL_PCH/URA_PCH)
SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_PS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH-1;
//(Optional) Enabling state transition from CELL_FACH to URA_PCH directly
SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_F2U_SWITCH-1;
//Setting the parameters related to this feature
SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER: BeD2FStateTransTimer=65535,
CellReSelectTimer=180;
SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER: CellReSelectTimer=60, BeD2FStateTransTimer=10,
BeF2PStateTransTimer=10;
SET UUESTATETRANS: CellReSelectCounter=1;
SET UPSINACTTIMER: PsInactTmrForInt=0, PsInactTmrForBac=0;
SET UCONNMODETIMER: T305=D5;

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 176
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 39 Configuring Inter RNC URA Update

39 Configuring Inter RNC URA Update

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010902
Inter RNC URA Update.

Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
– This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
– This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
– This feature is not under license control.
l Others
– The Iur interface is configured between adjacent RNCs.

Context
Inter-RNC URA update means URA update between RNCs.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Configure the Iur interface. For details, see the BSC6900 UMTS Initial Configuration
Guide.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLURA (CME single configuration:
UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Basic Information > Cell URA; CME
batch modification center: not supported) to configure CELL1 and CELL2 to make
them belong to different URAs.
NOTE
Cell1 belongs to RNC_1, Cell2 belongs to RNC_2.
3. On the RNC1 side, run the BSC6900 MML command SET
UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global
Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration >
Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 177
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 39 Configuring Inter RNC URA Update

Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to turn on the RNC-oriented PS BE service
state transition switch.
4. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH
(CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express >
Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented
Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC
Parameters in Batches). In this step, select the DRA_F2U_SWITCH check box
under the parameter Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch to to enable state
transition from CELL_FACH to URA_PCH directly.
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER (CME single
configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > UE State Transition
Parameter Configuration > RNC StateTrans Timer Parameters; CME batch
modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the Cell
Reselection Timer, BE DCH to FACH Transition Timer, and BE FACH or
E_FACH to PCH Transition Timer parameters to 60s, 10s, and 10s respectively.
6. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UUESTATETRANS (CME single
configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > UE State Transition
Parameter Configuration > UE State Translating Parameters; CME batch
modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the
parameter Cell Reselection Counter Threshold to 1.
7. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UPSINACTTIMER (CME single
configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > PS Permanent
Online Detection Timer Configuration > PS User Inactive Detecting Timer; CME
batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set
inactivity detection timers for PS services.
8. Configure intra-frequency neighboring cells. For details, see the BSC6900 UMTS
Initial Configuration Guide.
9. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNRNC (CME single configuration: IUR
Configuration Express > Neighbouring RNC > Neighboring RNC; CME batch
modification center: not supported) to enable the setup of command channels on the
Iur interface.
l Verification Procedure
1. Log on the BSC6900 LMT, click Trace > UMTS Services, and then double-click
Uu Interface Trace. The Uu Interface Trace dialog box is displayed.
2. Set parameters in the areas Cell Config, Uu Message Type, and Save File. Then,
click Submit.
3. Keep the UE in idle mode in CELL1.
4. On the HLR, set the PS service type to background or interactive.
5. Establish an R99 PS service on the UE. The RRC_RB_SETUP message should be
displayed in trace data, and the value of the rrc-stateindicator IE should be
CELL_DCH.
6. Do not send any data from UE for 30 seconds. Then, the network side should perform
UE transition to CELL_FACH state through the RRC_RB_RECFG message, and the
value of the rrc-stateindicator IE should be CELL_FACH.
7. When the DRA_F2U_SWITCH switch is on or off, the state transition of UE is
different.
– If the switch is off: Do not send any data from the UE for another while. Then, the
network side should perform UE transition to CELL_PCH state through the
RRC_RB_RECFG message, and the value of the rrc-stateindicator IE should be

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 178
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 39 Configuring Inter RNC URA Update

CELL_PCH. Make the UE perform a cell reselection between CELL1 and
CELL2. Make UE1 perform another cell reselection after the Cell Reselection
Timer[s] expires. Search for the last RRC_CELL_UPDATE_CONFIRM message
in trace data. The value of the rrc-stateindicator IE should be URA_PCH.
– If the switch is on: Do not send any data from the UE for another while. Then, the
network side should perform UE transition to URA_PCH state through the
RRC_RB_RECFG message, and the value of the rrc-stateindicator IE should be
URA_PCH.
8. Keep the UE in URA_PCH state. Perform another cell reselection between CELL1
and CELL2 so as to trigger URA update. The UE should send the
RRC_URA_UPDATE message to the RNC, with the cell update cause of CHANGE
OF URA, and the RNC should send the RRC_URA_UPDATE_CONFIRM message
to the UE.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. This feature does not need to be deactivated.
----End

Example
//Activating inter-RNC URA update
//Configring the cell information
ADD UCELLURA: CellId=111, URAId=0;
ADD UCELLURA: CellId=121, URAId=1;
//Enabling status transition (CELL_FACH/CELL_PCH/URA_PCH)
SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_PS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH-1;
//(Optional) Enabling state transition from CELL_FACH to URA_PCH directly
SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_F2U_SWITCH-1;
//Setting the parameters related to this feature
SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER: CellReSelectTimer=60, BeD2FStateTransTimer=10,
BeF2PStateTransTimer=10;
SET UUESTATETRANS: CellReSelectCounter=1;
SET UPSINACTTIMER: PsInactTmrForInt=0, PsInactTmrForBac=0;
MOD UNRNC: NRncId=2, SuppIurCch=YES;
MOD UNRNC: NRncId=1, SuppIurCch=YES;

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 179
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0 40 Configuring Direct Signaling Connection Re-
Feature Activation Guide establishment (DSCR)

40 Configuring Direct Signaling
Connection Re-establishment (DSCR)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-021400
Direct Signaling Connection Re-establishment (DSCR).

Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
– This feature does not depend on the hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
– This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
– This feature is not under license control.

Context
During a DSCR procedure, the RNC autonomously releases the RRC connection carrying non-
real-time RABs and then immediately requests the UE to re-establish an RRC connection for
service setup. The RRC connection re-establishment procedure is triggered by an RRC
CONNECTION RELEASE message with the cause value of Directed Signaling Connection
re-establishment sent from the RNC to the UE. A routing area update follows the RRC
connection re-establishment immediately.

The DSCR feature is supplementary to the feature WRFD-020605 SRNS Relocation
Introduction Package. When the Iur resources are insufficient or SRNS relocation fails, the
DSCR feature ensures uninterrupted PS services.

Only background and interactive services support this feature. The DSCR re-establishes a service
through the routing area update procedure. Therefore, this feature is applicable only to PS
services.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNRNC (CME single configuration: IUR
Configuration Express > Neighbouring RNC > Neighboring RNC; CME batch

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 180
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0 40 Configuring Direct Signaling Connection Re-
Feature Activation Guide establishment (DSCR)

modification center: not supported). In this step, set Handover Type for PS BE
Traffic to CORRM_SRNSR_PSBE_DSCR.
NOTE

The default value of Handover Type for PS BE Traffic is
CORRM_SRNSR_PSBE_RELOC. You can modify the value according to the actual
requirements.
2. If the Iur interface exists, run the BSC6900 MML command SET
UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global
Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration >
Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15
Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to turn on the switches related to SRNS
relocation.
3. If the UE is not in the CELL_DCH state, run the BSC6900 MML command SET
URRCTRLSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global
Configuration Express > Process Switch Configuration > Process Switch; CME
batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to turn on
the DSCR switch for the DRNC.
l Verification Procedure
1. Start Uu interface tracing on the BSC6900 LMT, as shown in Figure 40-1 and Figure
40-2.

Figure 40-1 Uu interface tracing dialog box

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 181
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0 40 Configuring Direct Signaling Connection Re-
Feature Activation Guide establishment (DSCR)

Figure 40-2 RRC CONNECTION RELEASE

2. Use the UE to establish a PS BE service. Perform a handover by adding a cell under
the DRNC and then removing the source cell.
3. View the RRC_RRC_CONN_REL message traced on the Uu interface. Check the
value of the IE releaseCause in the rrcConnectionRelease of the message. If the
value is Directed Signaling Connection re-establishment, this feature has been
activated.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNRNC (CME single configuration: IUR
Configuration Express > Neighbouring RNC > Neighboring RNC; CME batch
modification center: not supported). In this step, set Handover Type for PS BE
Traffic to CORRM_SRNSR_PSBE_RELOC.
----End

Example
//Activating Direct Signaling Connection Re-establishment (DSCR)
MOD UNRNC: NRncId=20, PsBeProcType=CORRM_SRNSR_PSBE_DSCR;
SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH:
SrnsrSwitch=SRNSR_DSCR_IUR_RESRCE_SWITCH-1&SRNSR_DSCR_LOC_SEPRAT_SWITCH-1
&SRNSR_DSCR_PROPG_DELAY_SWITCH-1&SRNSR_DSCR_SEPRAT_DUR_SWITCH-1;
SET URRCTRLSWITCH: PROCESSSWITCH=DRNC_DIRECT_DSCR-1;
//Deactivating Direct Signaling Connection Re-establishment (DSCR)
MOD UNRNC: NRncId=20, PsBeProcType=CORRM_SRNSR_PSBE_RELOC;

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 182
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0 41 Configuring CS Fallback Guarantee for LTE Emergency
Feature Activation Guide Calls

41 Configuring CS Fallback Guarantee for
LTE Emergency Calls

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-140102
CS Fallback Guarantee for LTE Emergency Calls. For details about how to configure this feature
on the LTE side, see the related documents provided by the LTE equipment vendor.

Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
– This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
– This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
– This feature is not under license control.
l Other Prerequisites
– UEs of Release 8 or later support PS handovers from LTE to UMTS and CSFB from
LTE to UMTS. In addition, the message sent to the MME carries an emergency call
indicator.
– The eNodeB supports PS handovers from LTE to UMTS and CSFB from LTE to UMTS.
In addition, the handover request sent to the RNC carries CSFB High Priority.
– The CN supports PS handovers from LTE to UMTS and CSFB from LTE to UMTS. In
addition, the INITIAL CONTEXT SETUP REQUEST message sent from the MME to
the eNodeB carries CS Fallback High Priority.

Context
In the CS Fall Back (CSFB) process for an LTE emergency call, a UE can initiate an emergency
call on the UMTS network only after the PS service has been admitted to the UMTS network.
This feature ensures the success of PS admission by decreasing the PS service rate or performing
resource preemption.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 183
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0 41 Configuring CS Fallback Guarantee for LTE Emergency
Feature Activation Guide Calls

1. Configure the data on the LTE side, including setting the neighbor relationships
between cells.
For details about how to configure this feature on the LTE side, see the related
documents provided by the LTE equipment vendor. If the LTE equipment is provided
by Huawei, see the LTE document CS Fallback Parameter Description.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single
configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express >
Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented
Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC
Parameters in Batches). In this step, select HO_L2U_EMGCALL_SWITCH
under HandOver Switch to enable this feature.
l Verification Procedure
After this feature is activated, the incoming LTE-to-UMTS PS handover success rate caused
by LTE emergency calls increases.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single
configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express >
Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented
Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC
Parameters in Batches). In this step, clear HO_L2U_EMGCALL_SWITCH under
HandOver Switch to disable this feature.
----End

Example
//Activating CS Fallback Guarantee for LTE Emergency Calls
SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch= HO_L2U_EMGCALL_SWITCH-1;
//Deactivating CS Fallback Guarantee for LTE Emergency Calls
SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch= HO_L2U_EMGCALL_SWITCH-0;

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 184
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 42 Configuring NodeB Clock

42 Configuring NodeB Clock

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210501
NodeB Clock.

Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
– Ensure that a clock link is available before configuring the LINE clock source.
– Ensure that the GPS card is configured before configuring the GPS card clock source.
– Ensure that the USCU is configured before configuring the BITS clock source.
– The BTS3006C and BTS3002E do not support the GPS clock input.
– The BTS3902E cannot support GPS and BITS clock.
l Dependencies on Other Features
– This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
– This feature is not under license control.

Context
In normal operation, the base station needs to track an external clock to calibrate its main clock
frequency. The synchronization of the base station clock provides the basis for the frame
synchronization.
The base station can work in multiple clock synchronization modes:
l Synchronization with the Iub clock (default mode)
l Synchronization with GPS
l Synchronization with the BITS clock
l Synchronization with the IP clock
l Synchronization with the synchronous Ethernet clock (NodeB V200R014)
l Synchronization with the multi-mode sharing clock (NodeB V200R014)
l Synchronization with the PTP clock (NodeB V100R014)
In addition to the preceding synchronization modes, the MBTS internal clock can work in free-
run mode to keep the MBTS running.

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 185
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 42 Configuring NodeB Clock

Procedure
l NodeB V200R014

Activation Procedure

1. Run the NodeB MML command SET CLKMODE (CME single configuration:
NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Basic Information > Clock
Source > System Clock Link Management; CME batch modification center: not
supported) to set the working mode of the reference clock source.

Table 42-1 Parameters

Clock Parameter Name Parameter Value
Synchronization
Modes

Synchronization with the Selected Clock Source LINECLK(Line Clock)
Iub clock (default mode)

Synchronization with GPS(GPS Clock)
GPS

Synchronization with the BITS(BITS Clock)
BITS clock

Synchronization with the IPCLK(IP Clock)
IP clock

Synchronization with the SYNCETH(SyncEth
synchronous Ethernet Clock)
clock

Synchronization with the PEERCLK(Peer Clock)
multi-mode sharing clock

Verification Procedure

1. Run the NodeB MML command DSP CLKSTAT to query the status of the current
clock source.
Expected result: The value of Current Clock Source State is Normal.

Deactivation Procedure

This feature does not need to be deactivated.
l NodeB V100R014

Activation Procedure

1. Run the NodeB MML command SET CLKMODE (CME single configuration:
NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Basic Information > Clock
Source > System Clock Link Management; CME batch modification center: not
supported) to set the working mode of the reference clock source.

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 186
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 42 Configuring NodeB Clock

Table 42-2 Parameters
Clock Parameter Name Parameter Value
Synchronization
Modes

Synchronization with the Clock Source Type LINE(LINE clock
Iub clock (default mode) source)

Synchronization with GPSCARD(GPS card
GPS clock source)

Synchronization with the BITS(BITS clock source)
BITS clock

Synchronization with the IPCLK(IP clock source)
IP clock

Synchronization with the PTP(PTP clock source)
PTP clock

Verification Procedure
1. Run the NodeB MML command DSP CLKSTAT to query the status of the current
clock source.
Expected result: The value of Current Clock Source State is Normal.
Deactivation Procedure
This feature does not need to be deactivated.
----End

Example
l NodeB V200R014
//Activation procedure
//Synchronization with the Iub clock
SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=LINECLK;
//Synchronization with the GPS clock
SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=GPS, SRCNO=0;
//Synchronization with the BITS clock
SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=BITS;
//Synchronization with the IP clock
SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=IPCLK;
//Synchronization with the synchronous Ethernet clock
SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=SYNCETH;
//Synchronization with the multi-mode sharing clock
SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=PEERCLK;
//Verification procedure
DSP CLKSTAT: SN=7;
l NodeB V100R014
//Activation procedure
//Synchronization with the Iub clock
SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=LINE;
//Synchronization with the GPS clock
SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=GPSCARD;
//Synchronization with the BITS clock

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 187
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 42 Configuring NodeB Clock

SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=BITS;
//Synchronization with the IP clock
SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=IPCLK;
//Synchronization with the PTP clock
SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=PTP;
//Verification procedure
DSP CLKSTAT:;

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 188
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0 43 Configuring Dynamic AAL2 Connections in Iub/IuCS/Iur
Feature Activation Guide Interface

43 Configuring Dynamic AAL2
Connections in Iub/IuCS/Iur Interface

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-05030104
Dynamic AAL2 Connections in Iub/IuCS/Iur Interface.

Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
– BTS3902E does not support this feature.
l Dependencies on Other Features
– This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
– This feature is not under license control.
l Others
– The RAN is based on ATM transmission.

Context
In ATM transmission mode, the ATM Adaptation Layer type 2 (AAL2) path is used to carry the
user plane data on the Iub/Iur/Iu-CS interface. The AAL2 path is provided according to service
type (conversational, streaming, interactive, and background) and bearer type (R99, HSDPA,
and HSUPA). Physical bandwidth resources are dynamically allocated to delay-sensitive
services and delay-insensitive services, which improves the utilization of transmission links on
the Iub interface.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ADJNODE (CME single configuration:
NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > Adjacent
Node, IUR Configuration Express > ATM Transport > Adjacent Node, IUCS
Configuration Express > ATM Transport > Adjacent Node; CME batch
modification center: not supported) to add an adjacent node. Set the parameter
Adjacent Node Type to IUB, IUR, or IUCS, and the parameter Transport Type to
ATM. If the node is the lowest leaf node of the switching network, set the parameter
Is Root Node to YES; otherwise, set the parameter Is Root Node to NO.

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 189
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0 43 Configuring Dynamic AAL2 Connections in Iub/IuCS/Iur
Feature Activation Guide Interface

NOTE
For an adjacent node on the Iur or Iu-CS interface, the parameter Adjacent Node Type of its upper-
level hub node must be NNI_AAL2SWITCH; for an adjacent node on the Iub interface, the
parameter Adjacent Node Type of its upper-level hub node must be UNI_AAL2SWITCH.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AAL2PATH (CME single configuration:
NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > AAL2 Path,
IUCS Configuration Express > ATM Transport > AAL2 Path, IUR
Configuration Express > ATM Transport > AAL2 Path; CME batch modification
center: not supported) to add an AAL2 path. The parameters CARRYVPI and
CARRYVCI must be consistent with those of the AAL2 path configured on the peer
end.
l Verification Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP AAL2PATH to query the status of the AAL2
path on the Iub interface.
Expected result: The value of Operation state is Available.
2. In the Iub/Iu-CS ATM transmission scenario, a UE in idle state camps on CELL1 and
the control plane is correctly configured. Originate the speech and data services. If the
service access is normal, the AAL2 path on the Iub/Iu-CS interface is set up
successfully.
3. Optional: In the ATM transmission scenario on the Iur interface, a UE in idle state
camps on CELL1 and the control plane is correctly configured. Originate a cross-Iur
handover. If the handover is successful, the AAL2 path on the Iur interface is set up
successfully.
l Deactivation Procedure
This feature does not need to be deactivated.
----End

Example
//Activating Dynamic AAL2 Connections in Iub/IuCS/Iur Interface
//Adding an adjacent node
ADD ADJNODE: ANI=2, NAME="MSC1", NODET=IUCS, TRANST=ATM, IsROOTNODE=YES,
DPX=1;
//Adding an AAL2 path
ADD AAL2PATH: ANI=2, PATHID=1, CARRYT=UNI, CARRYF=1, CARRYSN=14,
CARRYUNILNKN=0, RSCGRPFLAG=NO, VPI=12, VCI=126, TXTRFX=111, RXTRFX=111,
AAL2PATHT=R99;

//Verifying Dynamic AAL2 Connections in Iub/IuCS/Iur Interface
DSP AAL2PATH: ANI=2, PATHID=1;

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 190
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0 44 Configuring Permanent AAL5 Connections for Control
Feature Activation Guide Plane Traffic

44 Configuring Permanent AAL5
Connections for Control Plane Traffic

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-05030105
Permanent AAL5 Connections for Control Plane Traffic.

Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
– BTS3902E does not support this feature.
l Dependencies on Other Features
– This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
– This feature is not under license control.
l Others
– The equipment data has been configured for the ATM transmission on the Iub/Iu/Iur
interface.
NOTE
For details about how to configure the equipment data, see section Configuring the Equipment
Data of the BSC6900UMTS Initial Configuration Guide.

Context
In the RAN in ATM transmission mode, AAL5 connections are used to bear the Iub/Iur/Iu
signaling and the Iub OAM traffic. As specified by 3GPP, User-Network Interface SAAL (UNI-
SAAL) is used for control-plane connections on the Iub interface and Network-Network
Interface SAAL (NNI-SAAL) is used for control-plane connections on the Iur/Iu interface.
AAL5 connections on the Iub/Iur/Iu interface are all set up by configuring Signaling ATM
adaptation layer (SAAL) links.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SAALLNK (CME single configuration:
NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > SAAL Signaling
Link, IUCS Configuration Express > ATM Transport > SAAL Signaling Link,

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 191
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0 44 Configuring Permanent AAL5 Connections for Control
Feature Activation Guide Plane Traffic

IUR Configuration Express > ATM Transport > SAAL Signaling Link; CME
batch modification center: not supported) to add an SAAL link. If the interface is Iub,
set the parameter Interface type to UNI. If the interface is Iu or Iur, set Interface
type to NNI.
2. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UNCP (CME single
configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport >
NCP Link; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a NodeB Control
Port (NCP) link.
3. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCCP (CME single
configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport >
CCP Link; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a Communication
Control Port (CCP) link.
NOTE

An SAAL link can carry only one NCP or CCP link. Therefore, choose to perform step 2 or
step 3 based on the actual situation.
l Verification Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP SAALLNK to query the status of the SAAL
link.
Expected result: The value of SAAL link state is AVAILABLE.
l Deactivation Procedure
NOTE

An SAAL link can carry only one NCP or CCP link. Therefore, choose to remove the NCP or CCP
link carried by the SAAL link, based on the actual situation.
1. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV UNCP (CME single
configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport >
NCP Link; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the NCP link
carried by the SAAL link.
2. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV UCCP (CME single
configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport >
CCP Link; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the CCP link
carried by the SAAL link.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV SAALLNK (CME single configuration:
NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > SAAL Signaling
Link, IUCS Configuration Express > ATM Transport > SAAL Signaling Link,
IUR Configuration Express > ATM Transport > SAAL Signaling Link; CME
batch modification center: not supported) to remove the SAAL link.
----End

Example
//Activating Permanent AAL5 Connections for Control Plane Traffic
ADD SAALLNK: SRN=1, SN=2, SAALLNKN=10, CARRYT=UNI, CARRYSRN=0,
CARRYSN=14, CARRYUNILNKN=2, CARRYVPI=10, CARRYVCI=55, TXTRFX=100,
RXTRFX=100, SAALLNKT=UNI;
ADD UCCP: NODEBNAME="NodeB1", PN=0, CARRYLNKT=SAAL, SAALLNKN=10;
//Verifying Permanent AAL5 Connections for Control Plane Traffic
DSP SAALLNK: SRN=1, SN=2, SAALLNKN=10;
//Deactivating Permanent AAL5 Connections for Control Plane Traffic
RMV UCCP: NODEBNAME="NodeB1", PN=0;
RMV SAALLNK: SRN=1, SN=2, SAALLNKN=10;

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 192
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0 45 Configuring Call Admission Based on Used AAL2 Path
Feature Activation Guide Bandwidth

45 Configuring Call Admission Based on
Used AAL2 Path Bandwidth

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-05030106
Call Admission Based on Used AAL2 Path Bandwidth.

Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
– BTS3902E does not support this feature.
l Dependencies on Other Features
– This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
– This feature is not under license control.

Context
With the Call Admission Based on Used AAL2 Path Bandwidth (AAL2 CAC) feature, admission
requests are accepted or rejected selectively. This feature maximizes the usage of transmission
resources in addition to ensuring the QoS.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATMTRF (CME single configuration:
NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > ATM Traffic
Record; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set parameters to
appropriate values. For example, set Service type to NRTVBR, Peak cell rate to
100, and Sustainable cell rate to 80.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AAL2PATH (CME single configuration:
NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > AAL2 Path;
CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an ATM Adaptation Layer type
2 (AAL2) path. In this step, set TXTRFX and RXTRFX in accordance with the
settings in step 1.
l Verification Procedure

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 193
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0 45 Configuring Call Admission Based on Used AAL2 Path
Feature Activation Guide Bandwidth

1. Assume that the verification is based on the preceding parameter settings and the peer
end is configured with the corresponding AAL2 path link. Originate a PS interactive
service. If the data rate is 64 kbit/s, the UE successfully accesses the network.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP AAL2PATH to view that the used bandwidth
of the path is about 37 kbit/s, which is the admission bandwidth of the control plane.
3. Originate a PS interactive service. If the data rate is 128 kbit/s, the UE fails to access
the network.
l Deactivation Procedure
This feature does not need to be deactivated.
----End

Example
//Activation procedure
ADD ATMTRF: TRFX=100, ST=NRTVBR, UT=CELL/S, PCR=100, SCR=80;
ADD AAL2PATH: ANI=0, PATHID=10, CARRYT=UNI, CARRYF=1, CARRYSN=14,
CARRYUNILNKN=0, RSCGRPFLAG=NO, VPI=12, VCI=126, TXTRFX=100, RXTRFX=100,
AAL2PATHT=R99;

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 194
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0 46 Configuring CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, UBR ATM QoS
Feature Activation Guide Classes

46 Configuring CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, UBR
ATM QoS Classes

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature
"WRFD-05030107 CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, UBR ATM QoS Classes".

Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
– BTS3902E does not support this feature.
l Dependencies on Other Features
– This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
– This feature is not under license control.

Context
Huawei RAN supports service type of ATM :
l Constant Bit Rate (CBR)
l Real time Variable Bit Rate (rt-VBR)
l Non-real time Variable Bit Rate (nrt-VBR)
l Unspecified Bit Rate (UBR)
l Enhanced unspecified Bit Rate (UBR+)
Configuring UBR+ QoS Class feature, please refer to Configuring UBR+ ATM QoS Class.
The traffic volume on the VCC depends on the parameters (SCR, PCR, and CDVT) associated
with each type of ATM service. Generally, rt-VBR is applicable to delay-sensitive services and
nrt-VBR is applicable to delay-insensitive services. In addition, UBR and nrt-VBR are applicable
to None Delay Sensitive service mapping on the HSDPA/HSUPA.
It is recommended for configuring service type of ATM shown as Figure 46-1.

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 195
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0 46 Configuring CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, UBR ATM QoS
Feature Activation Guide Classes

Figure 46-1 Service type of ATM

Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATMTRF (CME single configuration:
NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > ATM Traffic
Record; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an ATM traffic record.
To add more ATM traffic records, run this command repeatedly.
l Verification Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST ATMTRF to query the ATM traffic
configuration. The expected result is that the query result is consistent with the
configuration information.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV ATMTRF (CME single configuration:
NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > ATM Traffic
Record; CME batch modification center: not supported) to delete an ATM traffic
record. To delete more ATM traffic records, run this command repeatedly.
----End

Example
//Activating CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, UBR ATM QoS Classes
ADD ATMTRF: TRFX=105, ST=CBR, UT=CELL/S, PCR=1000;
//Verifying CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, UBR ATM QoS Classes
LST ATMTRF: TRFX=105;
Deactivating CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, UBR ATM QoS Classes
RMV ATMTRF: TRFX=105;

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 196
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 47 Configuring F5

47 Configuring F5

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-05030110
F5. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
– VCL CC is applicable to the AEUa, AOUa, AOUc, UOIa(ATM), and UOIc boards of
the BSC6900.
– VCL PM is applicable to the AOUc and UOIc boards of the BSC6900.
– Only BSC6900 does not support the latency detection based on IE LB.
– Only 3900 series Base Station supports the passive detection based on IE LB.
– BTS3902E does not support this feature.
l Dependencies on Other Features
– This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
– This feature is not under license control.

Context
This feature supports:
l ATM CC provides E2E continuity detection on the VCL.
l PM function provides performance monitoring on the VCL.
l It is recommended to activate VCL CC before activating VCL PM.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT VCLCC to activate the VCL CC or loopback
function for a link. To activate the function for multiple links, run this command
repeatedly. There are three types of links, that is, SAALLNK, AAL2PATH, and
IPOAPVC.

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 197
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 47 Configuring F5

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT VCLPM to activate the VCL PM function
for a link. To activate the function for multiple links, run this command repeatedly.
There are three types of links, that is, SAALLNK, AAL2PATH, and IPOAPVC.
l Verification Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP VCLCC to query the CC result of a VCL.
– If the VCL CC is activated and the PVC is functional, the SINK activated state
and SOURCE activated state are UP, and LOC, AIS, and RDI alarm state is
normal.
– If the loopback is activated and the PVC is functional, the loopback query result
is UP, and LOC, AIS, and RDI alarm state is normal.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP VCLPM to query the PM result of a VCL.
– If the VCL PM is activated, the SINK activated state and SOURCE activated
state are PM_UP, and PM Active Fail Alarm is Normal.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA VCLCC to deactivate the VCL CC or
loopback function for a link. To deactivate the function for multiple links, run this
command repeatedly. There are three types of links, that is, SAALLNK, AAL2PATH,
and IPOAPVC.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA VCLPM to deactivate the VCL PM for a
link. To deactivate the function for multiple links, run this command repeatedly. There
are three types of links, that is, SAALLNK, AAL2PATH, and IPOAPVC.
----End

Example
//Activating F5
ACT VCLCC: LNKT=SAALLNK, SRN=3, SN=2, SAALLNKN=0, VCLTYPE=CC;
ACT VCLPM: LNKT=SAALLNK, SRN=3, SN=2, SAALLNKN=0;
//Verifying F5
DSP VCLCC: LNKT=SAALLNK, SRN=3, SN=2, SAALLNKN=0;
DSP VCLPM: LNKT=SAALLNK, SRN=3, SN=2, SAALLNKN=0;
//Deactivating F5
DEA VCLCC: LNKT=SAALLNK, SRN=3, SN=2, SAALLNKN=0;
DEA VCLPM: LNKT=SAALLNK, SRN=3, SN=2, SAALLNKN=0;

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 198
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 48 Configuring UBR+ ATM QoS Class

48 Configuring UBR+ ATM QoS Class

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature "WRFD-050305
UBR+ ATM QoS Class".

Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
– BTS3902E does not support this feature.
l Dependencies on Other Features
– This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
– This feature is not under license control.
l Other Prerequisites
– The basic information about the BSC6900 is configured. For details, see the Configuring
the Basic Data.

Context
Huawei RAN supports the UBR+ ATM service class. UBR+ is the enhanced UBR feature. It
adds the Minimum Desired Cell Rate (MDCR) indication. UBR+ is particularly applicable to
the OAM channels over the Iub interface. The MDCR of UBR+ ensures the reliability of the
OAM connection in case of transmission channel congestion, and the BE service of the UBR+
fully utilizes transmission bandwidth.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the MML command ADD ATMTRF (CME single configuration: NodeB
Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > ATM Traffic Record;
CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an ATM traffic record of the
UBR+ class. To add more ATM traffic records, run this command repeatedly.
l Verification Procedure
1. Run the MML command LST ATMTRF to query the ATM traffic configuration.
Expected result: The query result is consistent with the configuration information.
l Deactivation Procedure

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 199
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 48 Configuring UBR+ ATM QoS Class

1. Run the MML command RMV ATMTRF (CME single configuration: NodeB
Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > ATM Traffic Record;
CME batch modification center: not supported) to delete an ATM traffic record of the
UBR+ class. To delete more ATM traffic records, run this command repeatedly.
----End

Example
//Adding UBR+ ATM QoS Class
ADD ATMTRF: TRFX=105, ST=UBR_PLUS, UT=CELL/S, MCR=100;
//Verifying UBR+ ATM QoS Class
LST ATMTRF: TRFX=105;
//Deactivating UBR+ ATM QoS Class
RMV ATMTRF: TRFX=105;

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 200
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 49 Configuring Link Aggregation

49 Configuring Link Aggregation

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210103
Link Aggregation.

Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
– This feature applies only to 3900 series base stations excluding the BTS3902E.
– This feature is only supported on BSC6900.
l Dependencies on Other Features
– In the earlier versions than RAN13.0, trunk group configuration cannot support IP PM.
l License
– This feature is not under license control.
l Others
– This feature requires the support from peer transmission devices, such as switches and
base stations.
– This feature supports IP networking, layer 2 (L2) networking, and layer 3 (L3)
networking.

Context
This feature enables multiple FE or GE ports to be bound to form a logical port. This provides
high bandwidth for end-to-end transmission, achieves load sharing across these FE or GE ports,
and improves the transmission reliability.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure
– Activate Link Aggregation on the BSC6900.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD DEVIP (CME single configuration:
Abis Configuration Express > IP Transport > Device IP Address; CME batch
modification center: not supported) to add a device IP address to a board.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ETHTRK (CME single configuration:
Abis Configuration Express > IP Transport > Link Aggregation; CME batch
modification center: not supported) to add an Ethernet link aggregation group. In

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 201
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 49 Configuring Link Aggregation

this step, set the Trunk group work mode to LOAD_SHARING(Load
sharing), set the Aggregation Mode to STATIC_LACP when the peer end
supports the LACP protocol or set the Aggregation Mode to
MANUAL_AGGREGATION when the peer end does not support the LACP
protocol, and set the Flow control switch to ON(ON).
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ETHTRKLNK (CME single
configuration: Abis Configuration Express > IP Transport > Link
Aggregation; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a specified
physical port to an Ethernet link aggregation group.
NOTE
If the Ethernet link aggregation group is configured with multiple physical ports, repeat this step
until all the required physical ports are configured.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ETHTRKIP (CME single
configuration: Abis Configuration Express > IP Transport > Trunk IP
Address; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an IP address to
an Ethernet link aggregation group. When multiple virtual local area network
(VLAN) gateways are planned, run this command for each IP address you want to
add.
– Activate Link Aggregation on the NodeB.
1. Run the NodeB MML command ADD DEVIP (CME single configuration: NodeB
Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > IP Transport Layer > IPPort > Device
IP Address; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB
Parameters in Batches) to add a device IP address to an Ethernet port. In this
step, set Port Type to ETHTRK(Ethernet Trunk).
2. Run the NodeB MML command ADD ETHTRK (CME single configuration:
NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > IP Transport Layer >
IPPort > Ethernet Trunk; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add
an Ethernet link aggregation group.
3. Run the NodeB MML command ADD ETHTRKLNK (CME single
configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > IP Transport
Layer > IPPort > Ethernet Trunk > Ethernet Trunk Member; CME batch
modification center: not supported) to add a member port to an Ethernet link
aggregation group. When multiple member ports need to be added, run this
command for each port you want to add.
l Verification Procedure
– Verify the effect of Link Aggregation on the BSC6900.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ETHTRK to query whether an Ethernet
link aggregation group is available.
NOTE

Expected result: If the value of Status of ETHTRK is UP in the command output, the Ethernet
link aggregation group is available.
2. Set the IP address of the peer NE to be on the same network segment as the IP
address for the Ethernet link aggregation group. For example, set the IP address
of the peer NE to 16.16.16.2.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command PING IP to check the IP communication
between the local and peer ends.

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 202
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 49 Configuring Link Aggregation

NOTE

Expected result: If this command is executed and the command output indicates that no packet
loss occurs, the Ethernet link aggregation group has been successfully configured.
– Verify the effect of Link Aggregation on the NodeB.
1. Run the NodeB MML commandDSP ETHTRK to query whether an Ethernet link
aggregation group is available.
2. Run the NodeB MML commandDSP ETHTRKLNK to query whether a member
port of an Ethernet link aggregation group is available.
l Deactivation Procedure
– Deactivate Link Aggregation on the BSC6900.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML commandRMV ETHTRKIP (CME single
configuration: Abis Configuration Express > IP Transport > Trunk IP
Address; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove an IP address
from an Ethernet link aggregation group. If the removal fails, perform operations
as prompted.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML commandRMV ETHTRK (CME single configuration:
Abis Configuration Express > IP Transport > Link Aggregation; CME batch
modification center: not supported) to remove an Ethernet link aggregation group.
– Deactivate Link Aggregation on the NodeB.
1. Run the NodeB MML commandRMV DEVIP (CME single configuration: NodeB
Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > IP Transport Layer > IPPort > Device
IP Address; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove a device
IP address.
2. Run the NodeB MML commandRMV ETHTRK (CME single configuration:
NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > IP Transport Layer >
IPPort > Ethernet Trunk; CME batch modification center: not supported) to
remove an Ethernet link aggregation group.
----End

Example
//Activating Link Aggregation on the BSC6900
ADD DEVIP: SRN=2, SN=26, DEVTYPE=LOGIC_IP, IPADDR="10.171.35.123";
ADD ETHTRK: SRN=2, SN=26, TRKN=2, WORKMODE=ACTIVE_STANDBY,
LACPMODE=MANUAL_AGGREGATION, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=ON;
ADD ETHTRKLNK: SRN=2, SN=26, TRKN=2, TRKLNKSN=26, TRKLNKPN=2,
WORKMODE=ACTIVE_STANDBY, PORTPRI=101;
ADD ETHTRKLNK: SRN=2, SN=26, TRKN=2, TRKLNKSN=27, TRKLNKPN=2,
WORKMODE=ACTIVE_STANDBY, PORTPRI=102;
ADD ETHTRKIP: SRN=2, SN=26, TRKN=2, IPINDEX=0, IPADDR="126.126.126.1",
MASK="255.255.255.0";

/Activating Link Aggregation on the NodeB
//Adding a device IP address to an Ethernet port
ADD DEVIP: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=0, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=ETHTRK, PN=0,
IP="192.168.2.24", MASK="255.255.255.0";

//Adding an Ethernet link aggregation group and adding a member port to
an Ethernet link aggregation group
ADD ETHTRK: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=0, SBT=ETH_COVERBOARD, TN=0;
ADD ETHTRKLNK: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=0, SBT=ETH_COVERBOARD, TN=0, PN=0,
PRI=255, FLAG=YES;

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 203
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 49 Configuring Link Aggregation

//Deactivating Link Aggregation on the BSC6900
//Removing active/standby Ethernet link aggregation groups
RMV ETHTRKIP: SRN=2, SN=26, TRKN=2, IPINDEX=0;
RMV ETHTRK: SRN=2, SN=26, TRKN=2;

//Deactivating Link Aggregation on the NodeB

//Removing a device IP address from an Ethernet port
RMV DEVIP: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=0, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=ETHTRK, PN=0,
IP="192.168.2.24";

//Removing an Ethernet link aggregation group
RMV ETHTRK: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=0, SBT=ETH_COVERBOARD, TN=0;

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 204
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 50 Configuring Flow Control

50 Configuring Flow Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-040100
Flow Control.

Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
– NodeB RRC link priority based flow control is depended on WMPT and WBBP boards.
l Dependencies on Other Features
– This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
– This feature is not under license control.

Context
Flow control is implemented by regulating the input transmission rate. This mechanism is called
feedback flow control mechanism.
The flow control measures are as follows:
l Board flow control
l Control-plane load sharing
l User-plane load sharing
l Flow control based on RRC request queuing
l Flow control based on MPU load
l Flow control based on traffic growth

Procedure
l Activation Procedure
– Activating board flow control
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET FCSW (CME single configuration:
UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Flow Control Management >
Flow Control Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC
Parameters in Batches) to switch on the flow control and related flow control
items.

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 205
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 50 Configuring Flow Control

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET FCCPUTHD (CME single
configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Flow Control
Management > Flow Control Threshold of CPU Usage; CME batch
modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to configure
the CPU usage threshold for each flow control item according to the network plan.
NOTE

l Flow control is triggered when the CPU usage exceeds the related threshold.
l The CPU usage thresholds must meet the following condition: 100 ≥ Critical threshold
≥ Threshold for a flow control item ≥ Restore threshold for a flow control item
l The critical threshold is of the highest priority. That is, other thresholds take effect only
when the CPU usage is lower than the critical threshold.
l The flow control based on the packet usage and that based on the CPU usage are independent.
The system limits the flow to the lower one allowed by these two flow control algorithms.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET FCMSGQTHD (CME single
configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Flow Control
Management > Flow Control Threshold of Message Queue Usage; CME batch
modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to configure
the packet usage threshold for each flow control item according to the network
plan.
NOTE

l Flow control is triggered when the packet usage exceeds the related threshold.
l The packet usage thresholds must meet the following condition: 100 ≥ Critical threshold
≥ Threshold for a flow control item ≥ Restore threshold for a flow control item
l The critical threshold is of the highest priority. That is, other thresholds take effect only
when the packet usage is lower than the critical threshold.
l The flow control based on the packet usage and that based on the CPU usage are independent.
The system limits the flow to the lower one allowed by these two flow control algorithms.
– Activating control-plane load sharing
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URRCTRLSWITCH (CME single
configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Process Switch
Configuration > Process Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.15
Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Process switch to
RNC_SHARE_SWITCH to switch on load sharing.
2. (Optional) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET
UCTRLPLNSHAREPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global
Configuration Express > Flow Control Management > Control Plane RRC
Sharing Parameter; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC
Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Control Plane Sharing Out
Threshold to 40 so that the control-plane load sharing function can be triggered
easily. The default value of Control Plane Sharing Out Threshold is 50.
NOTE

l If the CPU usage is higher than this threshold and lower than the overload threshold, new
calls will be assigned to other SPUs. Overload threshold is set by the MML command SET
SHARETHD (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express
> Flow Control Management > Load Sharing Threshold of SPU Board; CME batch
modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches).
l Max capability middle load> Max capability normal load> Sharing out capability
middle load.
– Activating user-plane load sharing

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 206
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 50 Configuring Flow Control

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UUSERPLNSHAREPARA (CME
single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Typical
Signaling Configuration > Typical SRB HSUPA Power Control Parameters;
CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches).
In this step, set Percentage of User Plane Sharing Out threshold according to
the network plan. Inter-subrack user-plane load sharing is triggered when the user
plane load on one subrack exceeds this threshold.
– Activating flow control based on RRC request queuing
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCACALGOSWITCH (CME single
configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > CAC Algorithm
Switch Configuration > CAC Algorithm Switch; CME batch modification
center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select
RSVDBIT14 in Reserved parameter 1.
– Activating flow control based on MPU load
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URRCTRLSWITCH (CME single
configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Process Switch
Configuration > Process Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.15
Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select
RSVDBIT1_BIT19 in Reserved parameter 1.
– Activating flow control based on traffic growth
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCALLSHOCKCTRL (CME single
configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Traffic Volume
Control Parameter Configuration > Call Shock Control Parameters; CME
batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this
step, select CELL_LEVEL in Call Shock Control Switch to switch on the cell-
level flow control based on traffic growth.
l Verification Procedure
– Verifying board flow control
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST FCSW to query the state of the flow
control switch.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST FCCPUTHD to query the CPU usage
threshold for flow control.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST FCMSGQTHD to query the packet usage
threshold for flow control.
– Verifying control-plane and user-plane load sharing
1. On the LMT, choose Monitor > Common Monitoring > CPU/DSP Usage
Monitoring to observe the CPU usage of each subsystem. If the CPU usage of
each subsystem is almost the same, load sharing takes effect.
– Verifying flow control based on RRC request queuing
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UCACALGOSWITCH to query the
state of the switch for flow control based on RRC request queuing.
– Verifying flow control based on MPU load
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST URRCTRLSWITCH to query the state
of the switch for flow control based on MPU load.
– Verifying flow control based on traffic growth

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 207
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 50 Configuring Flow Control

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UCALLSHOCKCTRL to query the
state of the switch for flow control based on traffic growth.
l Deactivation Procedure
– Deactivating board flow control
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET FCSW (CME single configuration:
UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Flow Control Management >
Flow Control Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC
Parameters in Batches) to switch off flow control.
– Deactivating control-plane load sharing
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URRCTRLSWITCH (CME single
configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Process Switch
Configuration > Process Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.15
Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to deselect
RNC_SHARE_SWITCH in Process switch.
– Deactivating user-plane load sharing
1. User-plane load sharing does not need to be deactivated.
– Deactivating flow control based on RRC request queuing
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCACALGOSWITCH (CME single
configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > CAC Algorithm
Switch Configuration > CAC Algorithm Switch; CME batch modification
center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect
RSVDBIT14 in Reserved parameter 1.
– Deactivating flow control based on MPU load
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URRCTRLSWITCH (CME single
configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Process Switch
Configuration > Process Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.15
Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect
RSVDBIT1_BIT19 in Reserved parameter 1.
– Deactivating flow control based on traffic growth
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCALLSHOCKCTRL (CME single
configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Traffic Volume
Control Parameter Configuration > Call Shock Control Parameters; CME
batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this
step, deselect CELL_LEVEL in Call Shock Control Switch.
----End

Example
//Activating board flow control
//Switching on XPU load control
SET FCSW: BRDCLASS=XPU, FCSW=ON, PRINTSW=ON, TRACESW=ON, PMSW=ON,
LOGSW=ON;
//Setting CPU usage threshold for DPU flow control
SET FCCPUTHD:BRDCLASS=DPU, SMWINDOW=6, FDWINDOW=2, CTHD=95, PRINTCTHD=60,
PRINTRTHD=50, TRACECTHD=60, TRACERTHD=50, LOGCTHD=60, LOGRTHD=50;
//Setting packet usage threshold for DPU flow control
SET FCMSGQTHD: BRDCLASS=DPU, SMWINDOW=9, CTHD=95, PRINTCTHD=60,
PRINTRTHD=50, TRACECTHD=60, TRACERTHD=50, LOGCTHD=60, LOGRTHD=50;

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 208
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 50 Configuring Flow Control

//Activating control-plane load sharing
SET URRCTRLSWITCH: PROCESSSWITCH=RNC_SHARE_SWITCH-1;
SET UCTRLPLNSHAREPARA: CtrlPlnSharingOutThd=40;
SET SHARETHD: BT=XPU, SMRRCCONNCCPUTHD=80, SMRRCCONNRCPUTHD=70,
CRRCCONNCCPUTHD=80, CRRCCONNRCPUTHD=70, LRRCCONNCCPUTHD=80,
LRRCCONNRCPUTHD=70, SMRRCCONNCMSGTHD=80, SMRRCCONNRMSGTHD=70,
CRRCCONNCMSGTHD=80, CRRCCONNRMSGTHD=70, LRRCCONNCMSGTHD=80,
LRRCCONNRMSGTHD=70;

//Activating user-plane load sharing
SET UUSERPLNSHAREPARA: UserPlnSharingOutThd=90;

//Activating RRC Shaping and Queuing
SET UCACALGOSWITCH:RsvdPara1=RSVDBIT14-1;

//Activating flow control based on MPU load
SET URRCTRLSWITCH: RsvdPara1=RSVDBIT1_BIT19-1;

//Activating flow control based on traffic growth
SET UCALLSHOCKCTRL: CallShockCtrlSwitch=CELL_LEVEL-1;
//Verifying board flow control
LST FCSW: LstFormat=VERTICAL;
LST FCCPUTHD: LstFormat=VERTICAL;
LST FCMSGQTHD: LstFormat=VERTICAL;

//Verifying flow control based on RRC request queuing
LST UCACALGOSWITCH: LstFormat=VERTICAL;

//Verifying flow control based on MPU load
LST URRCTRLSWITCH: LstFormat=VERTICAL;

//Verifying flow control based on traffic growth
LST UCALLSHOCKCTRL: LSTFORMAT=VERTICAL;

//Deactivating board flow control
SET FCSW: BRDCLASS=XPU, FCSW=OFF;

//Deactivating control-plane load sharing
SET URRCTRLSWITCH: PROCESSSWITCH=RNC_SHARE_SWITCH-0;

//Deactivating flow control based on RRC request queuing
SET UCACALGOSWITCH: RsvdPara1=RSVDBIT14-0;

//Deactivating flow control based on MPU load
SET URRCTRLSWITCH: RsvdPara1=RSVDBIT1_BIT19-0;

//Deactivating flow control based on traffic growth
SET UCALLSHOCKCTRL: CallShockCtrlSwitch=CELL_LEVEL-0;

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 209
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 51 Configuring BOOTP

51 Configuring BOOTP

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-031100
BOOTP. In ATM transport mode, the NodeB can automatically set up the OM channel with the
BSC6900 by using the BOOTSTRAP Protocol (BOOTP) function.

Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
– The transmission equipment is in the connected state.
– BOOTP applies only to ATM networking scenarios.
l Dependencies on Other Features
– This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
– This feature is not under license control.

Context
This feature enables NodeB to set up the OM channel to the RNC automatically without
configuration data. The maintenance staff can download the data and software to the NodeB
through the OM channel at the far end. The feature decreases the operation and maintenance
costs and enhances the network maintainability and maintenance quality. NodeB will
automatically set up the OM channel using the BOOTP protocol. In addition, NodeB monitors
the OM channel. When the OM channel is broken, NodeB can rebuild it.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD DEVIP (CME single configuration: NodeB
Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > Device IP Address;
CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the logical IP address for the
interface board of the BSC6900. This IP address serves as the local address of the
IPoA at the BSC6900.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPOAPVC (CME single configuration:
IUPS Configuration Express > ATM Transport > IPoA PVC; CME batch
modification center: not supported) to add the IPoA PVC for bearing the OM channel.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UNODEBIP (CME single configuration:
NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > NodeB IP

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 210
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 51 Configuring BOOTP

Address; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the IP address for the
OM channel of the NodeB.
l Verification Procedure
If the BOOTP configurations at the BSC6900 are completed but no configuration at the
NodeB and the NodeB can be maintained on the M2000, it indicates that the NodeB has
successfully set up the OM channel by using the BOOTP feature.
l Deactivation Procedure
This feature does not need to be deactivated.
----End

Example
//Activation procedure
ADD DEVIP: SRN=0, SN=14, DEVTYPE=IPOA_CLIENT_IP,
IPADDR="131.131.131.132", MASK="255.255.255.0";
ADD IPOAPVC: IPADDR="131.131.131.132", PEERIPADDR="131.131.131.131",
CARRYT=IMA,
CARRYIMAGRPN=0, CARRYVPI=83, CARRYVCI=80, TXTRFX=100;
ADD UNODEBIP: NODEBID=0, NBTRANTP=ATMTRANS_IP,
NBATMOAMIP="131.131.131.131",
NBATMOAMMASK="255.255.255.0", ATMSRN=0, ATMSN=14;

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 211
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 52 Configuring NodeB Self-Discovery Based on IP Mode

52 Configuring NodeB Self-Discovery
Based on IP Mode

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-031101
NodeB Self-Discovery Based on IP Mode.

Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
– The transmission equipment is in the connected state.
– DHCP applies only to IP networks.
– Only 3900 series base stations support DHCP+AACP.
l Dependencies on Other Features
– This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
– This feature is not under license control.
l Others
– If NodeB self-discovery uses the DHCP+AACP scheme
– VLANs are used to separate NodeBs to be deployed from other network devices not
required.
– VLAN detection and IP path detection must be disabled on the M2000 to prevent
interference during AACP detection.
– the deployment list of NodeBs to be commissioned must be ready. For details, see
the NodeB Commissioning Guide.
– A bidirectional forwarding detection (BFD) session failure results in a NodeB
automatic deployment failure. Therefore, the BFD function must be disabled on the
gateway side if it is enabled on the NodeB side.
– The IP path ping function must be disabled on the RNC side during NodeB automatic
deployment. Otherwise, when the ping message sent by the RNC reaches the
gateway, the gateway sends an ARP request to the NodeB, disturbing the AACP
detection process and resulting in a NodeB automatic deployment failure.
– AACP and DHCP messages can be processed through port 67 or 68. Ports 67 and 68
must be enabled for the firewall in the radio network.

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 212
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 52 Configuring NodeB Self-Discovery Based on IP Mode

– M2000 should support NodeB Auto Deployment function.

Context
l If the configuration file is incorrect, DHCP enables NodeBs to establish OM channels for
NodeB remote maintenance.
l The configuration is not required on the NodeB. If the hub NodeB is used, the configuration
on the hub NodeB is required. The configuration is required on the DHCP server, for
example, BSC6900 and M2000. Following takes BSC6900 for example.
l Data Preparation
– PPP/MLPPP networking

Parameter Name Recommended Source
Parameter Settings

NodeB ID - Network plan

NodeB DHCP Server IP It is set to the IP address of
Address the M2000 server by
default. If there are several
DHCP servers, the IP
addresses need to be added
manually.

NodeB AACP Server IP It is set to the IP address of
Address the M2000 server.

– Ethernet networking

Parameter Name Recommended Source
Parameter Settings

NodeB ID - Network plan

NodeB DHCP Server IP It is set to the IP address of
Address the M2000 server by
default. If there are several
DHCP servers, the IP
addresses need to be added
manually.

NodeB Next Hop IP It is set to the gateway IP
Address to DHCP Server address of the M2000
server by default. If there
are several DHCP servers,
the IP addresses need to be
added manually.

NodeB AACP Server IP It is set to the IP address of
Address the M2000 server.

NodeB Next Hop IP It is set to the gateway IP
Address to AACP Server address of the M2000
server.

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 213
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 52 Configuring NodeB Self-Discovery Based on IP Mode

Parameter Name Recommended Source
Parameter Settings

Interface subnet mask of Interface subnet mask of
the NodeB the NodeB

Procedure
l Activation Procedure (NodeB Self-Discovery Based on DHCP)
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UNODEBESN (CME single configuration:
NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > IP Transport > NodeB Electronic
Serial Number; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the NodeB
ESN in response to the DHCP request reported by the NodeB.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UNODEBIP (CME single configuration:
NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > IP Transport > NodeB IP
Address; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the IP address for the
OM channel of the NodeB. When the BSC6900 makes a response to the DHCP
request, it sends the IP address to the NodeB.
3. Optional: If the Hub NodeB is used and the DHCP function is used for NodeB self-
discovery, the following configurations are required.
a. Run the NodeB MML command SET DHCPRELAYSWITCH (CME single
configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Basic
Information > Transport Management > DHCP Relay Switch; CME batch
modification center: not supported) to enable DHCP relaying of the NodeB.
b. Run the NodeB MML command ADD DHCPSVRIP (CME single
configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Basic
Information > Transport Management > DHCP Server IP Address; CME
batch modification center: not supported) to add the IP address of the DHCP
server so that lower-level NodeBs can automatically obtain the IP address of the
DHCP server through DHCP.
l Activation Procedure (NodeB Self-Discovery Based on DHCP+AACP)
1. Optional: Run the NodeB MML command SET NODEBRSVP (CME single
configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Basic
Information > Radio Management > NodeB Reserved Para; CME batch
modification center: not supported). In this step, select RSVDBIT29(Reserved
Switch 29) under Reserved Parameter 1.
2. On the M2000 client, Choose Configuration > Auto Deployment > NodeB Auto
Deployment. Right-click the import the deployment list, and choose Task Setting
from the shortcut menu. The Task Settings dialog box is displayed.
3. Select Use AACP during Auto Discovery to use AACP for NodeB automatic
deployment, Click OK to start NodeB automatic deployment.
l Verification Procedure
Check the status of NodeB automatic deployment in either of the following ways:
– On the deployment list of the M2000
1. Click Show Executing Information on the Deployment List tab page.
2. View the information displayed in the Description column. If Execution
Succeed is displayed, AACP-based NodeB automatic deployment is successful.

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 214
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 52 Configuring NodeB Self-Discovery Based on IP Mode

If AACP detection timed out is displayed, AACP-based NodeB automatic
deployment fails.
– On the topology view of the M2000
Choose Topology > Main Topology to view the Main Topology tab page. If is
displayed beside a NodeB on the Main Topology tab page, the NodeB failed to be
deployed.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. If the DHCP+AACP function is used for NodeB self-discovery, Run the NodeB MML
command SET NODEBRSVP (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration
Express > IUB_NodeB > Basic Information > Radio Management > NodeB
Reserved Para; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, clear
RSVDBIT29(Reserved Switch 29) under Reserved Parameter 1.
----End

Example
//Activation procedure
//NodeB Self-Discovery Based on DHCP
//Operations on the BSC6900 side
ADD UNODEBESN: NODEBID=0, NBLB1="020GKV1082000126", USENBLB2=Disable,
NODEBPT=ETH/TRUNK, PTIP="131.131.131.132", PTIPMASK="255.255.255.0";
ADD UNODEBIP: NODEBID=0, NBTRANTP=IPTRANS_IP,
NBIPOAMIP="131.131.131.131", NBIPOAMMASK="255.255.255.0", IPSRN=0,
IPSN=18, IPLOGPORTFLAG=NO;

//(Optional) Operations on the NodeB side
//Enabling DHCP relaying of the NodeB
SET DHCPRELAYSWITCH: ES=ENABLE;

//Adding the IP address of the DHCP server
ADD DHCPSVRIP: DHCPSVRIP="13.13.13.13";

//NodeB Self-Discovery Based on DHCP+AACP
SET NODEBRSVP: REVDPARA1=RSVDBIT29-1;

//Deactivation procedure
SET NODEBRSVP: REVDPARA1=RSVDBIT29-0;

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 215
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 53 Configuring License Control for Urgency

53 Configuring License Control for Urgency

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-040300
License Control for Urgency. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
– Only BSC6900 supports this feature.
l Dependencies on Other Features
– This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
– This feature is not under license control.

Context

CAUTION
This feature is enabled only in scenarios where the traffic volume increases abruptly, for
example, in a disaster.
It can be enabled only three times for each R version by BSC6900 MML command SET
LICENSECTRL and it can be enabled only fifteen times by WRFD-040202 RNC Node
Redundancy and it is valid only for seven days each time.
After this function is enabled, a network can reach its maximum capacity that is supported by
the hardware. This documentation describes the procedure of enabling the feature by
BSC6900 MML command .

Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. On the BSC6900 side: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET LICENSECTRL. In
this step, set Grace Protection Period Switch to ON(ON).
2. On the NodeB V200R014 side: Run the NodeB MML command SET
LICENSECTRL. In this step, set Grace Protection Period Switch State to ON.

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 216
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 53 Configuring License Control for Urgency

3. On the NodeB V100R014 side: Run the NodeB MML command SET
LICENSECTRL. In this step, set Grace Protection Period Switch to ON(ON).
l Verification Procedure
1. On the BSC6900 Side
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP LICUSAGE to view resource items of
the license.
Expected result: All the resource items reach their maximum values.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST LICENSECTRL to query the setting
of Grace Protection Period Switch State.
Expected result: Values of Remaining Grace Protection Times and Remaining
Grace Protection Days are displayed and the value of Grace Protection Period
Switch State is ON.
2. On the NodeB V200R014 side or NodeB V100R014 side
a. Run the NodeB MML command DSP LICENSE to view resource items of the
license.
Expected result: All the resource items reach their maximum values.
b. Run the NodeB MML command LST LICENSECTRL to query the setting of
Grace Protection Period Switch State.
Expected result: Values of Remaining Grace Protection Times and Remaining
Grace Protection Days are displayed and the value of Grace Protection Period
Switch State is ON.

l Deactivation Procedure
1. On the BSC6900 Side: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET LICENSECTRL.
In this step, set Grace Protection Period Switch to OFF(OFF).
2. On the NodeB V200R014 Side: Run the NodeB MML command SET
LICENSECTRL. In this step, set Grace Protection Period Switch State to OFF.
3. On the NodeB V100R014 Side: Run the NodeB MML command SET
LICENSECTRL. In this step, set Grace Protection Period Switch to OFF(OFF).
----End

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 217
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 54 Configuring Intelligently Out of Service

54 Configuring Intelligently Out of Service

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-031000
Intelligently Out of Service.

Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
– This feature does not depend on the hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
– This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
– This feature is not under license control.

Context
NodeB reset will interrupt ongoing services. After intelligently Out of Service has been
introduced, the NodeB automatically reduces the pilot transmit power if the NodeB resets. As
a result, UEs can be handed over to other neighboring cells to prevent service interruption.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the NodeB MML command SET SMTHPWRSWTCH (CME single
configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Basic
Information > Basic Information > Smooth Power Change Function Switch;
CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Smooth Power
Change Function Switch to OPEN(Open).
2. Run the NodeB MML command SET SMTHPWRPARA (CME single
configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Basic
Information > Basic Information > Smooth Power Change Function Switch;
CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Smart default step
(0.5dB) and Smart default time ratio(100ms).
l Verification Procedure
1. Run the NodeB MML command LST SMTHPWRSWTCH. In this step, check
whether Smooth Power Change Function Switch is set to OPEN.

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 218
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 54 Configuring Intelligently Out of Service

2. Run the NodeB MML command LST SMTHPWRPARA. In this step, check whether
Smart default step(0.5dB) and Smart default time ratio(100ms) are set correctly.
l Deactivation Procedure
This feature does not need to be deactivated.
----End

Example
//Activation procedure
SET SMTHPWRSWTCH: SWITCH=OPEN;
SET SMTHPWRPARA: STEP=10, PERIOD=1;
//Verification procedure
LST SMTHPWRSWTCH:;
LST SMTHPWRPARA:;

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 219
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 55 Configuring OCNS

55 Configuring OCNS

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-031200
OCNS (Orthogonal Channel Noise Simulator). (This feature cannot be configured using the
CME. )

Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
– This feature does not depend on the hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
– This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
– This feature is not under license control.

Context
With the OCNS feature, multiple downlink analog channels are set up on the Uu interface to
simulate the interference of multiple codes. In this way, the simulated downlink load test of a
cell can be performed.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the NodeB MML command STR DLSIM to start downlink load simulation. In
this step, set Local Cell ID and Load Ratio (%).
NOTE

l This command can be successfully executed only when the corresponding logical cell exists.
l The downlink network load simulation uses the channelization codes from 112 to 127 whose
SF = 128.
l If you start the downlink network load simulation, it is advised to reserve the channelization
codes in the RNC.
l After starting the DL load simulation, new service can not be built in the channel resource
occupied by the simulation.
l Verification Procedure

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 220
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 55 Configuring OCNS

1. Run the NodeB MML command DSP DLSIM to query the downlink load simulation
result. In this step, specify Local Cell ID. The execution result displayed on the LMT
shows the simulated load rate.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the NodeB MML command STP DLSIM to stop the downlink load simulation.
In this step, specify Local Cell ID.
----End

Example
//Activation procedure
STR DLSIM: LOCELL=1, LR=80;
//Verification procedure
DSP DLSIM: LOCELL=1;
//Deactivation procedure
STP DLSIM: LOCELL=1;

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 221
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 56 Configuring Power Off the Equipment Level by Level

56 Configuring Power Off the Equipment
Level by Level

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-031400
Power Off the Equipment Level by Level.

Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
– Cabinets providing AC input power such as APM30, APM100, and APM200. These
cabinets can be used for outdoor NodeBs.
l Dependencies on Other Features
– This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
– This feature is not under license control.

Context
After the mains supply is cut off, the NodeB powers off devices by level when certain DC voltage
thresholds are reached. Intelligent shutdown of RF units and NodeBs can prolong the working
time of the system by making efficient use of the available storage batteries.

Procedure
l NodeB V200R014

Activation Procedure

1. Run the NodeB MML command MOD PMU (CME single configuration: NodeB
Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Device Panel > Right click PMU board
> PMU Porperty > Power Monitoring Unit; CME batch modification center: not
supported). In this step, set Load Shutdown Flag to ENABLE(Enable) and set Load
Shutdown Voltage(0.1V) if needed.
2. Run the NodeB MML command MOD BATTERY (CME single configuration:
NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Device Panel > Right click PMU
board > Battery Property > Battery; CME batch modification center: not

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 222
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 56 Configuring Power Off the Equipment Level by Level

supported). In this step, set Low Voltage Shutdown Flag to ENABLE and set
Shutdown Voltage(0.1V) if needed.

Verification Procedure

1. Run the NodeB MML command LST PMU and query the values of Load Shutdown
Flag and Load Shutdown Voltage(0.1V).
2. Run the NodeB MML command LST BATTERY and query the values of Low
Voltage Shutdown Flag and Shutdown Voltage(0.1V).

Deactivation Procedure

1. Run the NodeB MML command MOD BATTERY (CME single configuration:
NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Device Panel > Right click PMU
board > Battery Property > Battery; CME batch modification center: not supported)
and set Low Voltage Shutdown Flag to DISABLE(Disable).
2. Run the NodeB MML command MOD PMU (CME single configuration: NodeB
Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Device Panel > Right click PMU board
> PMU Porperty > Power Monitoring Unit; CME batch modification center: not
supported) and set Load Shutdown Flag to DISABLE(Disable).
l NodeB V100R014

Activation Procedure

1. Run the NodeB MML command SET SDPA (CME single configuration: NodeB
Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Device Panel > PMU Board > PMU
Property > PMU Shutdown Parameter; CME batch modification center: not
supported). In this step, set Load Shutdown Flag to ENABLE(Enable), set Load
Shutdown Voltage(0.1V) if needed, set Low Voltage Shutdown Flag to ENABLE
(Enable), set Shutdown Voltage(0.1V) if needed.

Verification Procedure

1. Run the NodeB MML command LST SDPA, query the values of Load Shutdown
Flag and Load Shutdown Voltage(0.1V),, query the values of Low Voltage
Shutdown Flag and Shutdown Voltage(0.1V),.

Deactivation Procedure

1. Run the NodeB MML command SET SDPA (CME single configuration: NodeB
Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Device Panel > PMU Board > PMU
Property > PMU Shutdown Parameter; CME batch modification center: not
supported). In this step, set Load Shutdown Flag to DISABLE(Disable), and set
Low Voltage Shutdown Flag to DISABLE(Disable).

----End

Example
l NodeB V200R014
//Activation procedure
MOD PMU: CN=1, PTYPE=APM30, LSDF=ENABLE, LSDV=430;
MOD BATTERY: CN=1, LVSDF=ENABLE, SDV=360;
//Verification procedure
LST PMU: CN=1;
LST BATTERY: CN=1;

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 223
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 56 Configuring Power Off the Equipment Level by Level

//Deactivation procedure
MOD BATTERY: CN=1, LVSDF=DISABLE;
MOD PMU: CN=1, PTYPE=APM30, LSDF=DISABLE;
l NodeB V100R014
//Activation procedure
SET SDPA: CN=1, LSDF=ENABLE, LSDV=440, LVSDF=ENABLE, SDV=360,
CSLSDF=DISABLE;
//Verification procedure
LST SDPA: CN=1;
//Deactivation procedure
SET SDPA: CN=1, LSDF=DISABLE, LVSDF=DISABLE, CSLSDF=DISABLE;

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 224
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 57 Configuring Solar Power Device Management

57 Configuring Solar Power Device
Management

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-031500
Solar Power Device Management.

Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
– Only 3900 series base stations support the feature.
l Dependencies on Other Features
– This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
– This feature is not under license control.

Context
As green energy, solar power is being gradually introduced for supplying power for the NodeB.
This feature enables the NodeB to communicate with a solar controller through the 485 serial
port, therefore managing a solar power device, which makes the NodeB an eco-friendly base
station.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the NodeB MML command ADD PMU (CME single configuration: NodeB
Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Device Panel > Add PMU; CME batch
modification center: not supported) to add a PMU. In this step, set Power System
Type to SC48200.
2. Optional: If a diesel generator is required, run the NodeB MML command ADD
DIESELGEN (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express >
IUB_NodeB > Device Panel > Right click PMU board > PMU Property > Diesel
Generator; CME batch modification center: not supported).
– Set Intelligent Control Flag to ENABLE(Enable).

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 225
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 57 Configuring Solar Power Device Management

– Set Rated Power(0.1kVA) based on the rated power specified on the nameplate
of the diesel generator.
l Verification Procedure
1. Run the NodeB MML command DSP PMU to query the configuration information
about the PMU.
Expected result: The value of Power System Type is SC48200.
2. Optional: Run the NodeB MML command LST DIESELGEN to query the
configuration information about the diesel generator.
Expected result: The value of Intelligent Control Flag is ENABLE.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the NodeB MML command RMV DIESELGEN (CME single configuration:
NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Device Panel > Right click PMU
board > PMU Property > Diesel Generator; CME batch modification center: not
supported) to remove a dieselgen.
2. Run the NodeB MML command RMV PMU (CME single configuration: NodeB
Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Device Panel > Right click PMU board
> Dlete PMU; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove a PMU.
----End

Example
//Activation procedure
ADD PMU: CN=0, PTYPE=SC48200, MPN=0, LSDF=ENABLE;
ADD DIESELGEN: CN=0, ICF=ENABLE, POWER=500;
//Verification procedure
DSP PMU: CN=0;
LST DIESELGEN: CN=0;
//Deactivation procedure
RMV DIESELGEN: CN=0;
RMV PMU: CN=0;

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 226
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0 58 Configuring Connection with TMA (Tower Mounted
Feature Activation Guide Amplifier)

58 Configuring Connection with TMA
(Tower Mounted Amplifier)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210601
Connection with TMA (Tower Mounted Amplifier). (This feature cannot be configured using
the CME. )

Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
– The base station is connected to the Antenna Line Device (ALD) normally.
– The BTS3902E cannot support this feature.
l Dependencies on Other Features
– This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
– This feature is not under license control.
l Others
– The TMA is loaded with basic software for its normal operation.

Context
The gain range supported by the Smart Tower-Mounted Amplifier (STMA) varies with models
and vendors.

Procedure
l NodeB V200R014
Activation Procedure
1. Run the NodeB MML command MOD ANTENNAPORT to set ALD Power
Switch to ON.
2. Run the NodeB MML command SCN ALD to scan the Device Name, Vendor
Code and Serial No..
3. Run the NodeB MML command ADD TMA to add a TMA.
4. Optional: If the device supports TMA gain, run the NodeB MML command MOD
TMASUBUNIT to set the TMA gain.

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 227
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0 58 Configuring Connection with TMA (Tower Mounted
Feature Activation Guide Amplifier)

NOTE
It is recommended that you query the gain range supported by the STMA using the NodeB MML
command DSP TMADEVICEDATA before adjusting the gain.
5. Run the NodeB MML command MOD RXBRANCH to modify the RX channel of
an RRU.
Verification Procedure
1. Run the NodeB MML command DSP TMA to query the dynamic information about
a TMA.
Deactivation Procedure
This feature does not need to be deactivated.
l NodeB V100R014
Activation Procedure
1. Run the NodeB MML command SET ALDPWRSW to set Power Supply Switch to
ON(On).
2. Run the NodeB MML command SCN ALD to scan Device Name, Vendor Code and
Serial No..
3. Run the NodeB MML command ADD ALD to add a TMA.
4. Optional: If the device supports TMA gain, run the NodeB MML command SET
TMAGAIN to set the TMA gain.
NOTE
It is recommended that you query the gain range supported by the STMA using the NodeB MML
command DSP TMAFUN before adjusting the gain.
5. Run the NodeB MML command SET RXATTEN to set the attenuation of the RX
channel.
Verification Procedure
1. Run the NodeB MML command LST TMAGAIN to query the TMA gain.
2. Run the NodeB MML command LST RXATTEN to query the RX attenuation value.
Deactivation Procedure
This feature does not need to be deactivated.
----End

Example
l NodeB V200R014
//Activation procedure
MOD ANTENNAPORT: CN=0, SRN=60, SN=0, PN=R0A, PWRSWITCH=ON;
SCN ALD: CTRLCN=0, CTRLSRN=60, CTRLSN=0;
ADD TMA: DEVICENO=0, DEVICENAME="TMA1", CTRLCN=0, CTRLSRN=60,
CTRLSN=0, SUBUNITNUM=1;
MOD TMASUBUNIT: DEVICENO=0, SUBUNITNO=1, CONNPN=R0A, MODE=NORMAL,
GAIN=48;
MOD RXBRANCH: CN=0, SRN=60, SN=0, RXNO=0, ATTEN=0;
//Verification procedure
DSP TMA: DEVICENO=0;
l NodeB V100R014

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 228
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0 58 Configuring Connection with TMA (Tower Mounted
Feature Activation Guide Amplifier)

//Activation procedure
SET ALDPWRSW: CN=0, SRN=60, CASE=REGULAR, AST=TMA12DB_ONLY_NON_AISG,
PSP=R0A, PWRSW=ON;
SCN ALD: CN=0, SRN=60, ACN=R0A;
ADD ALD: NAME="test", CASE=REGULAR, DEVTP=STMA, CN=0, SRN=60,
ACN=R0A, SUBUNIT=1;
SET TMAGAIN: OPMODE=CSAT, CN=0, SRN=60, ACN=R0A, GAIN=48;
SET RXATTEN: CN=0, SRN=60, SN=0, RXNO=0, ATTEN=0;
//Verification procedure
LST TMAGAIN: OPMODE=CSAT, CN=0, SRN=60, ACN=R0A;

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 229
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 59 Configuring Remote Electrical Tilt

59 Configuring Remote Electrical Tilt

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210602
Remote Electrical Tilt. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
– The base station is connected to a remote electrical tilt (RET) antenna properly.
– The remote control unit (RCU) is compatible with the RET antenna. The RCU is loaded
with a configuration file designated for the RET antenna.
– The RCU is loaded with the basic software.
– This feature is supported by the all types of BTSs except for the BTS3600C and
BTS3002E.
– The BTS3902E cannot support this feature.
l Dependencies on Other Features
– This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
– This feature is not under license control.

Context
With this feature activated, users can remotely adjust the tilt of an RET antenna to optimize
network performance.

l Calibrating the RET antenna may affect its coverage for a short period of time.
l Calibrating an RET antenna takes up to 4 minutes.

Procedure
l NodeB V200R014

Activation Procedure

1. Optional: If the antenna port is used, run the NodeB MML command MOD
ANTENNAPORT. In this step, set ALD Power Switch to ON.

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 230
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 59 Configuring Remote Electrical Tilt

2. Optional: If the RET antenna port is used, run the NodeB MML command MOD
RETPORT. In this step, set ALD Power Switch to ON.
3. Run the NodeB MML command SCN ALD to obtain the ESN of an ALD.
4. Run the NodeB MML command ADD RET to add an RET antenna.
NOTE
For vendor information, see the antenna equipment manual or scan the RET antenna.
5. Run the NodeB MML command CLB RET to calibrate the RET antenna.
6. Optional: Run the NodeB MML command MOD RETSUBUNIT to modify
parameters concerning an RET antenna subunit.
7. Optional: Run the NodeB MML command MOD RETDEVICEDATA to modify
parameters concerning the attributes of an RET device.
8. Run the NodeB MML command MOD RETTILT to modify the tilt of the RET
antenna.

Verification Procedure

1. Optional: If the antenna port is used, run the NodeB MML command DSP
ANTENNAPORT to query the power switch status for the port.
Expected result: ALD Actual Power Switch is ON.
2. Optional: If the RET antenna port is used, run the NodeB MML command DSP
RETPORT to query the power switch status for the port.
Expected result:ALD Actual Power Switch is ON.
3. Run the NodeB MML command DSP RET to query information about the RET
antenna.
4. Run the NodeB MML command DSP RETSUBUNIT to query the dynamic
information on an RET antenna subunit and an RET antenna's tilt.

Deactivation Procedure

This feature does not need to be deactivated.
l NodeB V100R014

Activation Procedure

1. Run the NodeB MML command SET ALDPWRSW. In this step, set Power Supply
Switch to ON.
2. Run the NodeB MML command SCN ALD to obtain the ESN of an ALD.
3. Run the NodeB MML command ADD ALD to add an antenna device.
NOTE
For vendor information, see the antenna equipment manual or scan the RET antenna.
4. Run the NodeB MML command CLB ANT to calibrate the antenna device.
5. Run the NodeB MML command SET ANTTILT to set the tilt of antenna device.

Verification Procedure

1. Run the NodeB MML command DSP ANTCON to query the power switch status for
the antenna port.
Expected result: Power Supply Switch Run Status is ON.
2. Run the NodeB MML command DSP ANTTILT to query the tilt of the RET antenna.

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 231
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 59 Configuring Remote Electrical Tilt

Expected result: Current Tilt (0.1 degree) is set to the specified value.
Deactivation Procedure
This feature does not need to be deactivated.
----End

Example
l NodeB V200R014
//Activation procedure
MOD ANTENNAPORT: CN=0, SRN=60, SN=0, PN=R0A, PWRSWITCH=ON;
SCN ALD:;
ADD RET: DEVICENO=0, DEVICENAME="RET1", CTRLCN=0, CTRLSRN=60,
CTRLSN=0, RETTYPE=SINGLE_RET, POLARTYPE=SINGLE, SCENARIO=REGULAR;
CLB RET: OPMODE=SUBUNIT, DEVICENO=0, SUBUNITNO=1;
MOD RETSUBUNIT: DEVICENO=0, SUBUNITNO=1;
MOD RETDEVICEDATA: DEVICENO=0, SUBUNITNO=1;
MOD RETTILT: RETCLASS=RET, OPMODE=DEVICENO, DEVICENO=0, TILT=45;
//Verification procedure
DSP ANTENNAPORT:;
DSP RET: DEVICENO=0;
DSP RETSUBUNIT: DEVICENO=0, SUBUNITNO=1;
l NodeB V100R014
//Activation procedure
SET ALDPWRSW: CN=0, SRN=60, CASE=REGULAR, AST=RET_ONLY_COAXIAL,
PSP=R0A, PWRSW=ON;
SCN ALD:;
ADD ALD: NAME="test", CASE=REGULAR, DEVTP=SINGLE_RET, CN=0, SRN=60,
ACN=R0A;
CLB ANT: OPMODE=CSAT, CN=0, SRN=60, ACN=R0A, DEVTP=SINGLE_RET;
SET ANTTILT: OPMODE=CSAT, CN=0, SRN=60, ACN=R0A, DEVTP=SINGLE_RET,
TILT=20;
//Verification procedure
DSP ANTCON:;
DSP ANTTILT: OPMODE=CSAT, CN=0, SRN=60, ACN=R0A;

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 232
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 60 Configuring Same Band Antenna Sharing Unit (900 MHz)

60 Configuring Same Band Antenna
Sharing Unit (900 MHz)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-060003
Configuring Same Band Antenna Sharing Unit (900 MHz). (This feature cannot be configured
using the CME. )

Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
– BTS3902E does not support this feature.
l Dependencies on Other Features
– This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
– This feature is not under license control.

Context
l The introduction of the feature enables UMTS900 and GSM900 to share the same antenna.
l This feature helps to share an antenna in the same band and decreases the uplink division
loss. After SASU900 is applied, there is no uplink division loss, and the gain is expected
to be between 0 dB and 12 dB.

Procedure
l NodeB V200R014
Activation Procedure
1. Run the NodeB MML command MOD ANTENNAPORT to set ALD Power
Switch to ON.
2. Run the NodeB MML command SCN ALD to scan antenna devices and obtain the
serial number of the SASU.
3. Run the NodeB MML command ADD SASU to configure the SASU and set the
antenna DC power switch state of the SASU.
4. Run the NodeB MML command MOD SASUSUBUNIT to set the SASU working
mode and the gain of the SASU.

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 233
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 60 Configuring Same Band Antenna Sharing Unit (900 MHz)

Verification Procedure
1. Run the NodeB MML command DSP SASU to query the antenna DC power switch
state of the SASU.
2. Run the NodeB MML command DSP SASUSUBUNIT to query the SASU working
mode and the gain of the SASU.
l NodeB V100R014
Activation Procedure
1. Run the NodeB MML command SET ALDPWRSW to turn on the power supply
switch of the SASU (Same band Antenna Sharing Unit) port.
2. Run the NodeB MML command SCN ALD to scan antenna devices and obtain the
serial number of the SASU.
3. Run the NodeB MML command ADD ALD to configure the SASU.
4. Run the NodeB MML command SET SASUMODE to set the SASU working mode.
5. Run the NodeB MML command SET SASUGAIN to set the gain of the SASU.
6. Run the NodeB MML command SET SASUDCSW to set the antenna DC power
switch state of the SASU.
7. Run the NodeB MML command SET SASUDCLD to set the DC load of the SASU.
Verification Procedure
1. Run the NodeB MML command LST ALD to query the configuration information
about the SASU.
2. Run the NodeB MML command LST SASUMODE to query the SASU working
mode.
3. Run the NodeB MML command LST SASUGAIN to query the gain of the SASU.
4. Run the NodeB MML command LST SASUDCSW to query the antenna DC power
switch state of the SASU.
5. Run the NodeB MML command LST SASUDCLD to query the DC load of the SASU.
Deactivation Procedure
This feature need not be deactivated.
----End

Example
l NodeB V200R014
//Activation procedure
MOD ANTENNAPORT: CN=0, SRN=60, SN=0, PN=R0A, PWRSWITCH=ON,
THRESHOLDTYPE=UER_SELF_DEFINE, UOTHD=1000, UCTHD=1050, OOTHD=1200,
OCTHD=1150;
SCN ALD: CTRLCN=0, CTRLSRN=60, CTRLSN=0;
ADD SASU: DEVICENO=0, DEVICENAME="0_0N0A0SASU_3G", CTRLCN=0,
CTRLSRN=60, CTRLSN=0, DCSWITCH=UMTS;
MOD SASUSUBUNIT: DEVICENO=0, SUBUNITNO=1, MODE=NORMAL, BSGAIN=12,
UMTSGAIN=12, DCLOAD=20;
//Verification procedure
DSP SASU: DEVICENO=0;
DSP SASUSUBUNIT: DEVICENO=0;
l NodeB V100R014

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 234
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 60 Configuring Same Band Antenna Sharing Unit (900 MHz)

//Activation procedure
SET ALDPWRSW: CN=0, SRN=60, CASE=REGULAR, AST=CUSTOM, PSP=R0A,
PWRSW=ON, UOTHD=1000, UCTHD=1050, OOTHD=1200, OCTHD=1150;
SCN ALD: CN=0, SRN=60, ACN=R0A;
ADD ALD: NAME="0_0N0A0SASU_3G", CASE=REGULAR, DEVTP=SASU, CN=0,
SRN=60, ACN=R0A;
SET SASUMODE: OPMODE=NAME, NAME="0_0N0A0SASU_3G", MODE=BYPASS;
SET SASUGAIN: OPMODE=NAME, NAME="0_0N0A0SASU_3G", CHTP=UMTS, GAIN=12;
SET SASUDCSW: OPMODE=NAME, NAME="0_0N0A0SASU_3G", DCSWITCH=UMTS;
SET SASUDCLD: OPMODE=NAME, NAME="0_0N0A0SASU_3G", DCLOAD=20;
//Verification procedure
LST ALD:;
LST SASUMODE: OPMODE=NAME, NAME="0_0N0A0SASU_3G";
LST SASUGAIN: OPMODE=NAME, NAME="0_0N0A0SASU_3G";
LST SASUDCSW: OPMODE=NAME, NAME="0_0N0A0SASU_3G";
LST SASUDCLD: OPMODE=NAME, NAME="0_0N0A0SASU_3G";

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 235
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 61 Configuring VoIP over HSPA/HSPA+

61 Configuring VoIP over HSPA/HSPA+

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010617
VoIP over HSPA/HSPA+.

Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
– This feature depends on the UE capability and the IP multimedia subsystem (IMS).
l Dependencies on Other Features
– In the case of VoIP over HSPA, the following features have been configured before this
feature is activated: WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package, WRFD-010612
HSUPA Introduction Package, WRFD-010636 SRB over HSUPA and WRFD-010652
SRB over HSDPA.
– In the case of VoIP over HSPA+, the WRFD-010686 CPC-DTX/DRX feature has been
configured before this feature is activated.
l License
– The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see
2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.
l Other Prerequisites
– The UE should support VoIP.
– CN should support IP multimedia subsystem (IMS).

Context
VoIP services can be carried on the DCH or HSPA. When VoIP services are carried on the DCH,
a large quantity of resources are consumed. When VoIP services are carried on the HSPA, the
system capacity significantly increases. When the Robust Header Compression (RoHC)
technique is used, the data transmission efficiency of VoIP services is greatly improved.

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 236
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 61 Configuring VoIP over HSPA/HSPA+

NOTE

l Data configurations on the BSC6900 and NodeB are required to activate the VoIP over HSPA/HSPA
+ feature.
l To increase the transmission efficiency of VoIP services, it is recommended that the WRFD-011501
PDCP Header Compression (RoHC) feature be activated.
l In the case of HSUPA, it is recommended that the non-scheduling transmission mode be used. In the
case of HSDPA, it is recommended that the Enhanced Proportional Fair (EPF) algorithm be activated.
The purpose is to reduce the delay of VoIP services.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA (CME single
configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic Resource
Control Parameter Configuration > Channel Type Parameters; CME batch
modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set
VOIP channel type to HSPA(UL_EDCH,DL_HSDSCH) and IMS channel type
to HSPA(UL_EDCH,DL_HSDSCH).
2. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH
(CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express >
Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented
Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC
Parameters in Batches) to enable the RoHC algorithm. In this step, select the
CFG_PDCP_RFC3095_HC_SWITCH check box under the parameter Channel
Configuration Strategy Switch.
3. Optional: If VoIP services need to use the WRFD-01061403 HSUPA 2ms TTI
feature, run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME
single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express >
Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented
Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC
Parameters in Batches). In this step, select the
MAP_HSUPA_TTI_2MS_SWITCH check box under the parameter Service
Mapping Strategy Switch. Go to Step 4.
4. Optional:
a. If the NodeB is configured with the WCDMA Baseband Process Unit REV:b
(WBBPb) and Enhanced Base Band Card (EBBC) boards, it is recommended
that 10 ms HSUPA TTI be set for VoIP services. Run the BSC6900 MML
command SET UFRC (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global
Configuration Express > Basic Resource Control Parameter
Configuration > RNC Oriented FRC Algorithm Parameters; CME batch
modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step,
select the EDCH_TTI_10ms check box under the parameter HSUPA TTI type
of VOIP service.
b. If the NodeB is configured with the WCDMA Baseband Process Unit REV:d
(WBBPd) and Enhanced Base Band Card REV:d (EBBCd) boards, either 10 ms
or 2 ms HSUPA TTI can be set for VoIP services.
a. To set 10 ms HSUPA TTI for HSUPA services, run the BSC6900 MML
command SET UFRC (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global
Configuration Express > Basic Resource Control Parameter
Configuration > RNC Oriented FRC Algorithm Parameters; CME
batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches)

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 237
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 61 Configuring VoIP over HSPA/HSPA+

to select the EDCH_TTI_10ms check box under the parameter HSUPA
TTI type of VOIP service.
b. To set 2 ms HSUPA TTI for HSUPA services, do as follows:
1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRC (CME single
configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic
Resource Control Parameter Configuration > RNC Oriented FRC
Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15
Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select the
EDCH_TTI_2ms check box under the parameter HSUPA TTI type
of VOIP service.
2) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET
UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS
Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented
RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm
Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC
Parameters in Batches) to select the
DRA_VOICE_SAVE_CE_SWITCH check box under the
parameter Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch.
5. Optional: To use the WRFD-01061404 HSUPA 2ms/10ms TTI HO feature, run the
BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single
configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express >
Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented
Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC
Parameters in Batches). In this step, select the
DRA_VOICE_TTI_RECFG_SWITCH check box under the parameter Dynamic
Resource Allocation Switch.
6. To configure the EPF scheduling strategy, run the NodeB MML command SET
MACHSPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express >
IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > Locell Algorithm Parameters > MAC
Parameters > MACHSPARA; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying
Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches) to set Scheduling Method to EPF
(Enhanced PF).
l Verification Procedure
1. In the Navigation Tree pane on the BSC6900 LMT, click the Trace tab. In the
displayed Trace Navigation Tree pane, double-click UMTS Services. On the
unfolded list, double-click Uu Interface Trace. In the displayed Uu Interface
Trace dialog box, select RRC_RB_SETUP and RRC_RB_RECFG as shown in
Figure 61-1 to trace Uu interface signaling messages.

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 238
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 61 Configuring VoIP over HSPA/HSPA+

Figure 61-1 Uu Interface Trace dialog box

2. Analyze the traced messages.
– If data shown in Figure 61-2 is traced on the Uu interface, the UE is in the
CELL_DCH state.
– If data shown in Figure 61-3 is traced on the Uu interface, VoIP services are carried
on HSPA/HSPA+.

Figure 61-2 UE in CELL_DCH state

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 239
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 61 Configuring VoIP over HSPA/HSPA+

Figure 61-3 VoIP services carried on HSPA/HSPA+

3. If VoIP services are carried on HSPA or HSPA+, trace the RRC_RB_SETUP or
RRC_RB_RECFG message on the Uu interface to check the type of carried TTI, as
shown in Figure 61-4.

Figure 61-4 Type of TTI carried in the message

l Deactivation Procedure
NOTE

The services admitted before deactivation of this feature are not affected.
The services admitted after the deactivation will not use this feature.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA (CME single
configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic Resource
Control Parameter Configuration > Channel Type Parameters; CME batch
modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step,
select the DCH(UL_DCH,DL_DCH) check box under the parameter VOIP channel
type, and select the DCH(UL_DCH,DL_DCH) check box under the parameter IMS
channel type.
----End

Example
//Activating VoIP over HSPA/HSPA+
//Operations on the BSC6900 side

//Configuring VoIP/IMS to be carried on the E-DCH in the uplink and HS-
DSCH in the downlink
SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: VoipChlType=HSPA, ImsChlType=HSPA;

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 240
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 61 Configuring VoIP over HSPA/HSPA+

//Enabling the RoHC algorithm
SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch=CFG_PDCP_RFC3095_HC_SWITCH-1;

//Enabling the HSUPA 2 ms scheduling algorithm
SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: MapSwitch=MAP_HSUPA_TTI_2MS_SWITCH-1;

//Setting the HSUPA TTI type of the VoIP service to 10 ms TTI
SET UFRC: VoipHsupaTti=EDCH_TTI_10ms;

//Setting the HSUPA TTI type of the VoIP service to 2 ms TTI
SET UFRC: VoipHsupaTti=EDCH_TTI_2ms;
//Turning off the switch of saving CE resources
SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_VOICE_SAVE_CE_SWITCH-1;

//Enabling dynamic adjustment of TTI reconfiguration for CS voice
services
SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_VOICE_TTI_RECFG_SWITCH-1;

//Setting the EPF scheduling strategy on the NodeB side
SET MACHSPARA: SM=EPF;
/*Deactivating VoIP over HSPA/HSPA+*/

//Operations on the BSC6900 side
SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: VoipChlType=DCH, ImsChlType=DCH;

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 241
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 62 Configuring Optimized Scheduling for VoIP over HSPA

62 Configuring Optimized Scheduling for
VoIP over HSPA

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature
WRFD-01061703 Optimized Scheduling for VoIP over HSPA.

Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
– This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
– The following features have been configured before this feature is activated:
– WRFD-010611 HSDPA Enhanced Package and WRFD-010612 HSUPA
Introduction Package have been configured before this feature is activated for VoIP
over HSPA.
– WRFD-010611 HSDPA Enhanced Package and WRFD-010686 CPC- DTX/DRX
have been configured before this feature is activated for VoIP over HSPA+.
– Other Prerequisites
– The UE should support VoIP.
– CN should support IP multimedia subsystem (IMS).
l License
– The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see
2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.

Context
RAN10.0 supports VoIP over HSPA. To ensure the QoS of VoIP carried over HSPA, the non-
scheduling method is used for the HSUPA scheduling, and the delay-sensitive (DS) scheduling
algorithm is used for optimized HSDPA scheduling.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the NodeB MML command SET MACHSPARA (CME single configuration:
NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > Locell Algorithm

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 242
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 62 Configuring Optimized Scheduling for VoIP over HSPA

Parameters > MAC Parameters > MACHSPARA; CME batch modification center:
3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches). In this step, set
Scheduling Method to EPF(Enhanced PF).
l Verification Procedure
1. Run the NodeB MML command LST MACHSPARA to query the configuration
result.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the NodeB MML command SET MACHSPARA (CME single configuration:
NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > Locell Algorithm
Parameters > MAC Parameters > MACHSPARA; CME batch modification center:
3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches). In this step, set
Scheduling Method to MAXCI(Max C/I), RR(Round Robin), or PF(PF).
----End

Example
//Activation procedure
SET MACHSPARA: LOCELL=0, SM=EPF;
//Verification procedure
LST MACHSPARA: LOCELL=0;
//Deactivation procedure
SET MACHSPARA: LOCELL=0, SM=PF;

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 243
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 63 Configuring IMS Signaling over HSPA

63 Configuring IMS Signaling over HSPA

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010618
IMS Signaling over HSPA.

Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
– This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
– The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. This
feature depends on the feature WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package and
WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package.
l License
– The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see
2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.
l Other Prerequisites
– CN should support the signaling indication at Iu interface.

Context
IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) signaling over HSPA can shorten the setup delay of IMS
services like VoIP to save network resources for the operator.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA (CME single
configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic Resource
Control Parameter Configuration > Channel Type Parameters; CME batch
modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set IMS
channel type to HSPA(UL_EDCH,DL_HSDSCH).
l Verification Procedure
1. In the Navigation Tree pane on the BSC6900 LMT, click the Trace tab. In the
displayed Trace Navigation Tree pane, double-click UMTS Services. On the
unfolded list, double-click Uu Interface Trace. In the displayed Uu Interface

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 244
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 63 Configuring IMS Signaling over HSPA

Trace dialog box, select RRC_RB_SETUP and RRC_RB_RECFG as shown in
Figure 63-1 to trace Uu interface signaling messages.

Figure 63-1 Uu Interface Trace dialog box

2. Analyze the traced messages.
– If data shown in Figure 63-2 is traced on the Uu interface, the UE is in the
CELL_DCH state.
– If data shown in Figure 63-3 is traced on the Uu interface, VoIP services are carried
on HSPA/HSPA+.

Figure 63-2 UE in CELL_DCH state

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 245
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 63 Configuring IMS Signaling over HSPA

Figure 63-3 VoIP services carried on HSPA/HSPA+

3. If VoIP services are carried on HSPA or HSPA+, trace the RRC_RB_SETUP or
RRC_RB_RECFG message on the Uu interface to check the type of carried TTI, as
shown in Figure 63-4.

Figure 63-4 Type of TTI carried in the message

l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA (CME single
configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic Resource
Control Parameter Configuration > Channel Type Parameters; CME batch
modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set IMS
channel type to DCH(UL_DCH,DL_DCH).
----End

Example
//Activating IMS Signaling over HSPA.
SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: ImsChlType=HSPA;
//Deactivating IMS Signaling over HSPA.
SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: ImsChlType=DCH;

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 246
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 64 Configuring PDCP Header Compression (RoHC)

64 Configuring PDCP Header Compression
(RoHC)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-011501
PDCP Header Compression (RoHC).

Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
– The UE supports this feature.
l Dependencies on Other Features
– WRFD-010619 CS Voice over HSPA/HSPA+
l License
– The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see
2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.
l Other Prerequisites
– The UE should support the ROHC compression function.

Context
PDCP header compression (RoHC) mainly applies to VoIP services to reduce IP overhead. This
feature provides an IP header compression mechanism, which aims to save the bandwidth over
the Uu interface, thereby reducing occupancy of radio resources.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single
configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express >
Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented
Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC
Parameters in Batches). In this step, select the
CFG_PDCP_RFC3095_HC_SWITCH check box under the parameter Channel
configuration strategy switch. Select the following parameters in the Compatibility
Switch list box:

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 247
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 64 Configuring PDCP Header Compression (RoHC)

– CMP_RAB_5_CFG_ROHC_SWITCH
– CMP_RAB_6_CFG_ROHC_SWITCH
– CMP_RAB_7_CFG_ROHC_SWITCH
– CMP_RAB_8_CFG_ROHC_SWITCH
– CMP_RAB_9_CFG_ROHC_SWITCH
l Verification Procedure
1. On the BSC6900 LMT, click Trace > UMTS Service, and double-click Uu Interface
Trace to display the Uu Interface Trace window.
2. Set Cell config, Uu Message Type, and Save File, and then click Submit.
3. Enable the UE to establish VoIP services.
4. Check the rb-InformationSetupList message in the traced data:
– If this message contains the IE headerCompressionInfoList, as shown in Figure
64-1, this feature has been activated.
– If this message does not contain the IE headerCompressionInfoList, this feature
has not been activated.

Figure 64-1

l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single
configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express >
Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented
Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC
Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect the
CFG_PDCP_RFC3095_HC_SWITCH check box under the parameter Channel
configuration strategy switch. Disable the following switches in the Compatibility
Switch list box:
– CMP_RAB_5_CFG_ROHC_SWITCH
– CMP_RAB_6_CFG_ROHC_SWITCH
– CMP_RAB_7_CFG_ROHC_SWITCH

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 248
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 64 Configuring PDCP Header Compression (RoHC)

– CMP_RAB_8_CFG_ROHC_SWITCH
– CMP_RAB_9_CFG_ROHC_SWITCH
----End

Example
//Activating PDCP Header Compression (RoHC)
SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch=CFG_PDCP_RFC3095_HC_SWITCH-1,
CmpSwitch=CMP_RAB_5_CFG_ROHC_SWITCH-1&CMP_RAB_6_CFG_ROHC_SWITCH-1&CMP_RAB
_7_CFG_ROHC_SWITCH-1&CMP_RAB_8_CFG_ROHC_SWITCH-1&CMP_RAB_9_CFG_ROHC_SWITC
H-1;
//Deactivating PDCP Header Compression (RoHC)
SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch=CFG_PDCP_RFC3095_HC_SWITCH-0,
CmpSwitch=CMP_RAB_5_CFG_ROHC_SWITCH-0&CMP_RAB_6_CFG_ROHC_SWITCH-0&CMP_RAB
_7_CFG_ROHC_SWITCH-0&CMP_RAB_8_CFG_ROHC_SWITCH-0&CMP_RAB_9_CFG_ROHC_SWITC
H-0;

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 249
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 65 Configuring CS Voice over HSPA/HSPA+

65 Configuring CS Voice over HSPA/HSPA
+

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010619
CS Voice over HSPA/HSPA+.

Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
– This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
– The following features have been configured before this feature is activated:
– WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package, WRFD-010612 HSUPA
Introduction Package, WRFD-010652 SRB over HSDPA, and WRFD-010636 SRB
over HSUPA, in the case of CS voice over HSPA.
– WRFD-010686 CPC-DTX/DRX, in the case of CS voice over HSPA+.
l License
– The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see
2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.
l Other Prerequisites
– The UE is of 3GPP Release 8 or higher and CS voice services are capable of being
carried on HSPA/HSPA+.

Context
The implementation of CS voice services over HSPA is introduced in 3GPP Release 8. In the
case of CS voice services over HSPA, uplink CS voice packets are carried on the E-DCH and
downlink CS voice packets are carried on the HS-DSCH.

CS Voice over HSPA is intended for CS conversational AMR and AMR WB. CS streaming
services are still carried on the DCH. The IMS for VoIP services is not required because the CS
voice services over HSPA are carried on the CS domain of the CN.

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 250
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 65 Configuring CS Voice over HSPA/HSPA+

NOTE

l Data configurations on the BSC6900 and NodeB are required to activate the CS Voice over HSPA/
HSPA+.
l In the case of HSUPA, it is recommended that the non-scheduling transmission mode be used, which
does not need to be configured. In the case of HSDPA, it is recommended that the Enhanced
Proportional Fair (EPF) algorithm be activated. The purpose is to reduce the delay of CS voice services.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA (CME single
configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic Resource
Control Parameter Configuration > Channel Type Parameters; CME batch
modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to configure the
uplink EDCH and downlink HSDSCH as the channels carrying HSPA CS services.
In this step, select the HSPA(UL EDCH,DL HSDSCH) check box under the
parameter CS voice channel type.
2. Optional: If CS voice services need to be carried on the 2 ms Transmission Time
Interval (TTI), run the BSC6900 MML command SET
UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global
Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration >
Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15
Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select the
MAP_HSUPA_TTI_2MS_SWITCH check box under the parameter Service
Mapping Strategy Switch. Go to Step 3.
3. Optional: Configure the HSUPA TTI type of the VoIP service.
a. If the NodeB is configured with the WCDMA Baseband Process Unit REV:b
(WBBPb) and Enhanced Base Band Card (EBBC) boards, it is recommended
that 10 ms HSUPA TTI be set for VoIP services. Run the BSC6900 MML
command SET UFRC (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global
Configuration Express > Basic Resource Control Parameter
Configuration > RNC Oriented FRC Algorithm Parameters; CME batch
modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step,
select the EDCH_TTI_10ms check box under the parameter HSUPA TTI type
of VOIP service.
b. If the NodeB is configured with the WCDMA Baseband Process Unit REV:d
(WBBPd) and Enhanced Base Band Card REV:d (EBBCd) boards, either 10 ms
or 2 ms HSUPA TTI can be set for VoIP services.
a. To set 10 ms HSUPA TTI for HSUPA services, run the BSC6900 MML
command SET UFRC (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global
Configuration Express > Basic Resource Control Parameter
Configuration > RNC Oriented FRC Algorithm Parameters; CME
batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches)
to select the EDCH_TTI_10ms check box under the parameter HSUPA
TTI type of VOIP service.
b. To set 2 ms HSUPA TTI for HSUPA services, do as follows:
1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRC (CME single
configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic
Resource Control Parameter Configuration > RNC Oriented FRC
Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 251
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 65 Configuring CS Voice over HSPA/HSPA+

Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select the
EDCH_TTI_2ms check box under the parameter HSUPA TTI type
of VOIP service.
2) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET
UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS
Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented
RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm
Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC
Parameters in Batches) to select the
DRA_VOICE_SAVE_CE_SWITCH check box under the
parameter Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch.
4. Optional: If the dynamic adjustment of CS voice services over HSUPA from 2 ms
TTI to 10 ms TTI is required, run the BSC6900 MML command SET
UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global
Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration >
Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15
Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select the
DRA_VOICE_TTI_RECFG_SWITCH check box under the parameter Dynamic
Resource Allocation Switch.
5. To configure the EPF scheduling strategy, run the NodeB MML command SET
MACHSPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express >
IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > Locell Algorithm Parameters > MAC
Parameters > MACHSPARA; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying
Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches) to set Scheduling Method to EPF
(Enhanced PF).
l Verification Procedure
1. In the Navigation Tree pane on the BSC6900 LMT, click the Trace tab. In the
displayed Trace Navigation Tree pane, double-click UMTS Services. On the
unfolded list, double-click Uu Interface Trace. In the displayed Uu Interface
Trace dialog box, select RRC_RB_SETUP and RRC_RB_RECFG as shown in
Figure 65-1 to trace Uu interface signaling messages.

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 252
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 65 Configuring CS Voice over HSPA/HSPA+

Figure 65-1 Uu Interface Trace dialog box

2. Analyze the traced messages.
– If data shown in Figure 65-2 is traced on the Uu interface, the UE is in CELL_DCH
state.
– If the data traced on the Uu interface is displayed, as shown in Figure 65-3, CS
voice services are carried on HSPA/HSPA+.

Figure 65-2 UE in CELL_DCH state

Figure 65-3 CS voice services carried on HSPA/HSPA+

3. If CS voice services are carried on HSPA or HSPA+, trace the RRC_RB_SETUP or
RRC_RB_RECFG message on the Uu interface to check the type of carried TTI, as
shown in Figure 65-4.

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 253
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 65 Configuring CS Voice over HSPA/HSPA+

Figure 65-4 Type of TTI carried in the message

l Deactivation Procedure
NOTE

The services admitted before deactivation of this feature are not affected.
The services admitted after the deactivation will not use this feature.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA (CME single
configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic Resource
Control Parameter Configuration > Channel Type Parameters; CME batch
modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step,
select the DCH(UL_DCH,DL_DCH) check box under the parameter CS voice
channel type.
----End

Example
/*Activation procedure*/
//Operations on the BSC6900 side

//Configuring CS voice services to be carried on the EDCH in the uplink
and HS-DSCH in the downlink
SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: CSVoiceChlType =HSPA;

//Enabling the HSUPA 2 ms scheduling algorithm
SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: MapSwitch=MAP_HSUPA_TTI_2MS_SWITCH-1;

//Setting the HSUPA TTI type of the VoIP service to 10 ms TTI
SET UFRC: VoipHsupaTti=EDCH_TTI_10ms;

//Setting the HSUPA TTI type of the VoIP service to 2 ms TTI
SET UFRC: CSVoiceHsupaTti=EDCH_TTI_2ms;

//Turning off the switch of saving CE resources
SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_VOICE_SAVE_CE_SWITCH-1;

//Enabling dynamic adjustment of TTI reconfiguration for CS voice
services
SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_VOICE_TTI_RECFG_SWITCH-1;

//Setting the EPF scheduling strategy on the NodeB side
SET MACHSPARA: SM=EPF;

/*Deactivating CS Voice over HSPA/HSPA+*/
//Operations on the BSC6900 side
SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: CSVoiceChlType=DCH;

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 254
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RAN14.0
Feature Activation Guide 66 Configuring AMR-WB (Adaptive Multi Rate W